Home

Q Corresponding Serial Communication Module User`s Manual

Contents

1. Ooo00000000o0 o o o r rjrejeo TCO OOO OFFER RB Be BI ee Oocoo0o0o0o00000o00 o0 o o OFF ro oo o o ojojo o Bole b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 When transmitting data I A T x System area CD CS DSR Data transmission 16 10 16 10 17 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q 17 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Dedicated instructions are used to simplify programming when using the intelligent functional module functions Among the dedicated instructions for the Q series C24 explained in this manual this chapter focuses on the instructions that can be used for QCPU 17 1 Dedicated Instruction List The following table lists the dedicated instructions explained in this chapter Application Dedicated instruction Functional description Receives data by an interrupt program during data communication via the non procedure protocol or Section 17 2 bidirectional protocol For data rat d Employs user frames to perform data communication transmission reception via t
2. 9 8 9 3 Precautions when Registering Reading Deleting and Using User 9 11 9 4 Register Read Delete User Frames sse eene rennen nnne nennen nnns 9 13 9 4 1 Registering user Mame S a ea edem d eedem ed Ee ainda 9 16 9 4 2 Reading use Mames on Re CER eS 9 17 9 4 3 Deleting user frames eiecit deed ade eee ere de Le dun eu de ca dde 9 18 10 1 User Frame Data Communications Function esee 10 1 10 2 User Frame Types and Registration nennen nennen nnns 10 2 10 3 User Frame On Demand Data Transmission and Buffer Memory 10 2 10 4 On Demand Function Control Procedure During User Frame Use 10 4 10 4 1 Data communication using the ASCII code ssseeenenenmnnns 10 4 10 4 2 Data communications using the binary code ssssseeeneneenmen nnns 10 6 10 5 Example of an On Demand Data Transmission Program Using User 10 8 1 gt o 1 45 11 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING USER FRAMES 11 1 Overview of Data Communication 11 2 11 2 Data Reception uote ee De a di d e aite e Had acta c a c des 11
3. 4 Controlling data communication in accordance with the external device detailed explanation in Chapter 7 1 The Q series C24 controls data communication with the external device by turning ON OFF the DTR DSR signal and sending receiving the DC code 2 DTR DSR signal control Using the DTR ER and DSR DR signals the external device is notified of whether or not data communication can be performed 3 DC code control By sending receiving the DC1 and DC3 code data the external device is notified of whether or not data can be received By enclosing the user data with the DC2 and DC4 code data the external device is notified of the valid transmission data range External Interruption Restart From the succeeding data device side Data 1 1 4 Data 1 2 1 2 PLC CPU Data 2 1 Data22 2 2 side Restart From the Interruption succeeding data DSR signal External device side PLC CPU side Restart From the succeeding data Interruption 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 5 Converting binary code data to ASCII code data to communicate with the external device specification detailed explanation in Chapter 13 1 Binary code data that is processed by the PLC CPU can be converted to ASCII code data for communication 2 ASCII BIN conversion is performed by the Q series C24 according to user Q series C24 Buffer memory H settings External
4. 17 2 C Callback function 3 22 Communication data monitoring 16 1 Condition agreement transmission 2 7 Constant cycle transmission 2 6 CR LF output designation area 11 35 CSET instruction initial setting 17 11 CSET instruction PLC CPU monitoring register cancel 17 5 D Data communication using user frames 11 1 Deleting te eg 9 18 REANO terere 9 17 Registering 9 16 Registration status storage area 9 15 Storage 9 15 UE e E outre 9 13 DC code transmission control 7 1 DCT1 DG3 toten tete tete etes 7 4 I562 D 45 n sesto 7 5 Dedicated instruction list 17 1 Default registration frame 9 7 DTR DSR ER DR signal control 7 2 F Format 0 and Format 1 reception 11 9 Full duplex communications 8 1 G instruction 17 15 GX Developer connection 3 9 3 50 GX Developer connection designation eed ecce oeste ce fis 3 38 Index 1 H 1 N O Half duplex communications 8 1 I O signals for han
5. amp The following shows an specification example of the transmission rate supported by the cellular communication module using the modem initialization command when connecting the Q series C24 to an external device using a cellular phone and a modem Transmission rate 9600 bps is set For the details see the manual of the modem used Setting example for the initialization command of the registration No 7D3H ATQOV1E1X1 amp H1 amp R2 amp A3 amp D05S071 amp N6 Setting example for the initialization command of the registration No 7D4H ATQOV1E1X1 J0 Q2 N3 amp D0 MS 9600 96008071 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q 6 Procedures for register read delete of the initialization data a For the Flash ROM in the Q series C24 1 Register read delete operations are executed on the GX Configurator SC s Data registration for modem initialization screen 2 Display and operate the screen according to Section 8 4 2 of the User s Manual Basic x The factory setting of initialization data stored in the Flash ROM of the series C24 cannot be deleted Registration example Data for user modem initialization BBE Module information Module model name QJ71C24 Start 1 0 No 0000 Module type Serial Communications Module Setting item Setting value To store part please specify as N Eg Q2 to store Q2 data Data for user initialization 1 09 4 User control data 0001 hitia
6. Necessary setting No setting Alreadyset Clear Setting completion Cancel Setting item Item name Set data Setting range choices Password settings Enter the remote password to be set in the QCPU 1 4 bytes Select the type of module that checks the remote password set in the QCPU te drca Model name Password active module settings Start XY Set the head address of the module that checks the 00004 to OFEOH remote password Conditions No setting required 1 Consider the following when setting the remote password Avoid using a character string of simple numbers or letters only Mix numbers letters and special characters amp etc Avoid using a character string that represents the user s name or date of birth 1 When using the Q series C24 in a multiple CPU system write the remote password setting in the control PLC of the Q series C24 2 After setting the remote password in the QCPU reboot the QCPU PLC No 1 in a multiple CPU system Reset power reset using the RESET L CLR switch By rebooting the QCPU the remote password becomes valid 3 The password supported by the QCPU function version A is used to prohibit reading writing of file data in the QCPU using the GX Developer Dual access control can be provided by using the remote password described in this section and password for file access 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION 5
7. esseeeeenennn 16 4 16 3 Communication Data Monitoring Example sese 16 8 17 1 Dedicated Instruction List 17 1 17 2 BUFROVS Instruction sss nennen reni nnne trennen innen tnit nnns 17 2 17 3 CSET Instruction PLC CPU Monitoring 17 5 17 4 CSET Instruction Initial Settings senes 17 11 15 5 GETEIDSIUCUOTD awa athe ea m ep En D deep easi ai ed d ER I itia 17 15 TEO PIRR InSEPUCCIOF oe ne e eee ades 17 18 17 7 PUTE Instmctiorn itin icc e tee ie e terre e rei Eee re oer e ei 17 21 INDEX Index 1 to Index 2 Related Manual 1 Corresponding Serial Communication Module User s Manual Basic 1 OVERVIEW 1 1 Overview of the Serial Communication Module 1 2 Features of the Serial Communication Module 1 3 About Added Changed Functions in Function Version B 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS 2 1 Applicable Systems 2 2 Combinations of PLC CPU and External Device and Available Functions 2 3 When Using the Remote Password Function of the QCPU 2 4 When Using the Q Series C24 at a Remote Station 2 5 When Using the Q Series C24 under the Multiple CPU System with Several QCPUs Function Version B 2 6 When Using the Q Series C24 with the Q00J Q00 Q01CPU 2 7 Checking the Function Version Serial No and Software Version 3 SPECIFICATI
8. B080H Number of blocks sent B081H Monitoring result information for all blocks B082H Monitoring result information for blocks satisfying the conditions x e 2 USING THE PLC CPU MONITORING FUNCTION MELSEC Q f Device information and PLC CPU status information are sent using the data arrangement shown below The ASCII BIN conversion designation is designated in buffer memory address 121H 1C1H Note that when the user frame has been designated by setting to on the value for bit 14 which indicates the user frame No there will be ASCII BIN conversion of corresponding send data It will be sent as binary data See Section 13 3 1 When user frame numbers B0014 to BOOAH are designated example of a one block portion When word device data W100 to W103 4 points is sent When the word byte unit designation is word unit the device data will be sent in a gt L sequence The number of registered points is the number of points in word units When ASCII BIN conversion is not performed The total number of bytes for the device data section is the number of device points X 2 When the word byte unit designation is byte When the word byte unit designation is word js 5 8 g se o o o e t t 1 2 1 1 318 L L H E L L d L HE w 1 1 1 1 1
9. Na Initialization Data See Section 3 4 3 Cota Connection Data See Section 3 4 4 8183 to 8191 1 7 to 1FFFa Lid ba System Flash ROM writing allow prohibit designation 8192 2000 RW 0 Write prohibited 1 Write allowed Callback function designation Auto 1H Callback connection during fixed Callback connection during designated number 8142 to 8182 1 to 1FF6 Setting 4 Setting 5 8193 20014 Callback connection during max designated number is 10 Setting 6 0 For callback 9 Auto Callback connection during fixed Setting 1 RW Er function Bu Auto Callback connection during designated number Setting 2 FH Auto Callback connection during max designated number is 10 Setting 3 Callback denial notification accumulated count designation 8194 20024 Not specified 1 to FFFFu Notification accumulated number count Auto modem initialization specification 3199 20074 0 No auto initialization 1 Auto initialization Modem initialization time DR DSR signal valid invalid designation 8200 20084 T 0 DR signal is not ignored 1 DR signal is ignored For modem Complete signal handling designation for modem function 8201 20094 function 0 Does not turn ON OFF from X13 to X16 designation 2 1 Turns ON OFF from X13 to X16 Wait time of notification designation No waiting time 1 to FFFFu Wa
10. Y v v Reception Reception First frame Arbitrary data First frame Arbitrary data data data gt Equaling exclusive format 1 Equaling exclusive format 1 received data count received data count V Y J V Y J Ignored Ignored Stored in the reception area Stored in the reception area Reception start timing Receive complete timing read timing 11 9 11 9 11 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING USER FRAMES MELSEC Q 11 2 2 Timing for start completion of data reception This section explains the reading of reception data based on the user frame and other factors such as the receive complete code and received data count during data reception using a user frame 1 Timing for start completion of data reception The following describes the timing for start completion of the data reception processing with the Q series C24 Data reception using a user frame Data reception using the receive complete code and received data count initially set in the series C24 Data reception using exclusive format 1 received data count Setting the user When using format 0 When using Format 1 frame for reception See 2 for each timing See 2 for each timing With the first frame When the first frame is received Reception _ _ _ P Without the first When the first data of arbitrary data is _ frame received When the factor of receive complete timing of reception data reading to the PL
11. 11 36 Output frame No designation area 11 36 Output head pointer designation area 11 35 Index 1 PLC CPU monitoring function 2 1 PRR instruction 17 18 17 21 Receive procedure user frame 11 14 Receiving data with an interrupt program 4 1 Reception control method interrupt 4 3 Reception method Format 0 and 1 11 9 Register read delete of the data for connection for modem 3 63 Registration data byte count designation area 9 15 Remote password 3 4 3 16 3 47 Remote password mismatch notification accumulated count designation 3 43 Remote password mismatch notification count designation 3 43 Response monitoring time timer 1 6 7 RS CS control for modem function 3 38 S Sample program mode switching 15 8 Sample programs for modem function 3 87 Send data list user frame 11 30 Setting for transmission user frames 11 33 Start up of the modem function 3 52 T Timing for PLC CPU monitoring 2 5 Timing of transmission of monitoring results 2n tete etd ctore
12. H Accumulated count of unlock process normal completion 8955 22FBu For remote 0 or greater Accumulated count of normal completion 8956 22 function 0 or greater Accumulated count of abnormal completion For remote Accumulated count of lock process based on circuit line disconnection password 0 or greater Accumulated count of lock process based on circuit line function disconnection 9216 2400s System area User free area 2 6656 words For user 1 Communication data monitoring function default buffer Usage is determined by the user 1 Only QJ71C24N R2 R4 is usable System area when using QJ71C24 R2 9728 to 16383 26001 to IMPORTANT Do not write data in the system area of the buffer memory If data is written in the system area the PLC system may operate abnormally There is also a partial system area in the user s area Be careful when reading and writing from and to the buffer memory The writing and reading of setting values to and from the buffer memory are performed using the special utility package GX Configurator SC of the Q series C24 Perform settings and monitoring according to Chapter 8 of the User s Manual Basic This section provides supplementary explanations on setting values used to perform settings and monitoring with GX Configurator SC 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q 2 Details of the buffer memory for mod
13. Initialization Y10 ON 7 completion 1 1 1 1 Dialin progress X11 E Connection in 1 progress X12 OFF i L Initialization connection me 1 abnormal completion 1 RS 232 CD terminal OFF i Y Dial H Dial H Dial Dial Dialing e LL _____ Retry In case of three times Connection channel and retry operation are performed using the buffer memory setting 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q Example2 When performing the initialization and the line connection from the Q series C24 side simultaneously ee See Section 3 4 5 Buffer memory for connection 0 X 3000 Address 35 53 Normal completion Connection ir request Y11 f Initialization B completion Y10 Dial in progress x44 Connection in progress x12 RS 232 CD terminal Set Display a result code iw using the AT command in RR the local station side modem Abnormal completion See section 3 4 5 Connection request Y1 i r Initialization lt Y10 completion T i Dial in progress X11 D 48 Connection in i i progress x12 i i Initialization connection AlS pn E abnormal completion i RS 232 CD terminal OFF Li t Modem init
14. PL Buffer memory Sequence program device memory Reception data read request x83 Sets CH1 to the reception MOVP KI Do channel Sets the allowable number MOVP K6 03 of receive data to 6 G INPUT us pO 010 Executes reception SET M100 Sets the normal completion flag m EET 101 Sets the abnormal completion flag When the receive transparent code designation is set to Enable and the ASCII BIN conversion is set to Disable the codes for receivable data and those for receive data that is stored in the buffer memory s reception area as follows Codes stored in the Receivable codes reception area Receive transparent code Additional code 01H to FFH designation section Transparent code OOH to FFH OOH to FFH Arbitrary data section including complete code 00 to FFH OOH to FFH 12 10 12 10 12 TRANSPARENT CODES AND ADDITIONAL CODES MELSEC Q 12 4 2 Example of data transmission The following shows an example of data transmission 1 Additional code 10H DLE transparent code 02H STX External device side Additional code Q series C24 deletes Head data Transparent code cil For word unit Received byte count excluding additional code 12 2 6 For byte unit Received byte count excluding additional code 12 PLC CPU side ree RIF o 124 304 3141324 42 134 12H ODHOAH 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ID
15. d MELSEC Q When receiving using arbitrary data and last frame combination reception using Format 0 Addtional code Removed by the Q series C24 Transparent code mro 0 1 2 3 CL R F 1 1234H i NA The illustration below is for word units 0 31 32 33 02 41 42 43 34 1 240 DHOAHSBHO4H Y dm end ADH User frame use control Arbitrary data area Last frame 2H designation PLC CPU Corresponds to register AE None First frame No designation 419 0 1st xu ea c MC E Dx eas ead a tion dat d on nd eception data rea request x3 None 0 3rd None 1 PLC CPU m 4th L Last frame No designation 419 1st Completion device MO LON Abnormal 3 None i 1 gt On 2nd Stats deum device yyy y completion 2 ig None at completion Normal completion 3rd 2 5 gt 0 4th 1 scan YES Receive transparent 1204 code designation z 1002H S 121 Disable ASCII BIN conversion n E designation User frame receive ul 2 20204 format designation L 25BH Receive user frame y To DO 0 1st Format 0 ith A 2021 6001 Rceive data count gt D3 2nd Format 0 O08 06H 1 0 Receive data 2022 601H arbitrary data 0 3rd Format 1 314 304 area 4 bates gt l 3 2 2023 602 T
16. 1 MMMMMMMMMMMMMMMM 0000000011111100 7654321054321098 When the word byte unit designation is word rT T T T T 7 I og S 5 2 S 52 S 2 89 ss 9 32 E J 2 Z S co 299 co 9o co ges o Do g 5 9 uz g S9 5 2 59 gt gt gt gt zt o a 2 o 2 a g o o a T Q i a 5 bz z gt 9 gt 8 1 Le Sy JA L H H LiH LiH LIH L L H L L L H L H H L 1 i W i i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 l 1 1 00 01 00 4 4 OOH OOH OOH 01H 1 OOH 02 00H OOH OOH OOH 904 01H OOH 11 30 OOH OOH OOH 01H 1 OOH OOH OOH W100 W101 W102 W103 i beet 2 USING THE PLC CPU MONITORING FUNCTION MELSEC Q When ASCII BIN conversion is performed The total number of bytes for the device data section is the number of device points X 4 When the word byte unit designation is byte Device code Monitoring head device registered points Device data Device code Monitoring head device Number of registered points Device data 1 I57H 2AH 30H 30H 30H 1 31H 30H 30H 30H 34H 30H 30H 30H 30H130H 31H430H 30 30 32u430H 30H130H 33H 30H 30H 4DHy 2AH 30H 30H 30H 30H 5 1 w100 w101 w102
17. 1 0 0 T 7 7 Ej sum Ci L 1 02AB4 T check Xi code T T S Station T No A X gt 024 0 i i i Transmission reception i i i 3B 41u 31n ABni 12910391329 014 0D4 0A data code 1 1 1 1 1 1 How to calculate the sum check code and data contents transmitted and received This is a numeric value obtained by adding data in the above range as binary data In the case of the example Range 1 H L 41u 31H ABH 12H 03H 0132 Register code Data contents transmitted and received arrangement FFH EEH 01H and 32H are transmitted and received beginning from 32H FFH FOH 32H is transmitted and received FFH F1H 3 and 2 are transmitted and received beginning from 3 FFH F3H 2 is transmitted and received In the case of the example Range 2 H L 02H OOH 3BH 41H 31H ABH 12H 03H 016 Register code Data contents transmitted and received arrangement FFH F4H 01H and 6FH are transmitted and received beginning from 6FH FFH F6H 6FH is transmitted and received FFH F7H 6 F are transmitted and received beginning from 6 FFH F9H F is transmitted and received 9 CONTENTS AND REGISTRATION OF THE USER FRAMES FOR DATA COMMUNICATION MELSEC Q 9 1 2 Default registration frame read only This frame is registered to the Q series
18. Corresponds to 8001 80004 Corresponds to 41 for first designated frame for second designated for third designated for fourth designated for fifth designated Register No of frame frame frame frame corresponding user frame Transmission instruction X50 Ou Other than Do not send PLC CPU OUTPUT 1H Completion device MO NE LON 28 2 4 Abnormal BH Status display device n completion P seu t leti at completion Normal 2 completion i BC coot 8000 1 121 Convert 1H 400 oon 024 12344 401 124 56AB 402 _ 8A8 56H ABH Buffer memory Transmission instruction MELSEC Q Eight characters of data in the transmission area are sent in two characters per byte through ASCII BIN conversion User frame No being transmitted CRI LF output designation Output head pointer designation Output count designation Output frame no designation 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th ASCII BIN conversion designation Transmission area Designation of no of data sent Transmission data 0004 in byte units E KI 01 Sets CH1 to the transmission channel H2 D10 Sets the number of data sent to 2 H1234 D11 Sets the arbitrary transmission data for D11 to D12 WovP 56 D12 1 0 H8 H400 D10 K3 Sets the arbitrary tr
19. 5 CHANGING SEND AND RECEIVE DATA LENGTH UNITS TO BYTE UNITS WORD BYTES UNITS SETTING MELSEC Q MEMO 6 CHANGING THE DATA COMMUNICATIONS MONITORING TIMES MELSEC Q 6 CHANGING THE DATA COMMUNICATIONS MONITORING TIMES The monitoring times are timers used by the Q series C24 to monitor the receiving interval time between each byte when receiving data from the external device the PLC CPU processing time and the time it takes to transmit to the external device The monitoring times can be set for each interface The Q series C24 uses the monitoring time set by the user to control data transmission to and reception from the external device Set the monitoring times to match the specifications of the external device The Q series C24 monitoring times are shown below Protocol that can monitor the time that can monitor the time EET Q series C24 Monitoring time Notes default value d directional No reception aes Transmission time for the set 0 bytes number of bytes depends on Infinite wait the transmission rate Response monitoring time For bidirectional protocol this is 2 timer 1 valid for transmission Lu Transmission monitoring 3 min time timer 2 Example Data communications using an MC protocol Command message 1 byte First data Last data External First data Last data device 4 PLC CP
20. Arbitrary data Data Opposite device such as a bar code reader Q series C24 transmissio or ID controller personal computer User frame For more details on the Transparent code and ASCII BIN conversion used in the explanations of this chapter see the chapters listed below When using transparent codes or performing data communication using ASCII BIN conversion please read the following chapters as well When using transparent codes See Chapter 12 When performing data communication using ASCII BIN conversion See Chapter 13 11 1 11 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING USER FRAMES MELSEC Q 11 1 Overview of Data Communication Procedure The following is an overview of the procedure when performing data communication between the opposite device and PLC CPU using a user frame Switch setting by GX Developer Initial setting by GX Configurator SC See Section 4 5 and Chapter 8 of User s Manual Basic When only default registration frame used When registering user frames Register to th ies C24 Flash ROM A Abend ine C24 ea mem See Section 8 4 1 of User s Manual Basic 3 y See this manual Chapter 9 When receiving data e al Set user frame Nos etc to receive user frame designation area addresses ADu to B5u 14Du to 155p adre to 20274 21204 to 2127 of the See Section 11 2 4 of this manual Q series C24 buffer memory Must be set by
21. _ Number of reception data Connection request Transmission Transmission enabea si D61 Reception data Convert the transmission command into Modem disconnection request PRI D100 Initialization error code Convert the notification command into ES EI d ES Q series C24 accessible Line disconnection enabled D102 Notification error code Convert the line disconnection Initialization data registration completion D103 transmission error code command into pulse Data registration completion for connection Line disconnection request occurrence Data reception error code Initialization completion Reception processing in progress flag D105 p92 Transmission processing in progress flag ee 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q 3 5 1 Sample program for data communication 1 1 Sample program system configuration The configuration of a system using this sample program is shown below 1 Line connection 2 Communications by the non procedure protocol 3 Line disconnection QJ71C24 R2 2 QJ71C24 R2 1 2 Connection request station side QJ71C24 R2 1 sample program The modem connected to the CH1 side interface is initialized the line is connected data are transmitted by the non procedure protocol and the line is disconnected through commands from the user Perform the following settings before running this program a GX Developer switch settings See Se
22. additional code ACK NAK of error code 1 area Error code section only No 4 b Sending 1 The transmission control code data is added to the transmission data designated by the PLC CPU arbitrary data section of the transmission message and that transmission data is transmitted If ASCII BIN conversion is designated the transmission data is sent after itis converted to ASCII code data 2 Ifthe sum check code is set to Enable in the transmission setting via GX Developer switch settings the code will be calculated from the transmission message and added to the transmission message 12 14 12 14 12 TRANSPARENT CODES AND ADDITIONAL CODES MELSEC Q 3 Ifa send transparent code is designated additional code data is added preceding the transparent code additional code data for the arbitrary data section and is then sent External device Q series C24 Sum check code setting ASCII BIN conversion designation No Buffer memory Yes Transmission Transparent code designation No No Arbitrary data section only Data transmission i Adding Yes Adding transmission Calculation and check of Yes A a ganeor ot additional code control code ENQ sum check code ahd tahsmission data area Response E reception i ji pet ves A DARS cose E rele gt Yes ASCII rosu sorage Error code secti
23. and is then transmitted 13 14 13 14 14 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING EXTERNAL DEVICE AND PLC CPU M N CONFIGURATION MELSEC Q 14 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING EXTERNAL DEVICE AND PLC CPU M N CONFIGURATION Always read this chapter when communicating data by using a multidrop link to connect the external devices and PLC CPU in an m n system configuration You do not have to read this chapter when using a system configuration other than m n to communicate data This section describes the case when data is communicated between external devices and the PLC CPU by connecting multiple external devices m stations and multiple Q series C24 n stations over a multidrop link The total number of m and n is up to 32 stations With this m n multidrop link only MC protocol data communications by command transmission from the external devices can be performed 14 14 1 Data Communications Precautions 1 When communicating data by using an m n system configuration multiple external devices cannot communicate data with the PLC CPU at the same time Interlock the external devices so that the external device can communicate with the PLC CPU in a 1 1 configuration See Sections 14 2 and 14 3 for the items to be agreed upon and the interlock method to interlock the external devices 2 Communicate data between external devices and the PLC CPU by the following methods only Full duplex data communications m n data communic
24. is output at the end of the AT command by the Q series C24 when processing initialization automatically added 3 The registration status of the data for initialization stored in the Flash ROM may be checked in data registration for modem initialization screen for GX Configurator SC or the buffer memory address 226H to 228H 550 to 552 When newly registering register by designating an unregistered number 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q When designating a registration number that has already been registered first delete the registration data in the preoccupied registration number prior to registration 4 When connecting the Q series C24 to an external device using a cellular phone and a modem set the transmission rate supported by the cellular communication module on the modem side 5 Registration contents at shipment 1 The data for initialization registered in the Flash ROM of the Q series C24 are shown below Registration number Hoxadecimal Initialization command 700 ATE1Q0V1 amp C1 amp D2 amp K3 amp S0S0 1 2 If initialization commands other than listed above are needed the data for initialization needs to be registered to the Flash ROM or the buffer memory of the Q series C24 Perform the following setting in respect to the modem TA connected to the series C24 side For settings other than listed below perform the setting as designated by the modem TA o O AT 5
25. 13 2 Settings for ASCII BIN Conversion In order to convert data to be sent received via the non procedure protocol and bidirectional protocol from binary code to ASCII code it is necessary to make specific settings for the Q series C24 before performing data communication The following describes the settings for the ASCII BIN conversion 1 The ASCII BIN conversion settings can be designated for each interface 2 The ASCII BIN conversion settings are registered in the Transmission control and others system setting screen of GX Configurator SC For the registration screen see Section 8 4 5 of the User s Manual Basic 13 1 13 1 13 COMMUNICATING WITH ASCII CODE ASCII BIN CONVERSION MELSEC Q 13 3 Performing ASCII BIN Conversion for Data Communicated via Non Procedure Protocol This section explains the ASCII BIN conversion of data to be communicated using the non procedure protocol 1 The following shows the range of send receive data for which ASCII BIN conversion can be performed Applicable data range at transmission Message at transmission Arbitrary data section 1 3 reception in arbitrary format Applicable data range at reception Applicable data range at transmission Message at transmission User frame d User frame reception using user frames first frame section last frame 4 Applicable data range at reception When sending or receiving data the Q series C2
26. 2 During monitoring a After monitoring starts data of reception transmission receiving error and signal change are stored from the head address of the monitor data area in the order of occurrence b When the monitoring data exceeds the capacity of the monitor data area monitoring is continued by writing new data over the oldest data However monitoring may automatically stop according to the settings of the monitor option area Address 2019H 2119H See Section 16 2 2 b CH1 Buffer memory 2600 0003 Monitor data pointer storage area 2601 Monitor data size storage area 2602 0 2603 1 2604 2 2605 Oldestdata 3 26000 Monitor data area 32FFu Default value 16 2 16 2 16 USING COMMUNICATION DATA MONITORING FUNCTION MELSEC Q c Each data is stored in the monitor data area using the following timing Data classification Data storage timing Received data When receiving data Transmitted data When transmitting data Receiving error data When detecting receiving errors RS DSR When changing the RS ER signals signals RS 232 line When signal changes are detected during the periodic processing Operation interval 1 to 19 ms as well as for the above timing Monitoring is not performed during the periodic processing 3 Monitor stop Monitoring stops if any of the following conditions are satisfied a Monitor stop by user instructions Monitoring
27. Addition 1 The data count is in word units For 41 Transparent code Additional code For 104 12 1 12 TRANSPARENT CODES AND ADDITIONAL CODES MELSEC Q 12 2 Registering Transparent Codes and Additional Codes To control transparent codes and additional codes for data to be sent received with the non procedure or bidirectional protocol it is necessary to perform settings in the Q series C24 prior to data communication The following explains the registration of transparent and additional codes 1 For each interface 10 combinations and one combination of transparent codes and additional codes can be set for transmission and reception respectively 2 Transparent and additional codes are registered on the GX Configurator SC s Transmission control and others system setting screen For details on the screen used for registration see Section 8 4 5 of User s Manual Basic If additional data code is received during data reception the Q series C24 will not treat the immediately succeeding one byte data as the following control data Data received as the first frame and last frame of the user frames Therefore do not set the following The code of the data described above cannot be designated as additional codes for data reception 1 Areceive user frame that contains additional code data for data reception 2 The same reception complete code as the additional code data for data reception
28. GX Developer connection 1 1 The communication protocol is specified as 004 when the GX Developer connection mode is set using the GX Developer switch setting See the User s Manual Basic Section 4 5 2 15 5 15 5 15 SWITCHING THE MODE AFTER STARTING b15 b14 to b8 D Do Do Tio Te Ti D m MELS EC Q b Switching transmission specifications designation area address 91H 131 1 Designates the transmission specifications after mode switching 2 When the transmission specifications are returned to the contents set in GX Developer 00004 is written to this area 3 When setting arbitrary transmission specifications other that the contents set in GX Developer the value corresponding to ON OFF of the relevant bit in the illustration shown below is written Relevant bit 1 ON O OFF is designated the same as transmission EE of GX See Section 4 5 2 of User s Manual Basic b7 b5 bO Bit position Description OFF 0 Communication rate 15 6 Fixed to ON 1 Specify 8000H when the GX Developer connection is selected for switching mode No 1 The specified values for the communication speed Setting b8 the Communication rate Communication rate Bit position Unit bps b14 to b8 Unit bps b14 to b8 2 6600 y ao l 32200 o 38
29. Saya 2j 3 2 gt 602 to D10 or after 2023 4th Format 1 H 33H 32H Exclusive format 1 A STX 2024H received data count 603 A 0 1st 41H 02H B 2025 0 2nd 604 434 42 12344 2026 0 3rd 605 12H LF CR 606 eem 2 4th 279 Buffer memory Reception data read request Buffer memory X83 FROMP H8 H258 Do KI Reads combinations of user frames received DI Sets to CH1 the reception channel D4 Sets the allowable number of reception data to 6 Executes reception M100 Sets the normal completion flag M101 Sets the abnormal completion flag 11 23 11 23 11 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING USER FRAMES MELSEC Q b When receiving with a combination of the first frame and arbitrary data reception using Format 0 Additional code Removed by Qseries C24 Transparent code When STX handled ns as transparent code E X Receive data count Word units 02 Receive byte count excluding frame and Head data Pip id code 12 2 6 Receive byte count excluding frame and sii additional code 12 RUD i i T ACO 29r T At X i i i External device The figure shown below is for word units 1 eif ei i i iy i i 2 41938 30 31 32933 02 41 42 43 4 12 00 AAH 6n Receive data count uA a 2 User frame use control i aD designation PLC C
30. Switch 2 Non procedure protocol Set c nt nis Buffer memory address to Remake Explanation store registration value section Word byte units designation Byte 96H xs Section 8 4 5 of Additional code 104 DLE Send transparent code designation No 11FH User s Manual Transparent code 02 STX Basic ASCII BIN conversion designation Disable 121H Output frame No designation 1st 2 Output frame No designation 2nd inih licati Section 8 4 10 of ee the diagram in the application Output frame No designation 3rd 80014 examnls 3 pE User s Manual Output frame No designation 4th 8000 BD pe Basic Output frame No designation 5th 41B 11 37 11 37 11 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING USER FRAMES MELSEC Q 1 Example of a sequence program when setting is done using the GX Configurator SC See Chapter 17 of this manual for details on the command s External device side r T T r S NES LN Gu i i i Total number issi iE Ss 22 02 1 OT AIL j ranamissionsrea data Four bytes of data in the xiu 99 mr arbitrary data section ixi S PLC CPU side ee SUB transmission area are xg asd i 1 012D 1234 56 10 sent as is Das eg bog i i i 02 151 1 OAH 1 Olh 13 54 544 414 404
31. The following functions can use Q series C24 user frames to transmit and receive data MC protocol on demand function See Chapter 10 Non procedure protocol data transmit and receive functions See Chapter 11 Data can be transmitted and received by registering the corresponding user frames to the Q series C24 in advance to match the data contents that are transmitted and received between the external device and the Q series C24 This chapter explains the data that can be registered the data contents that are transmitted and received and registering to the Q series C24 of user frames that can be used in data communications with the external device See Chapters 10 and 11 for a description of how each data communications function uses the user frames 9 1 User Frame Types and Contents During Communication This section explains the kinds of user frames handled by the Q series C24 and the data contents that are transmitted and received The following two kinds of user frames are available Either kind can be used User frame Frame described in Section 9 1 1 User frame Generic term Default registration frame Frame described in Section 9 1 2 9 1 1 User frames to be registered and used by the user The following explains the registered data data contents that are transmitted and received and how the Q series C24 handles user frames registered the Q series C24 Flash ROM or buffer memory by the user 1 General descript
32. in the output frame No designation area Adding additional code For Output count designation Check reception complete code and received data count Check and delete user Yes Delete Calculate and check Data stored in the additional sum check code reception area frames code using user frames Arbitrary data section only POINT Explained above is how the Q series C24 processes communication data when enabling and disabling the communication via the user frame function ASCII BIN conversion function and or transparent code designation communication function When communicating data to an external device use this information as a reference in the selection of a communication method 12 7 12 7 12 TRANSPARENT CODES AND ADDITIONAL CODES MELSEC Q 12 4 Example of Data Communication Using the Non Procedure Protocol This section shows examples of data communication using the non procedure protocol when the following settings and registrations are made 1 Settings via GX Developer Perform the following settings on the Intelligent functional module switch setting Screen See Section 4 5 of the User s Manual Basic Setting item Setting value CH1 Transmission setting Set according to the Switch 1 ANE gt CH1 Communication rate setting external device CH1 Communication protocol Non procedure Swit
33. not required X Designated stored value 0 When deleting Registration data i 1 to 78 Number of bytes in the registration data 1 00 6912 byte number Only for the initialization command designation section Registration Read Bm g Any data used by the user to manage the 8001 User controlled processing 1 01 6913 registration data manufacturer code control data not required number etc x 1B02 to Initialization Data code for the initialization command for 6914 to 6952 1828 registration 0 When deleting Registration data 9 1 to 78 Number of bytes in the registration data 1829 6953 byte number GAS M Only for the initialization command designation x section egistration 9 Any data used by the user to manage the No 80024 User controlled processing 1 2 6954 registration data manufacturer code control data not required number etc 1B2B to 6955 to 6993 Initialization Data ende for the initialization command for 1 51 registration x Registration data i When deleting 9 1 to 78 Number of bytes in the registration data 1 8142 byte number om Only for the initialization command designation E x Registration section Read F User controlled Any data used by the user to manage the 8143 j registration data manufacturer code control P 9
34. x3 Prior to data communication the series C24 checks whether the remote password specified by the user and the remote password set in the QCPU agree or not If they agree it allows access to the specified station 4 When starting data communication designate the connection data with the buffer memory 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q 3 2 System Configuration This section describes system configurations when the modem function is used to call a pager receiver or to perform data communication with an external device via public lines 3 2 1 System configuration when performing data communication with an external device Q25HCPU GAR B28 000000 QUT1C24 R2 Q25HCPU 925929 oooood QI71C24 R2 RUN O moon jew The following describes the system configuration examples used when performing data communication between the external device and PLC using the Q series C24 s MC protocol non procedure protocol bidirectional protocol 1 Connection example with an external device External device Public line Modem RS 232 2 Connection example with a Q series C24 QUT1C24 RZ Public line d Modem gt Modem Q25HCPU 3393ER 000000 RS 232 cable Public line eT C
35. 1 3 0 4 User frame registration code lo al lx olcl PLC CPU T 9i a bg zm ne i Send data corresponding to xs em ltd registration code 15 2 l Example RE UN ONES RN 004 12 4 56 8 3 17H Send data code 1 1 L ONDEMAND command 1 1 ONDEMAND command complete bit 1 1 1 ONDEMAND command abnormal completion bit 1 scan Word units 96u 0 First address AOH COOH Data length 1 2 1st first frame No 9 2nd first frame No 1st last frame No 402 2nd last frame No Ou 0 When a transmission error is generated Result of execution 256u other than 0 is stored Send data COOH 1234H Sequentially transmits the data in 4 bit units begining C014 5678H from the most significant bit CH1 side 10 7 10 7 10 ON DEMAND DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING USER FRAMES MELSEC Q 10 5 Example of an On Demand Data Transmission Program Using User Frames The following shows an example of a sequence program when sending on demand data including user frames Perform the following settings via GX Developer and registration using GX Configurator SC in advance The sequence program for sending on demand data when performing the following settings using GX Developer and registration using GX Configurator SC is the same as the sequence program indicated in Section 11
36. 33 10 02 00 41 Transmission command X50 PLC CPU OUTPUT Transmission Completion device MO data count ON Abnormal aa completion Status display device 0 at completion M1 1 1 The following diagram is for word unit 1 Normal 1 1 completion One scan ps 400 og 1 0 D10 4014 31n 30s 3 2 3 2 D11 402 g 33H 324 334 324 LL 5 D12 NULL STX gt 403 NULL STX 171 004 024 0 02 p ee ER E B A B A D13 404 2 425 41u 428 41 E 12344 12344 D14 405 120 34 124 34u LF CR LF CR D15 406H L ODH Sequence program Buffer memory device memory Transmission instruction X50 DMOVP H33323130 010 Sets transmission data 010 to 015 DMOVP H42410002 D12 H0A0D1234 D14 MOVP Di Sets CH1 to the transmission channel Sets the allowable number of transmitting data to 6 K6 D3 01 010 MO Executes transmission SET M100 Sets normal completion flag Wt 4 M101 Sets abnormal completion flag 12 11 12 11 12 TRANSPARENT CODES AND ADDITIONAL CODES MELSEC Q 2 Additional code 10H DLE transparent code 02H STX 1st group Additional code 10H DLE transparent code 03H ETX 2nd group Additional Additional code code 1st group 2nd group External device side Trans
37. 373 0 2 562 263 Phone 7 812 325 36 53 Fax 375 0 17 22 76 669 Fax 373 0 2 562 263 Fax 7 812 147 20 55 email tehnikonGbelsonet net e mail intehsisemdl net e mail consys consys spb ru Getronics b v BELGIUM Getronics b v NETHERLANDS Electrotechnical RUSSIA Control Systems Pontbeeklaan 43 B 1731 Asse Zellik Phone 32 0 2 467 17 51 Fax 32 0 2 467 17 45 e mail infoautomation getronics com Control Systems Donauweg 2 B NL 1043 AJ Amsterdam Phone 31 0 20 587 67 00 Fax 31 0 20 587 68 39 e mail info gia getronics com Systems Siberia Partizanskaya St 27 Office 306 RU 121355 Moscow Phone 7 095 416 4321 Fax 7 095 416 4321 e mail info eltechsystems ru TELECON CO BULGARIA Beijer Electronics AS NORWAY 4 A Ljapchev Blvd Teglverksveien 1 BG 1756 Sofia N 3002 Drammen Phone 359 0 2 97 44 05 8 Phone 47 0 32 24 30 00 Fax 359 0 2 97 4406 1 Fax 47 0 32 84 85 77 e mail e mail info beijer no INEA CR d o o CROATIA MPL Technology Sp zo o POLAND Drvinje 63 ul Sliczna 36 HR 10000 Zagreb Phone 385 0 1 36 67 140 Fax 385 0 1 3667 140 e mail PL 31 444 Krak w Phone 48 0 12 632 28 85 Fax 48 0 12 632 47 82 mail krakow mopl pl AutoCont CZECH REPUBLIC Control Systems s r o Nemocnicni 12 CZ 702 00 Ostrava 2 Phone 420 59 6152 111 Fax 420 59 6152 562 e mail consys autocont cz louis poulsen DE
38. Cables not placed in the duct or without clamping may hang or shift allowing them to be accidentally pulled which may cause a module malfunction and cable damage e Before connecting the cables check the type o f interface to be connected Connecting or erroneous wiring to the wrong interface may cause failure to the module and external devices e Tighten the terminal screws within the range of specified torque If the terminal screws are loose it may result in short circuits or malfunction If the screws are tightened too much it may cause damage to the screw and or the module resulting in fallout short circuits or malfunction e When removing the communication cable or power supply cable from the module do not pull the cable When removing the cable with a connector hold the connector on the side that is connected to the module When removing the cable connected to the terminal block first loosen the screws on the part that is connected to the terminal block Pulling the cable that is still connected to the module may cause malfunction or damage to the module or cable Be careful not to let foreign matters such as sawdust or wire chips get inside the module They may cause fires failure or malfunction The top surface of the module is covered with protective film to prevent foreign objects such as cable offcuts from entering the module when wiring Do not remove this film until the wiring is complete Before operating t
39. D instruction completion System Bit D 1 also turns on if the execution completes abnormally The file registers of each of the local device and the program cannot be used as setting data Control data Setting data Setting range Set by sto Dummy The result of reading via the GETE instruction is stored S171 Read result 0 Normal System Other than 0 Abnormal error code S1 2 Directed frame No Designate the user frame No 1000 to 1199 User Designate the maximum bytes of the user frame s registered data that can be stored in S2 pots The number of bytes of the user frame s registered data that Registered bytes count 1 to 80 System has been read is stored Allowable number of read bytes 1 to 80 User 1 For information about errors caused by incorrect data designated by the user see the description in Errors on the next page 2 The Set by column indicates the following User Data set by the user before executing the dedicated instruction System The PLC CPU stores execution results of the dedicated instruction 17 15 17 15 17 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Functions 17 16 MELSEC Q 1 This instruction reads data from the user frame in the Q series C24 as designated by Un QCPU Q series C24 b15 to b8b7 to bO User frame S2 0 B A Read A 1 D i C B 2 E C i D Read byte length E F 2 While the GETE instruc
40. M92 M150 M155 M156 M156 M155 M92 M53 M102 RET MELSEC Q Data registration processing for initialization subroutine Sets the number of bytes of the registration data Sets the user control data control number Sets the initialization command Write the data for initialization Data No 80014 Registration to buffer memory Data registration complete flag for initialization is set Modem initialization processing subroutine Initialization request signal is set Initialization request execution flag is set When the initialization complete signal ON the initialization complete flag is set and the request signal is reset When the initialization connection abnormal complete signal ON the error code is read and the request signal is reset Data communication processing subroutine Non procedure protocol transmission Set the transmission data Sets the number of transmission data words Transmission request execution flag is set Transmission request execution Transmission request normal completion Transmission request abnormal completion 3 101 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION P52 P8 3 102 D160 K2 D163 M91 M160 M103 M165 M166 M166 M165 M91 M56 RET Y10 Yi2 M83 Y12 K1M3 M7 M32 K1M100 M83 M82 RET MELSEC Q Data reception processing subroutine Sets the d
41. MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC MELSEC System Q Programmable Logic Controllers User s Manual Application Serial Communications Modules QJ71C24 R2 QJ71C24N R2 R4 Art no 130025 01 12 2003 ae aa MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION Version E ersion e SAFETY PRECAUTIONS e Always read these instructions before using this equipment Before using this product please read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly The instructions given in this manual are concerned with this product For the safety instructions of the programmable controller system please read the user s manual for the PLC module to use In this manual the safety instructions are ranked as DANGER and CAUTION l Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions gt DANGER resulting in death or severe injury l JN CAUTION Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions N resulting in medium or slight personal injury or physical damage j Note that the CAUTION level may lead to a serious consequence according to the circumstances Always follow the instructions of both levels because they are important to personal safety Please save this manual to make it accessible when required and always forward it to the end user Design Precautions lt DANGER e See ma
42. Set the number of transmission data Sets the transmitting flag Executes the transmission request Transmission request execution flag is set Transmission normal completion Transmission abnormal completion Data reception processing subroutine Sets the data reception channel to CH1 Reception data read execution flag is set Executes the reception data reading 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION Mi60 161 SET M165 RST W166 M161 SET M66 RST 165 MM RT M91 RST N56 RET 1 M ET vi2 vi X10 x12 x14 MO 1 M M FROM H221 D105 E D105 JE 7 SE N73 N73 X14 _ _ __ I RS vi2 X14 M RS W7 RS W73 RS M72 RET P8 N80 RST Y10 N81 RST vi x10 SET vi2 x14 1 SET M83 N83 x10 x12 x14 p esr 2 x10 xi X12 x13 x14 K0 KM3 ARST 7 RST M32 RST M42 RST M72 m KIM100 RST M83 OORT M82 RET END 1 1 J 1 1 1 1 1 1 MELSEC Q Received data read normally completed Received data read abnormally completed Line disconnection processing subroutine Line disconnection from local station e Modem disconnection request signal is set e When the modem disconnection completion signal is ON the error code is read e When the normal completion signal is ON the line disconnection completion flag is set e Modem disconnection request signal is reset Su
43. read point Number of registered points When performing device data monitoring or transmission designate the device range for each block for the number of blocks designated by setting item e number of registered word blocks and number of registered bit blocks The target of device data monitoring for condition agreement transmission is the head device for each block Word device designated block Head word device for one word Bit device designated block Head bit device for one bit 1 The monitored device is the item that indicates the target device of the corresponding block and designated with the codes listed in Section 2 2 2 4 2 The head device is the data that designates the head of the target device range for the corresponding block 3 The read point is the item that indicates the target device range for the corresponding block which designate points from the head device No The bit device designates points in word units 1 point 16 bits 4 The methods for designating these data are the same as the designation methods when reading from or writing to the device memory described in Section 3 3 of the Reference Manual Designate according to the explanations of items 2 through 4 in Section 3 3 1 2 c of the Reference Manual When the user performs the PLC CPU monitoring registration the device will designate either a decimal or hexadecimal device No The read points registration points are designated as hex
44. transmits 8 f S o0 S 1 o 210 communications gt report Jof ar zv o o 1 31 46 31 42 59 30 30 38 14 11 14 11 15 SWITCHING THE MODE AFTER STARTING MELSEC Q 15 SWITCHING THE MODE AFTER STARTING This function forcefully switches the current communication protocol and transmission specifications of the designated interface from an external device and the PLC CPU after the Q series C24 starts When the Q series C24 starts it begins operation with the setting values of the GX Developer switch setting The mode switching function is used to change the communication protocol of the specified interface and transmission specifications and continue data communications without restarting the QCPU 1 Mode switching from external device a If the communication protocol of the interface connecting the external device is MC protocol mode switching can be performed b The communication protocol can be changed from the MC protocol as shown below Format switching MC protocol Formats 1 to 5 Non procedure protocol Bidirectional protocol GX Developer connection c The transmission specifications set by the GX Developer switch setting can be changed 2 Mode switching from PLC CPU a Regardless of the current communication protocol of the connected interface the external device can perform mode swi
45. 00 2 USING THE PLC CPU MONITORING FUNCTION MELSEC Q 4 When user frame No 081 is designated Information on monitoring results for all blocks are sent as follows Results are sent in the following order the device information registered in the word block the device information registered in the bit block and then PLC CPU status information Example Number of registered word blocks 1 W100 to W103 4 points Number of registered bit blocks 1 MO to M15 1 point Perform CPU status monitoring 1 1 point When ASCII BIN conversion is not performed The total number of bytes for the device data section is the number of device points X 2 When the word byte unit designation is byte I TT TT TT I I gs g se 38 28 8 99 3 S 56 3 9 88 2 8 Ex 8 BE 8 E 9 27 8 Ev g E 58 2 53 i 2 53 u 9 25 Rom 9 2 5 8 a 3 a a 2 a z g 5 2 5 2 gt gt MEN MED 1 LE H L H L HiL HiL HiL H L L H L L H L H 1 1 1 w M i i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 i i 1 00 01 00 4 4 0 OOH OOH 1 OOH 1 02H 00H 1034 OOH OOH OOH OOH 90 014 OOH 30H 11 OOH OOH OOH 1 01 OOH OOH OOH ue A A w100 W101 W102 W103 p 3 0 1 1 1 1 1
46. 02H OOH 0 00H OOH 90 014 0 114 30H 22d W100 W101 W102 W103 ar dur Cr ee Eni 1 1 3 0 ote 1 110 0 i 0 MMMMMMMMMMMMMMMM 1111110000000000 5432109876543210 2 USING THE PLC CPU MONITORING FUNCTION MELSEC Q When ASCII BIN conversion is performed The total number of bytes for the device data section is the number of device points X 4 When the word byte unit designation is byte For W100 to W103 block data For MO to M15 block data T TT T TT TI TT Eo fo Pha as T Fea T TT T TT geg v2 S g 8 58 5 E 22 FH 5 8 2 Be 3 8 p Bx 8 8 g 53 8 5 25 3 3 5 25 3 2 2 3 g 3 8 L H L H LIL HI L HIL Bir H mms ip m Tb i bs mS mH w 0 0 1 0 440 0 0 010 1 0 010 2 0 010 3 00 M 0 0 0 0 1 9 i 57 2 1 34H 30H 30H 30 30H 30H 31H 30H 30 130 32 30H 30H 33 308 40 2 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 31H 33H 30H 31H 31H W100 W101 W102 W103 1 ELEC 3 0 1 oJo 1 1 o ojo o o o o 1 o o o 1 MMMMMMMMMMMMMMMM 0000000011111100 7654321054321098 When the word byte unit designation is word For W100 to W103 block data For MO to M15 block data TTT
47. 1 PLC CPU monitoring using the Q series C24 is performed continuously at cycle time intervals registered by the user 2 Values from 1 to 65535 unit 100ms s min can be registered as the cycle time Use the following expressions as a reference when registering the cycle time a When sending device data or the PLC CPU status Cycle time designation gt sequence scan time processing time data transmission time b When notifying through combined use of the modem function when notifying Cycle time designation K sequence scan time processing time data transmission time data transmission delay time of the modem modem connection and disconnection time when sending data Cycle time designation gt sequence scan time processing time data transmission time data transmission delay time of the modem modem connection and disconnection time circuit disconnection wait time When modem initialization has not been performed the modem initialization time will be added We recommend that the modem initialization be performed in advance The items that appear in the above expressions are explained below eK 60 ms constant internal processing time of the Q series C24 Processing time Processing time for the Multiple block batch read word unit command 0406 For 1 point 11 3ms For 480 points 23 4 ms For 960 points 36 2 ms Data transmission time 1 transmission rate x bit count for one byte
48. 100th J 15 to 801 1st to to t CH2 side 1 to 801 100th J Specifies the following user frame No for the data to be sent Note that the No on the right side of the user frame No below is the No used for transmission without ASCII BIN conversion for only the data of any frame section when transmission data is converted into ASCII binary data and transmitted See Chapters 12 and 13 for details No transmission designation No additional transmission is allowed 1 to 3E74 40014 to 43 7 Transmits the default frame having the designated number 3E8H to 4 4 8 to 44AFu Transmits the user frame having the designated number For flash ROM registration 8000 000 Transmits data in the transmission area of the buffer memory 80014 to 801 001 to CO1FH Transmits the user frame having the designated number For buffer memory registration The following transmission can be performed by adding 4000 to the registered user frame No and specifying this number When ASCII BIN conversion is designated a specified frame can be sent without the conversion See Section 13 3 A specified frame can be transmitted without adding the additional code for the send transparent code designation See Section 12 3 11 36 11 36 11 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING USER FRAMES MELSEC Q 11 5 Transmission program The following are examples of a sequence program when
49. 2204 Flash ROM Flash ROM system parameters write result o Modem function error code Transmission frame No designation A maximum of 100 frames can be designated 0 Normal completion 1 more Abnormal completion error code Modem function sequence status 0 Idle status 7 Modem disconnection 1 Waiting for initialization 8 Callback Request reception waiting 2 Initializing modem 9 Callback Modem disconnect waiting 3 Standby in progress 10 Callback Delay time waiting 4 Checking password 11 Callback Reconnecting 5 Communication in progress 12 Callback Rechecking password 6 Notification in progress 546 2224 For modem 547 2234 function confirmation Number of data registrations for connection 0 No registration 1 or more Number of registration Data registration status for connection for conformation of registration No 0 No registration 1 Registered Bits for registration number are 0 ON 1 OFF Registration number BB8x 3000 Address 2241 60 to Registration number BD5a 3029 Address 225 613 Number of data registrations for initialization 548 to 549 2241 to 2254 550 226i m 0 No registration 1 or more Number of registration Data registration status for initialization 0 No registration 1 Registered Bits for registration number are 0 ON 1 OFF Registration number 9 4 2500 Address 2274 b0 to Registration number 9 1 2529 Address 2284 613 55
50. 3 11 2 1 About reception data sssssssssssssssssssesee eene nnns 11 3 11 2 2 Timing for start completion of data reception 11 10 11 2 3 Receive procedure sss eene entente terrens terrre nter 11 14 11 2 4 User frame setting for reception see ene 11 15 1159 i ic ia einai dined tine 11 21 11 3 1 Sequence program example sse enne entrent nnne 11 21 11 3 2 Application example for data reception using a combination that specifies the first frame 11 22 11 3 3 Application example for data reception using a combination that does not specify th first oett 11 28 11 4 Data TransimiSsion BRE RENE Ga POE FR BEER EYE 11 30 11 4 Send data ete tee c t tede te Tee ege eee 11 30 11 4 2 Transmission procedure 11 32 11 4 3 Settings for transmission user frames sssssssssseeeeeeeneeneenee nennen 11 33 11 5 TRANSMISSION prog aena re Pg edet Rede eue Er d 11 37 12 1 Handling the Transparent Code and Additional Code 12 1 12 2 Registering Transparent Codes and Additional Codes sse 12 2 12 3
51. CD check M The series C24 s tores the receive data The contents of steps 4 and 5 below are different from those of item a 1 When transmitting data check the Q series C24 CD signal If the CD signal is off turn on the Q series C24 RS signal If the CD signal is on wait until it is turned off then turn on the RS signal 2 After the RS signal is turned on transmit the data 3 After data transmission is complete turn off the RS signal 4 Ifthe CD signal is turned on during data transmission terminate data transmission and turn off the RS signal and perform the data receive processing Simultaneous transmission generated 5 After transmission from the external device is complete transmit the data terminated at step 4 from the beginning or from the last data transmitted x2 x1 The data size set to Simultaneous transmission priority non priority by GX Configurator SC is not transmitted x2 Transmit from the beginning or from the data transmitted immediately before transmission was terminated according to the contents set to Retransmission time transmission method by GX Configurator SC When using the DTR DSR transmission control function described in Chapter 7 transmit data from the Q series C24 to the external device as shown below in both cases a and b above When the series C24 DSR signal is turned OFF terminate data transmission When the series C24
52. D11 402 Transmission gt 42 41H oe D12 403 00H 03H 00H 03H D13 404 OAn 00 Sequence program Buffer memory device memory Transmission instruction X50 K1 DO Sets CH1 to the transmission channel K4 D2 1 Sets transmission data count to 4 H1102 D10 Sets the transmission data 010 to 013 H4241 Dii 1 H3 D12 1 HOAOD 013 1 GP BIDOUT 010 1 Executes transmission MO Mi At SET M100 Sets normal completion flag Mt Hs M01 Sets abnormal completion flag One word of data designated from the PLC CPU is converted to four byte data O to 9 A to F and is then transmitted 12 20 12 20 13 COMMUNICATING WITH ASCII CODE ASCII BIN CONVERSION MELSEC Q 13 COMMUNICATING WITH ASCII CODE ASCII BIN CONVERSION This chapter explains the binary to ASCII conversion called ASCII BIN conversion in order to send receive data in ASCII format to from an external device 13 1 ASCII BIN Conversion ASCII BIN conversion is a data conversion function that converts all data communicated between the Q series C24 and an external device to ASCII code data The ASCII BIN conversion of communication data is performed by the Q series C24 according to the user settings 13 PLC CPU Q series C24 External device Q25HCPU QJ71C24 With ASCII BIN conversion m eje ERR g USER 3 O Without ASCII BIN conversion
53. ETX ion 52nd User frame number ion 53rd User frame number ion 54th User frame number ion 55th User frame number ion 56th User frame number ion 57th User frame number Data sent when the condition D 0 is satisfied E T X A Device Device Device Device 98 8 08 9 E data data data daa S25 g 28 E T 7 D3 02 D1 p 598 x gt External device 2 25 2 USING THE PLC CPU MONITORING FUNCTION MELSEC Q 2 3 2 How to register and cancel the PLC CPU monitoring function The following describes the method for registering and canceling the PLC CPU monitoring function from the PLC CPU 1 For details on the method for registering and canceling the PLC CPU monitoring function with the GX Configurator SC see Section 8 4 9 of the User s Manual Basic 2 For details on the method for registering and canceling the PLC CPU monitoring function with an MC protocol command see Section 3 17 of the Reference Manual When registering or canceling from the PLC CPU For details on the CSET command see Section 17 3 Registering PLC CPU monitoring Create control code data from DO LL Pcs un K1 po bzoo MO M1 MEM Processing for normal completion M1 Processing for abnormal completion END END END Sequence program Scan Scan Scan processing processing processing CSET instruc
54. Setting from the GX Configurator SC When the Q series C24 performs a remote password check for the remote password set in the QCPU the remote password check setting as well as the present check results can be monitored with respect to the screen items listed in GX Configurator SC setting monitor screen the table below See Section 3 3 6 for an explanation of each area Setting monitor items for the remote password check MELSEC Q Buffer memory address Modem function system Remote password mismatch notification count designation 8204 200 setting screen Remote password mismatch notification accumulated count designation 8205 2000 Remote password mismatch notification count designation 8204 200 Remote password mismatch notification accumulated count designation 8205 200DH Modem function monitor test Accumulated count of unlock process normal completion 8955 22FBH Accumulated count of unlock process abnormal completion 8956 22FCH Accumulated count of lock process based on circuit disconnection 8959 22FFH 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q 3 3 4 Compatibility with the callback function The following describes the Q Series C24 callback function that can be used when accessing the QCPU from the GX Developer connected to the Q Series C24 1 About the Callback function a Whatis the Callback function The callback function is a function that makes it
55. When the number of times a remote password mismatch occurred exceeds the notification accumulated count setting value during the remote password unlock processing in communication using MC protocol with the Q series C24 CH1 side interface used XE XIF H MOVP K6 MP K5 MOVP ATSO 0 TOP HO HIBA4 D200 XOE PLS 201 No FROM HO H25A 0250 H7FEB 0250 SET M203 Mo Yi2 X10 X12 x14 Po rst X10 X12 X14 H34 H8005 SET SET RST M204 X10 E 1 1 SET 44 RST x13 Mo RS eR Trop H221 D100 Lo Dio 1 SET T RsT M205 X10 Y10 K 17 T10 HO H22FB ist X27 RST M201 K1 M203 Y12 12 K1 Y10 M204 M203 M205 Y10 M204 K1 M206 Y10 M204 K2 M207 M205 M206 M207 Access enabled flag is turned ON Register initialization data for No automatic receive to the buffer memory CH1 side ERR occurrence is detected Read the CH1 side error code If the error code indicates that the accumulated count of remote password mismatch is exceeded the modem disconnect request signal is set Modem disconnection completed When the modem disconnection completed signal turns OFF the No for the modem initialization data for No automatic receive is specified and initialization requested The modem initialization data setting flag is set The mod
56. be received receive area i Codes that can Codes stored to i be received receive area vL C C C uM 00 to FFH Not stored 30H to 9 adito 465 to 9 to 1 User frames for reception 1 The user frame for data reception can set up to a maximum of four combinations of the first frame and the last frame regardless of whether there is a specification 2 For a combination that specifies the first frame with the first frame it is necessary to specify the first frame even in other combinations 3 For a combination that does not specify the first frame without the first frame the first frame cannot be specified even in other combinations 4 A combination with the first frame and a combination without the first frame cannot be combined 11 3 11 3 11 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING USER FRAMES MELSEC Q x2 f data of other than 30H to 39H and 41H to 46H are received as the data code of the arbitrary data area including the transparent code data the Q series C24 ASCII BIN conversion will generate an error 3 Receive data arbitrary data area 1 When the arbitrary data area is stored to the receive area and the storage byte count is an odd number of bytes the receive data count shown below is stored to the receive data count storage area When ASCII BIN conversion is enabled receive data count is the storage byte count when the arbitrary data area is converted to binary code and stored to the rece
57. designated number is 10 Setting 3 Fu Setting 6 74 1 If the callback function is not used Auto 0 Default Value Select this if the callback function is not being used Data communications becomes possible after line connection from the GX Developer 2 Ifthe callback destination GX Developer is fixed 1 module Setting 1 9H or setting 4 1 Select this if the Q Series C24 fixes the telephone No 1 module of the GX Developer side that is being called back The Q Series C24 executes callback to the GX Developer side using connection data set in the following data No 1 for callback shown below At this time the external line dialing line types and telephone number in the connection data become valid Set callback data number 1 in the Modem function system settings Screen Example If line connections are being made with Callback connection during fixed as the connection system 1 Line Connection Callback connection during fixed Selection of the Setting of callback function Sects Se ae connection system designation settings by 2 Temporary line disconnection ____ and line connections GX Configurator SC 3 Line connection to Telephone No 1 Eas eS ad i a ra NI 4 Access to the QCPU 25 Line disconnection Modem Registration in the gt Bevelonee Senes C24 Processing
58. device Head data L 4 Da Does not convert 1234 12 34 co 0 33H 34H 31H 32H Converts 6 Sending receiving data in a message format tailored to the external device detailed explanation in Chapters 9 to 11 1 By preregistering the data arrangement user frames of the messages to be sent and received by the external device to the Q series C24 the following data communications can be performed using registered frames MC protocol Data transmission from the PLC CPU to the external device using the on demand function Non procedure protocol Data communication between the PLC CPU and the external device For example multiple first frames and last frames called user frames with the definition shown in the diagram below can be preregistered in the Q series C24 When sending data to the external device the data that is arranged as shown in the diagram below can be sent by designating the preregistered user frame numbers and arbitrary data When receiving data from the external device by setting the preregistered user frame numbers for reception at the startup of the Q series C24 the arbitrary data section can be read to the PLC CPU when the message with the registered content is received Arbitrary data Password Destination station number 5 EE 3 t o 3 First frame Last frame Before sending
59. functions as default Upon error it will end due to time out Default value 1 Number of connection retries 3 times 2 Connection retry intervals 180s 3 Initialization connection time out 60s Also perform the settings for a remote password check described in Section 3 3 5 3 a and b when a remote password check is executed with respect to the remote password set in the QCPU 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q 3 4 3 Register read delete of the initialization data The section explains the register read delete of the data for initialization such as initialization commands for the modem TA connected to the series C24 side for data communication with the external device pager receiver notification and accessing from GX Developer using the modem functions 1 Registration destination of the data for initialization 1 The data for initialization may be used by registering to the Q series C24 Flash ROM or buffer memory 2 The buffer memory may register the data for connection shown in Section 3 4 4 and will register the data for initialization or data for connection in the designated area 3 Itis recommended that the data for initialization during the debug process is stored in the buffer memory The registration data in the buffer memory will be erased after starting up the Q series C24 loading station again It is necessary to register the data for initialization in the buffer memory afte
60. normally completed Reading of receive data abnormally completed 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q 3 5 2 Sample program for data communication 2 1 Sample program on the connection request station side Initialization for the modem connected to CH1 interface line connection data communication by the non procedure protocol and line disconnection are executed by commands from the user Before executing this program perform the following settings changing the default values on the GX Configurator SC s Modem function system setting registration screen and register them in the Q series C24 Settings other than the items shown below are not required Settings on the GX Configurator SC s Modem function system setting screen For more details see Section 8 4 4 of User s Manual Basic Setting item Setting value Modem connection channel designation No communication interval time designation Data No for initialization designation Data No for connection designation 8002H Registration of the modem s initialization data and line connection data modem initialization line connection data communications by the non procedure protocol and line disconnection are all performed by the sequence program 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q MO Accessible flag is turned ON M30 Modem initialization enabled flag is turned ON M40 Line connectable flag with the remote station is t
61. on demand data can be transmitted from the PLC CPU to the external device by on demand function using user frames This chapter describes the transmission of designated send data by the PLC CPU using a message format other than the message formats A compatible 1C frame formats 1 to 4 QnA compatible 4C frame format 5 described in Section 3 11 2 10 1 User Frame Data Communications Function The user frame data communications transmits and receives the message first and last parts in the format selected by the user during data communications between PLC CPU and external device via the Q series C24 By using the function described in this chapter on demand data listed as shown below can be transmitted from the Q series C24 to an external device Transmitting in QnA compatible 3C frame format 1 On demand data A Lists other than the send data part of the message format described in Section 3 11 2 are selected by the user as shown at the left The send data part is the same as the list given in Section 3 11 2 Frame identifi cation No Station No Network No Send data Local station No Sum check code character area X Range that is transmitted by user frame x1 User frame data communications can be carried out by registering registered by the data code the message format to be transmitted by the external device and the message format to be received by the exter
62. portion during transmission x byte count for transmission data Bit count for one byte portion during transmission 1 data bit count parity bit stop bit count parity bit 1 no parity bit 0 Data transmission delay time by the modem Depends on the modem specifications line specifications and line status Modem connection and disconnection time Depends on the modem specifications line specifications and line status Modem initialization time Depends on the modem specifications 2 USING THE PLC CPU MONITORING FUNCTION MELSEC Q 3 To monitor the PLC CPU the Q series C24 reads monitoring information device information PLC CPU status information from the PLC CPU at time intervals set by the user 1 Since the Q series C24 reads the monitoring information device data PLC CPU status at the time of the next PLC CPU END process after the cycle time elapses make the cycle time as long as possible 2 The following should be considered if the cycle time is short The scan time of the PLC CPU is longer and the number of scan cycles has increased The increase in the processing time of the Q Series C24 PLC CPU monitoring function has increased causing an increase in the processing time of other data communication functions The load on the external device has increased 2 2 4 Timings of transmission and notification of monitoring results to the external device Constant cycle transmission Cycle tim
63. to 1AFFu 2600 to 1 to 1A00H 400 to 1AFFu 2600 to 1 to 1A00H 1 For information about errors caused by incorrect designated by the user see the description in Errors on the next page 2 The Set by column indicates the following User Data set by the user before executing the dedicated instruction System The PLC CPU stores execution results of the dedicated instruction 17 12 17 12 17 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q Functions 1 This instruction changes the current values of the settings below to transmit receive data using the following communication protocols Data count unit word byte of the data to be transmitted received Transmission area in the buffer memory used by the on demand function of the MC protocol Transmission and reception areas in the buffer memory used with the non procedure protocol Transmission and reception areas in the buffer memory used with the bidirectional protocol 2 To change the above setting values from the PLC CPU execute the CSET instruction The CSET instruction must be executed before starting any data communication execute it before the first scan Once data communication begins the CSET instructions cannot be executed the setting values cannot be changed More than one CSET instruction cannot be executed simultaneously to perform the initial settings 3 Whether the CSE
64. 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 2 3 4 314 324 33H 4 40 2 30H 30H 30H 314 30H 30H 30H 30H 44H 33H 30H 31H 31H 3 0 1 gt it at lt 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 O O MMMMMMMMMMMMMMM 222211113322222 321098761098765 When the word byte unit designation is word l 5 Be sli 5 8 52 E E 8 Bs E 8 8 o ov 2a o o Eu 3 28 3 3 E i 2 8 L H L H He us M 0 0 01 0 0 0 0 Aj1 13 3 4 1 2 40 2 30 30 30H 30H 31H 304 30 30H 41 31 31 33H 33 34 31 32H 2 USING THE PLC CPU MONITORING FUNCTION MELSEC Q 2 When user frame No B061H is designated PLC CPU status information for one block is sent as the following data when communicating with when communicating with Remark ASCII code binary code 01 Number of a points 0001 0001 Monitoring head device head device 000000 000000H During normal operation 0000 0000 All fixed value Module warning occurring 0001 0001H Device data Module error module E DENM error 0002 E DENM g When ASCII BIN conversion is not performed The total number of bytes for the device data section is the number of device points
65. 1 01H 00H 4 044 00H 00 1 00H 02H OOH 03H OOH 01H 00H 4 044 00H 00h OOH OOH 01 OOH 02 OOK 03H W100 w101 w102 W103 W100 W101 W102 W103 When ASCII BIN conversion is performed The total number of bytes for the device data section is the number of device points X 4 When the word byte unit designation is byte LFTTTTT Device code Monitoring head device Number of registered points Device data 4 1 w 0 1 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 3 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 57 2 30H 30 30 31 30 30 30H 30 30H 34 30H 30H 30H 30 31 30H 30H 30H 32 30H 33H 30 30H 0 90H STH 808 30H 30H 30H 30H X Y Y W100 W101 W102 W103 When the word byte unit designations word r1 LFTTTTT Device code Monitoring head device Number of registered points Device data 4 0 0 1 00 0 04 0 0 0 0 0 17 000210 0 0 3 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 57H 2 30 30H 31H 30H 30H 30H 304 30H 34H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 31H 1309 30H 30H 32H 30H 30H 30H 33H Y Y Y Y W100 W101 W102 W103 2 USING THE PLC CPU MONITORING FUNCTION MELSEC Q When data for bit device M16 to M175 10 poin
66. 2 3 i i i TU i A B i ro Received byte count excluding additional code 12 2 6 XN Lt RIF For byte unit External device side S E 1234 ori Received byte count excluding additional code 12 i 1 1234 PLC CPU side Reception data read request X83 Received data count is stored PLC CPU The following diagram is for word unit Completion device MO 4 Abnormal Status display device y Completion at completion 1 600 0 0 completion dbi 1 0 0 0 5 318 304 1 30H 0 3 02 33H 32 33H 32 603 NULL STX NULL STX 004 024 00 024 B A B A 604 42 41 42 41 1234 1234 BOSHI 12 124 34n 606 LF CR LF CR ODx 0D Buffer memory Sequence program device memory Reception data read request X83 i ww X Do Sets CH1 to the reception channel Sets the allowable number 03 of receive data to 6 G INPUT ug DI D10 Executes reception SET M100 Sets the normal completion flag tr M101 Sets the abnormal completion flag When the receive transparent code designation is set to Enable and the ASCII BIN conversion is set to Disable the codes for receivable data and those for receive data that is stored in the buffer memory s reception area as follows Codes stored in the Rec
67. 22F 1H Auto callback connection permit accumulated count 8946 22F2n Auto callback connection denial accumulated count 8947 22F34 Accumulated count of callback receive procedure cancel 8948 22 4 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q b Callback function designation and callback operation outline Here the setting values for Callback function designation items in the Modem function system setting screen and an outline of the corresponding Q Series C24 callback operation are explained Values in parentheses are values when the set values are stored in buffer memory Address 20014 If the connection system is set on Auto Callback during fixed Callback during designated number and line connection is executed Setting 1 to Setting 3 are explained in 5 BEES E Function If you desire to set the connection system on If you set the connection system on auto auto and carry out line connection and do not carry out line connection Ifthe callback functionis notused Auto 2 Ifthe callback destination GX Developer is fixed 1 module f Setting 1 9 Setting 4 1 Callback connection during fixed STE Pn 9 3 Ifitis being made possible to change the callback destination GX Developer Setting 2 Bu Setting 5 34 Callback connection during designated number 4 Ifthe maximum number of callback destination GX Developers is limited to 10 modules Callback connection during max
68. 253H 262H to 263 The communication protocol status and transmission specifications after mode switching is complete are stored The values stored to areas other than the above are not changed The contents before switching are preserved b User free area addresses 400H to 1AFFH 2600H to 3FFFH The stored values are not changed The contents before mode switching are preserved 15 2 Mode Switching Precautions 1 Set up between the external device and the PLC CPU Make the following setting for the external device and the PLC CPU so that mode switching is not performed during data communications a Which side is to switch the mode the PLC CPU or external device b Timing for each mode switching pattern For mode switching patterns see Chapter 15 Section 1 2 c Interlocking of all connected devices in the case of mode switching 1 Method and message structure when all the connected stations are informed of the mode switching execution 2 Method and message structure when all the connected stations are informed of the mode switching completion 3 Device No and meaning of the value when a PLC CPU word device is used 15 3 15 3 15 SWITCHING THE MODE AFTER STARTING MELSEC Q 2 Mode switching from external device a Once the mode has been changed to a mode other than MC protocol Formats 1 to 5 it cannot be changed from the external device In this case change the mode on the PLC CPU b Only the
69. 4 5 of the User s Manual Basic Setting item Setting value Switch 1 CH1 Transmission setting Set according to the Witc CH1 Communication rate setting external device Switch 2 CH1 Communication protocol setting 0006 Non procedure protocol CH 2 Transmission setting Switch 3 an 0000 CH2 Communication rate setting Not used Switch 4 CH2 Communication protocol setting 0000 Station number of the Q Switch 5 Station No setting 00001 END ER i 2 Settings via GX Configurator SC Register the following items on the Transmission control and others system setting Non procedure system setting and Transmission user frame No designation system setting screens See Sections 8 4 5 8 4 7 and 8 4 10 of the User s Manual Basic For items other than those noted below the default values are used Registration screen Setting item Setting value Received data count ne NUT CC E Receive Receive complete code designation code designation ooo Receive user frame designation Enable User frame use enable disable designation Receive user frame designation 8 First frame No designation 1st Recei fi designati user rame esigna ion First frame No designation 2nd Receive user frame designation Non procedure system setting screen Last frame No designation 1st Receive user frame designation Last frame No designation 2nd Transmission user
70. 4 of Reference Manual The series C24 I O signals are X YOO to X Y1F and are sent from the CH1 side interface 1 Switch settings via GX Developer To set the following setting values on the intelligent functional module switch setting screen see Section 4 5 of the User s Manual Basic Setting item Setting value Remarks CH1 Transmission setting Set according to the CH1 Communication rate setting external device Switch 2 CH1 Communication protocol setting 0001 MC protocol form 1 Sena CH2 Transmission setting 0000H witc CH2 Communication rate setting Not used Switch 4 CH2 Communication protocol setting 00i Switch 5 Station No setting 0000H Q series C24 station No 2 Registration via GX Configurator SC 1 Registering the user frame to be transmitted To register the user frame data to be transmitted on the User frame registration screen see Chapter 9 of this manual For more details on the User frame registration screen see Section 8 4 1 of User s Manual Basic 2 Registering the user frame No to be transmitted and the unit of the data length Using the screens listed below register the user frame No and the unit of the length of data to be transmitted which have been registered on the User frame registration screen For more details on the Transmission control and others system setting screen see Section 8 4 5 of User s Manual Basic For more details on the MC protocol system setting
71. 80 E 08190 Sant Cugat del Vall s Phone 34 9 3 565 3131 Fax 34 9 3 589 2948 e mail industrial sp mee com MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC UK EUROPE B V UK Branch Travellers Lane GB Hatfield Herts AL10 8 XB Phone 44 0 1707 27 61 00 Fax 44 0 1707 27 86 95 e mail automation meuk mee com MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC JAPAN CORPORATION Office Tower Z 14 F 8 12 1 chome Harumi Chuo Ku Tokyo 104 6212 Phone 81 3 6221 6060 Fax 81 3 6221 6075 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC USA AUTOMATION 500 Corporate Woods Parkway Vernon Hills IL 60061 Phone 1 847 478 21 00 Fax 1 847 478 2283 MIDDLE EAST REPRESENTATIVE TEXEL Electronics Ltd Box 6272 IL 42160 Netanya Phone 972 0 9 863 08 91 Fax 4972 0 9 885 24 30 e mail texel meGnetvision net il ISRAEL GEVA AUSTRIA UTU POWEL LITHUANIA Avtomatika Sever Ltd RUSSIA Wiener Stra e 89 Savanoriu pr 187 Lva Tolstogo St 7 Off 311 AT 2500 Baden LT 2053 Vilnius RU 197376 St Petersburg Phone 43 0 2252 85 55 20 Phone 370 0 52323 101 Phone 7 812 11 83 238 43 0 2252 488 60 Fax 370 0 52322 980 Fax 7 812 11 83 239 mail office geva at email powel utu lt e mail as avtsev spb ru TEHNIKON BELARUS INTEHSIS SRL MOLDOVA CONSYS RUSSIA Oktjabrskaya 16 5 Ap 704 Cuza Voda 36 1 81 Promyshlennaya St 42 BY 220030 Minsk MD 2061 Chisinau RU 198099 St Petersburg Phone 375 0 17 2275 704 Phone
72. ASCII code data and sent Examples are shown in f 1 When the word byte unit designation is word unit the device information a and CPU information are each sent in one word segments in a H L sequence 2 When the word byte unit designation is byte the device information and CPU information are each sent in one word segments in a L H sequence When the interface that is to use the modem function is set in the non procedure protocol connection processing and disconnection processing to the modem are performed when the PLC CPU monitoring results are transmitted Example Data transmission by non procedure protocol with modem function condition agreement transmission Monitoring information Cycle time External device Sequence program conditions matched not matched END END END Matched Not matched Matched b When sending monitoring results as data during constant cycle transmission the device information of two or more user frame No and PLC CPU status information that have been currently designated for the constant cycle transmission by the Q series C24 2 USING THE PLC CPU MONITORING FUNCTION MELSEC Q c When sending the monitoring results as data during condition agreement transmission the device information of two or more user frame No and PLC CPU status information that have been currently designated by the Q series C24 for the condition agreement transmission of the block where the monitor
73. CPU checksum 3 User frame registration status storage area Addresses 205H to 210 The registration status of user frames to the Flash ROM is stored as the values shown below The contents of each area that indicates the registration status are shown below The contents of the area are indicated in one user frame No 1 bit form Example User frame No 1015 3F94 User frame No 1000 8 registration status registration status Buffer memory L i Address b15 to b8b7 to b0 0 Not registered 2051 010101010101111 01010101111 1711 10 0 0 Nol 1 Rgi istere 2064 0100 0100 111 0010 0 010 1 1 to 03034 2114 01070707070 010 010 0 0 0 to 00004 DIL NN User frame No 1199 4 registration status Subsequent bits are spares 9 CONTENTS AND REGISTRATION OF THE USER FRAMES FOR DATA COMMUNICATION MELSEC Q 9 4 1 Registering user frames The following shows an example of a sequence program when registering user frames in the Q series C24 flash ROM For details on the PUTE instruction see Section 17 7 When the series C24 signals are X Y80 to X Y9F X50 gt PLS M50 Registration request M50 RE wov Sets the registration request vov H3E8 D2 Sets the frame number to be registered s K10 D3 Sets the number of registration data bytes pA fv H3946 D4 Sets the registration data for the frame to be registered in D4 to
74. Carrier Detect RD Receive Data Data C 1 wi Data C 1 Data C 2 Since the Q series C24 Retransmission does not have priority hen the CD signal is turned See 2 for the transmission N it terminates transmission contents Data C 2 5 The Q series C24 stores the receive data The contents of steps 4 and 5 below are different from those of item a 1 When transmitting data check the RS signal If the RS signal is OFF turn ON the CD signal If the RS signal is ON wait until it is turned OFF then turn ON the CD signal After the CD signal is turned ON transmit the data After data transmission is complete turn OFF the CD signal The external device will continue to transmit data to the Q series C24 even if the RS signal is turned ON during data transmission Simultaneous transmission generated After transmission from the external device is complete data is transmitted from the Q series C24 to the external device See 2 When using the DTR DSR transmission control function described in Chapter 7 transmit data from the external device to the Q series C24 as shown below in both cases a and b above When the series C24 signal is turned OFF terminate data transmission When the Q series C24 DTR signal is turned ON after data transmission was terminated restart data transmission transmit from the terminat
75. Configurator SC See Section 3 4 2 Perform the following settings in each setting screen Use the default settings in screens and setting items other than those shown below 1 Modem function system settings Modem function system setting screen Setting value setting items Modem connection channel designation Data for initialization designation 07D5 Auto modem initialization designation Auto initialize 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION Status confirmation XIE Qo MO X10 X12 N92 H M 51 Data transmission processing non procedure protocol X22 PLS M52 M52 M51 MoV NO2 TO N01 D51 vov HOAOD D56 MOV D150 vov KO 0151 MOV K6 D152 G OUTPUT Uo D150 D51 M150 SET M92 M150 M151 INC C50 M151 f I C51 RST M92 Data reception processing non procedure protocol MOVP 0160 X4 FMOVP D161 K2 wovP K10 0163 G INPUT UO D160 D61 M160 M160 M161 t INC C60 M161 pL M T Ine 061 MELSEC Q Access possible Data transmission possible Set the transmission data Set the transmission channel on CH1 Set the transmission data count Execute transmission request Transmission normally completed Transmission abnormally completed Set the data reception channel on CH1 Execute reading of receive data Reading of receive data
76. D1 to D2 H56AB D2 DO K3 Sets arbitrary transmission data in the transmission area K1 D11 Sets CH1 to the transmission channel H1 D14 Sets the output head pointer H5 D15 Sets the output head count D11 MO Executes transmission Mt F3 SET M100 Sets normal completion flag M1 RRS ET M101 Sets abnormal completion flag 11 38 11 38 11 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING USER FRAMES MELSEC Q 2 Example of a sequence program when setting is not done using the GX Configurator SC The following is the method of data transmission without performing the output frame No designation using the GX Configurator SC For further details on the PRR instruction see Chapter 17 of this manual Transmission instruction X50 M50 M50 X9E K4 H1234 D1 Sets arbitrary transmission data H56AB 02 DO K3 Sets the number of transmitted data H3F2 D5 Sets the transmission user frames in D5 to D9 H3F3 D6 H8001 D7 H8000 D8 H41B 09 HO D10 D5 K6 Sets output frame No in the buffer memory M50 MOV Ki D11 Sets CH1 to the transmission channel 012 Clears the device in which transmission results are stored MOV HO 013 Sets to CR LF output MOV D14 Sets the output head pointer MOV H5 D15 Sets the output counter PRR U8 D11 MO Executes user frame transmission MO Mt SET M100 Sets normal completion flag Mt ser M101 Sets abnormal completion flag Normal end Abnormal end DO D1 D2 D5
77. D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 11 39 Send data count 00044 Send data count 00044 t Send data mee Me Send data 232 E Output frame No 2 Output frame No 03F2u 03F 3x 03F3u 80014 80014 80001 80004 041 041 0000 0000 Interface No 00014 Interface No 00014 Transmission result 00004 Transmission result other than 0000 CR LF output 00004 CR LF output 00004 Output head pointer 00014 Output head pointer 00014 Output counter 00054 Output counter 00054 11 39 12 TRANSPARENT CODES AND ADDITIONAL CODES MELSEC Q 12 TRANSPARENT CODES AND ADDITIONAL CODES Transparent codes and additional codes are used during data communication with an external device to send receive one byte data for transmission control on the external device side as user data Transparent codes and additional codes are handled in data communication using the non procedure or bidirectional protocol Transparent code One byte data for transmission control 12 Additional code During transmission one byte data added preceding the transparent code and additional code data During reception one byte data deleted the immediately succeeding one byte data is processed for reception 12 1 Handling the Transparent Code and Additional Code Data External device side The following explains how the Q series C24 handles transparent codes and additional
78. DC4 reception control The Q series C24 encloses the send data from the local station in the DC2 and DC4 codes and transmits it to the external device and processes the data received from an external device enclosed in the DC2 and DC4 codes as valid data DC2 Control data that informs the external device that the data following it is the start of the valid data DC4 Control data that informs the external device that the data immediately preceding it is the end of the valid data Example External device DC2 Data 004 2 Data PLC CPU pc4 7 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING DC CODE TRANSMISSION CONTROL MELSEC Q a Q series C24 DC2 DCA transmission control contents When transmitting data to an external device the Q series C24 adds the DC2 code to the head of the send data and the DC4 code to the end of the send data External device PLC CPU x i 8 D Ni i Daai 008a i Qi i E 4 O 1 gt gt Transmit order Transmit order Non procedure protocol Bidirectional protocol The DC2 and DC4 code are also added when MC protocol is used b Q series C24 DC2 DCA reception control contents 1 When the Q series C24 receives DC2 from the external device it processes the receive data up to DC4 as valid data The sequence program cannot read the received DC2 code 2 When the series C24 receives DC4 it ignores the receive data up to immediately before D
79. Details Wiite to File save module Read from Select input module Make text file Execute test Close 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q b Forthe buffer memory of the Q series C24 1 The connection data write registration and read operations are performed by designating an applicable area that corresponds to registration numbers 8001 to 801 for the user frame registration area addresses 1 00 to 1FF6H When deleting the connection data write to the number of registration data bytes designation area 2 The table below shows an overview of the buffer memory used in the write read and delete operations of the connection data as well as the designated values for each area are For more details see Chapter 9 Use the table by replacing the user frame with the connection data Specification required not required X Designated stored value Registration data 3 0 When deleting x 1 00 6912 byte number R Registration 80 Number of registration data bytes Read designation BUNA 8001 Notifica P processing uto otification message for connection data to be 6913 to 6952 Connection data is not required 1B28u registered and connection data Registration data 1 29 6953 byte number Registration 1B2A to 1 51 6954 to 6993 0 When deleting x designation Read 8002 i processing Notification messa
80. Enable 1st 8 Receive user frame designation 2nd 9 No designation First frame No designation 3rd 1 or higher There is 4th a designation 1st 410 In this setting only Receive user frame designation 2nd three combinations Last frame No designation 3rd become valid 4th The received data 1st Foramt 0 count becomes valid 2nd Fotamtel Exclusive format 1 User frame receive format received data count designation i 9 Foramt 1 becomes valid 4th Foramt 0 1st Exclusive format 1 received data 2nd 7 For Format 1 count designation 3rd 2 4th 11 19 11 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING USER FRAMES MELSEC Q b When the first frame is not specified In the example the following three combinations are registered for the receive user frame Setting conditions User frame receive Exclusive format 1 User frame Remarks format designation received data count 1st combina Last frame only tion 2nd The received combina Last frame only Format 0 data count tion becomes valid 3rd combina Last frame only tion See Section 8 4 7 of User s Manual Basic for registration using the GX Configurator SC Setting value Setting item Setting value Remarks Received data count designation 1 For Format 0 Receive complete code designation
81. FRAMES 11 18 MELSEC Q c User frame receive format designation address 2020 to 2023H 2120H to 2123 In data reception using a user frame specify the reception method for each combination of receive user frames This setting is valid in a setting shown in 2 b when it is set using a combination that specifies a user frame b15 to bO Default Buffer memory address 20204 21204 Setting for the first combination Setting for the second combination to Setting for the third combination 2023 2123 Setting for the fourth combination Specify the reception method Format 0 1 Format 1 For combinations other than those with the first frame only data reception is performed using Format 0 even if Format 1 is specified through the above reception method setting d Exclusive format 1 received data count designation address 2024 to 2027 2124 to 2127 For a combination specifying Format 1 the user frame receive format designation specify the arbitrary data word byte count size for performing a reception data read request to the PLC CPU when the applicable first frame is received Specify this for each combination specifying Format 1 Specify a size within the size of the storage area for the reception data in the buffer memory The unit for the setting value depends on the setting value given in the word byte units designation b15 to bO Default 0 Buffer memory a
82. For information about errors caused by incorrect data designated by the user see the description in Errors on the next page 2 The Set by column indicates the following User Data set by the user before executing the dedicated instruction System The PLC CPU stores execution results of the dedicated instruction 17 7 17 7 17 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Functions 17 8 MELSEC Q To register the PLC CPU monitoring this instruction registers data necessary for the Q series C24 to execute the PLC CPU monitoring function When the data registration to execute the PLC CPU monitoring function is completed normally the Q series C24 begins monitoring the PLC CPU and transmitting monitoring results to an external device To cancel the PLC CPU monitoring this instruction ends the Q series C24 s monitoring operation of the PLC CPU When canceling of the PLC CPU monitoring is completed normally the Q series C24 terminates the operation of the PLC CPU monitoring function A maximum of 10 blocks can be designated for a word device or bit device to monitor the device memory To register the device memory to monitor designate the word device blocks for the registered word blocks then designate the bit device blocks for the registered bit blocks Before sending the PLC CPU monitoring results to the external device the user frame and user frame number should be registered with GX Configurator SC in advance To register the PL
83. Forthe QJ71C24 N R2 the modem function can only be used by one of the two existing RS 232 interfaces With the interface of the Q series C24 which does not use the modem function direct data communication with an external device can be performed using an MC protocol non procedure protocol or bidirectional protocol independent operation Communication using the modem function Communication without using the modem function 2 Initialization line connection and disconnection of the modem or TA 1 The following set values for line connection can be used by storing to the Q series C24 Flash ROM in multiple sets Modem TA initialization data AT command User setup 30 sets 78 bytes set default value 13 sets Connection data User setup 30 sets 80 bytes set Telephone number of the connection destination and display message to the pager receiver By registering the above data to the Q series C24 ahead of time the modem TA terminal adapter initialization line connection dialing and line disconnection can be performed with ease 3 When the no communication interval time 1 min to 120 min is set the Q series C24 disconnects the line when a no communication condition has occurred for the set period of time following the line connection X 3 Communication between a remote external device and PLC CPU 1 Data communication can be performed via full duplex communication 2 From the external device to the P
84. No of the user frame to be transmitted as 171 14Bu 331 the last frame Last frame No Do not transmit designation Others Transmit 1 ACH 172 14C 332 When designating the 1st frame the 2nd frame can also be designated x1 Designates the registration No shown below of the user frame to be transmitted from among the user frames registered in the Q series C24 1 to 7 110 999 Default registration frame 3E8uto 4 1000 1199 User frame registered in flash ROM 8001 to 801Fu 32767 to 32737 User frame registered in buffer memory 10 2 10 2 10 ON DEMAND DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING USER FRAMES MELSEC Q 2 On demand data list The following shows the user frame designation on demand data list On demand data A c User frame User frame Send data User frame User frame Transmitted when last frame 2nd designated Transmitted when last frame 1st designated On demand instruction transmitted when send data designated in buffer memory Transmitted when first frame 2nd designated First frame 1st 1 Only the on demand data list combinations shown below can be used Designation data Data name First frame First frame Last frame Last frame E Send data Combination 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1 5e d eq 2 The send data for on demand data transmission by user frame is outlined below See Chapter 9 for a detail
85. ON request Connection in A ON progress RS 232 CD terminal ON Set Display a result code using the AT commana in the local station side modem Initialization Dial Result code receive 1 Data communication is possible 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q This section explains the general procedure for non procedure protocol bidirectional protocol executed in full duplex communication data communication using the modem function between the PLC CPU with Q series C24 installed Station A QJ71624 R2 Ice lem Q25HCPU MODE O RUN 3 ERR D USER BAT D 3 Public line General Procedure Station B QUT1C24 RZ Q25HCPU MODE O Joe RUN E ERR 1 Perform initial setting for Q series C24 at both station A and station B 2 Perform modem TA initialization in station B 3 Perform modem TA initialization and line connection in station A 4 Communicate data using the non procedure protocol bidirectional protocol 5 In order to end the communication disconnect line from station A that initiated the line connection Station A connection request side Connection Communication Disconnection Connection YA 7 request i Initialization x10 T a completion yo We Conn
86. ON Transmission in progress Y9 ___ fcH Mode switching reques _ON Requesting swish _ CH2 Reception data read request ON Requesting read o E Use prohibited bxc f Fessem e Yio x Modem initialization request standby ON Requesting initialization Use prohibited Use prohibited ificati Flash ROM read completion ON Completed Flash ROM read request ON Requesting Flash ROM write completion ON Completed Flash ROM write request ON Requesting Flash ROM system setting write completion ON Completed Flash ROM system setting write request ON Requesting Use prohibited X1B CH2 Global signal ON Output directed Y1B X1C System setting default completion ON Completed Y1C System setting default request ON Requesting For system series C24 ready ON Accessible Watchdog timer error WDT error Use prohibited ON Module error occurred OFF Module being normally operated The signals shown with are the I O signals for the modem function x1 QJ71C24N RA4 cannot be used Related to modem function signal X10 to X16 For system Y10 to Y16 Not usable IMPORTANT 1 Ofthe input output signals to the PLC CPU the signals marked with Use prohibited must not be output ON If any of the Use prohibited signals is output the PLC system may malfunction 2 When the modem function is not used or the QJ71C24N R4 is used X10 to X16 are used for the system and
87. PLC CPU I O signals series C24 ready signal 1 Turned ON when the Q series C24 can be accessed from the PLC CPU Watchdog timer error signal X1F Turned ON when series C24 does not operate normally e CH1 ERR signal XE 008 Turned ON when the CH1 ERR occurred e CH2 ERR signal rr Turned ON when the CH2 ERR occurred 2 Buffer memory Address Decimal hexadecimal Name Setting value Stored value 00014 MC protocol Format 1 Switching mode No designation to See a 00074 Bidirectional protocol GX Developer connection 144 90H 304 130H For specifying mode switchin 9 Transmission specification setting 00001 Matched to the settings at the GX Developer 149 91H 305 01916 a SE 8000 to 8FFFu Matched to the settings of this area For confirming mode Switch setting error mode switchin 9 Normal 515 203 switchin E ad d 9 Other than 0 Switch setting error mode switching error M 9 See the User s Manual Basic Section 10 1 5 a Switching mode No designation area addresses 90H 130 Write the desired mode No 00014 to 0007H O0FFH b15 to bO Buffer memory address 90 130 Default 00004 00014 MC protocol Format 1 0002 MC protocol Format 2 0003 MC protocol Format 00044 MC protocol Format 4 0005 MC protocol Format 5 0006 Non procedure protocol 0007 Bidirectional protocol
88. Se Q series C24 Receive data read request signal X3 XA d Data communications using bidirectional protocol Ignores deletes the receive data from the start of reception of the current message to time out Stores the error code to the data receive result storage area buffer memory addresses 258 268 for the target interface When the receive data complete transmits a NAK message to the external device and waits to receive the next data 6 CHANGING THE DATA COMMUNICATIONS MONITORING TIMES MELSEC Q 2 Changing the no reception monitoring time timer O a Changing the no reception monitoring time timer 0 The no reception monitoring time timer 0 is designated by the number of transmitted characters byte count corresponding to the data communication rate set in the interface and then it is registered on the GX Configurator SC s Transmission control and others system setting screen Adjust or set the value based on the specifications of the external device For details on the registration method of the no reception monitoring time see Section 8 4 5 of the User s Manual Basic b No reception monitoring time format specification in non procedure protocol Format O Format 1 The no reception monitoring time format in non procedure protocol is specified to use the no reception monitoring time timer 0 by the non procedure protocol and is registered on the Transmission control and others system setting sc
89. Setting seen 6 7 6 3 Transmission Monitoring Time timer 2 Setting ssseeeennenen emen 6 10 6 4 Message Wait Time Setting e ree UT ge eee dre er e ee t RP ERN ERR 6 13 7 1 Control Contents of DTR DSR ER DR Signal Control eene 7 2 7 2 Control Contents of DC Code Controls nnne 7 4 7 3 Precautions when Using the Transmission Control Functions eseeene 7 7 8 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING HALF DUPLEX COMMUNICATIONS 8 1to8 8 9 1 Half duplex Communications 2 31e hide 8 1 8 2 Data Transmission and Reception Timing enne 8 2 8 3 Changing the Communication System sse nennen nennen enne 8 6 8 4 Connector Connections for Half duplex Communications sss 8 7 8 5 Half duplex Communications Precautions ssssssssssssssssseseeeeer nennen 8 8 7 7 9 CONTENTS AND REGISTRATION OF THE USER FRAMES FOR DATA COMMUNICATION 9 1to 9 18 9 1 User Frame Types and Contents During Communication sseeneeenen enn 9 1 9 1 1 User frames to be registered and used by the 9 1 9 1 2 Default registration frame read only sse 9 7 9 2 Transmission Reception Processing Using User Frame Register Data
90. Source station No Message of 5 6 The external device that accepted the line usage right by transmitting a response message performs processing beginning from 2 14 7 14 7 14 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING EXTERNAL DEVICE AND PLC CPU M N CONFIGURATION MELSEC Q 7 When line usage time of the external device that currently has the line usage right exceeds the maximum data communications time a The external device of the next station No transmits all external devices general report data and obtains the line usage right and performs step 2 Example 1 2 so 2 a 28 External device t59 g9 95 8 2 D5 G that obtains the 2282 8 8 g s So line usage right 3 1 ol ao 22 A 3B 31 464 31 43 5 5 0 30 414 1 Station No for all external devices general report 2 See 1 of 5 above b The other external devices check if all external devices general report data was received If the data was received the external device performs step 3 If the data was not received the next external device transmits all external devices general report data and obtains the line usage right and performs step 2 The other external devices perform b of this item 14 8 14 8 14 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING EXTERNAL DEVICE AND PLC CPU M N CONFIGURATION MELSEC Q 14 3 2 Data communications between
91. USING USER FRAMES Control procedure Added by First frame 1st gt First frame 2nd lt External device User frame Data name TF 19 10 10 10 10 Ir IF 0 o X ET ES epa sd o24 rou 00H Jr LESSE ob PLC CPU 12 Example 02 46 39H 30H 30H 30H 30 46 46 30H30HB 1H 32H 33H34H 35H 36H 37H38H MELSEC Q Q series C24 Last frame 1st gt User Send data frame pourri User frame registration code Fog TENE 1 PATUIT SEE Send data corresponding to fo 1 l l XIS registration code d In Fd i E53 lul ls To sl 364374384034444324 4 Send data code ONDEMAND command ONDEMAND command complete bit ONDEMAND command abnormal complete bit Buffer memory Word units 96H First address 0 Data lenghth 1 1st first frame No AQH 2nd first frame No 1stlast frame No AB 2nd last frame No Result of execution 256 Send data C OU 1 1 side 10 5 1 scan When a transmission error is generated other than 0 lt n is stored Sequentially transmits the data in 4 bit units begining from the most significant bit 10 5 10 ON DEMAND DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING USER FRAMES MELSEC Q 10 4 2 Data communications using the binary code The following shows the control procedure when
92. Write the data for connection Data No 8002u Registration to buffer memory Data registration complete flag for connection is set Notification issued request signal is set Initial status Modem initialization processing subroutine Initialization request signal is set Initialization request execution flag is set When the initialization complete signal ON the initialization complete flag is set and the request signal is reset When the initialization connection abnormal complete signal ON the error code is read and the request signal is reset Notification processing subroutine Notification issued request signal is reset Issue request Notification execution flag is set When the notification normal complete signal ON the notification complete flag is set and the request signal is set Initial status When the notification abnormal complete signal ON the error code is read and the request signal is set Initial status 3 105 4 RECEIVING DATA WITH AN INTERRUPT PROGRAM MELSEC Q 4 RECEIVING DATA WITH AN INTERRUPT PROGRAM In data communication between the Q series C24 and the external device an interrupt program can be used to receive data for the following data communication functions Data reception during communication using the non procedure protocol Data reception during communication using the bidirectional protocol This chapter explains a case in which data reception using
93. Y10 to Y16 cannot be used 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q 2 Function and description of each signal I O signal Function description x10 Modem initialization Indicates normal completion of the series C24 s initialization of the modem TA Section 3 4 5 i 4 completion connected to itself according to the initialization data designated X11 Indicates that the Q series C24 is dialing connection processing the partner side Dial in progress _ according to the data for connection designated 1 Indicates normal completion of the line connection processing from or to the partner side A gt Ts TO Section 3 4 6 2 When this signal is on data communication with the destination is possible notification is not possible 1 Indicates abnormal completion of the modem TA initialization or line connection processing dialing to the destination X13 connection abnormal ur 2 Check the cause of the abnormal completion in the modem error code storage area Section 3 4 5 ection 3 4 address 2214 and remove the cause Initialization Modem Indicates that the line for data communication with the destination has been 2 disconnection 3 Section 3 4 8 X15 Notification normal Indicates the normal completion when performing the notification processing to the completion destination Section 3 4 7 1 Indicates abnormal completion when the notification processing is performe
94. a read request is performed to the PLC CPU The received data count initially set in the Q series C24 is a data count that exceeds the size of the arbitrary data to be received The Q series C24 performs the following processing with respect to the reception data that is the same as the receive complete code initially set in the Q series C24 When the reception data is included in the arbitrary data Reception is processed via the receive complete code When the reception data is included in the last frame Reception is not processed via the receive complete code Example By registering ETX CR LF as the last frame a read request is performed to the PLC CPU when the end of the reception data receives a message of ETX CR LF Last frame ETX CR LF v Reception start timing Receive complete timing read timing Stored in the reception area 11 7 11 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING USER FRAMES MELSEC Q b Reception of combination 2 B 1 In this method a user frame is used as the last frame in place of the non procedure protocol data receive complete code and fixed format data is transmitted from the external device 2 Any reception data prior to the last frame are all treated as arbitrary data 3 When data of the same arrangement as the last frame is received the Q series C24 performs a read request to the PLC CPU 4 Upon the reception of data from this combination that contains no arbitrary dat
95. a denial of the callback occurs during access from the GX Developer after the Q series C24 has been started up The accumulated number of times up to the present a denial of the callback occurred accumulated count value in the Q series C24 after starting up can be checked in the area where the accumulated count of denial of the callback is stored address 8945 22F 1n c Data No for Callback designation area Addresses 8449 to 8458 2101 to 210 1 This specifies the connection data registration No where the callback destination GX Developer side s telephone No is registered Connection data are data that have been registered in the Q Series C24 s flash ROM or buffer memory See Section 3 4 4 for connection data registration In the following case the connection data telephone No specified in callback data No 1 becomes the callback destination If the callback destination GX Developer is fixed 1 module The external line dialing line types and telephone number in the connection data become valid In the following cases when the callback destination telephone No from the GX Developer is specified and connection made callback is performed using the external line dialing and line types in the connection data for the registration No specified in callback data No 1 If it is being made possible to change the callback destination GX Developer If the maximum number of callback destination GX Dev
96. a user frame in which only NAK 154 is registered as the first frame and also specifying exclusive format 1 received data count for arbitrary data as 2 bytes a read request will be performed to the PLC CPU upon the reception of 2 byte data Reception data First frame 4 Equaling exclusive format 1 receive data count v Reception start timing Receive complete timing read timing Ignored Stored in the reception area 1 The data length for arbitrary data can be specified as a word byte count of 0 or greater the unit depends on word byte units designation for each combination of the first frame and the last frame specifying format 1 The received data count for data reception using format 1 is referred to as exclusive format 1 received data count 3 Reception without the first frame combination 2 A 2 B reception using Format 0 a Reception of combination 2 A 1 In this method a user frame is used as the last frame in place of the non procedure protocol data receive complete code and is transmitted from the external device together with arbitrary data 2 Anyreception data prior to the last frame are all treated as arbitrary data 3 4 5 The Q series C24 will begin reception processing when arbitrary data is received When data of the same arrangement as the last frame is received arbitrary data is stored in the reception area of the buffer memory and
97. according to the values for the connection retry number to initialization connection timeout registered in the initial setting for GX Configurator SC 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q 3 Precautions for performing data communication and notification a When communicating data with the external device 1 When setting the no communication interval time to infinite wait set value 0 in the initial setting of Q series C24 be sure to perform line disconnection after the completion of data communication Only the no procedure protocol bidirectional protocol data communication can be performed in the PLC CPU with Q series C24 installed The Q series C24 automatically performs line disconnection processing if no data exchange is performed during the no communication interval time The connection in progress signals X12 and initialization complete signals X10 turn off b When notifying to pager receivers 1 2 Turn on the notification issued request signal Y14 before the Q series C24 modem TA initialization is completed Notification processing is conducted when the notification issued request signal Y14 turns from ON to OFF after the completion of modem TA initialization Therefore notification processing is conducted when the PLC CPU of the station with Q series C24 installed is in stop status or the PLC CPU stops due to error since the notification issued request signal Y14 is turned off in e
98. and RS signals to control communications If the external device can transmit and receive data according to ON OFF of the Q series C24 RS and CD signals as shown below half duplex communications is possible RS signal Turned ON OFF by the Q series C24 as shown below When data is transmitted from the Q series C24 this signal is turned ON When transmission is complete turn this signal OFF CD signal Turned ON OFF by at the external device as shown below When data is transmitted from the external device this signal is turned ON When transmission is complete turn this signal OFF The following describes the half duplex communications data transmission and reception timings by Q series C24 CD signal and RS signal 1 Timing when transmitting data from external device Transmit data by controlling the Q series C24 CD signal according to the simultaneous transmission priority non priority designation registered in Transmission control and others system setting screen of the GX Configurator SC See Section 8 4 5 of User s Manual Basic a When Q series C24 is designated priority Terminate data Retransmission transmission External device Data A Data E Data B PLC CPU Data C Since the Q series C24 has priority it continues to transmit even if the DC Store this data at the signal is tumed ON external device 4 SD Send Data Dae 4 RS Sen
99. and line connections Setting of callback function designation settings by the GX Configurator SC 4 Access to the QCPU 5 Line disconnection 2 Temporary line disconnection GX Developer Q Series C24 Processing for the GX Developer to access the QCPU ait Processing by the callback function POINT See Section 2 7 of the User s Manual Basic for Series C24 and GX Developer versions that are compatible with the callback function 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q 2 Data communications procedure Here the procedure for data communications when using the callback function is shown a series C24 side procedure Carry out procedure of starting the modem function and data communications in accordance with Section 3 4 1 1 Setthe callback function by the GX Configurator SC See 4 2 Initialize the Q Series C24 side modem See Section 3 4 3 The modemss initialization completed signal X10 goes On when modem initialization is completed Wait for the line connection from the GX Developer Select the connection system connect way from the GX Developer then make line connection When the Q Series C24 callback processing is completed normally the line connection signal X12 is in the ON state See the GX Developer s Operating Manual for details of the line connection screen from the GX Developer when using the callback functio
100. applicable area of the buffer memory 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q c When the number of times remote password mismatch occurs is large 1 When the number of times notification of a remote password mismatch is received exceeds the number of times specified in buffer memory address 8204 200 the Q Series C24 disconnects the line automatically The connection signal X12 turns OFF After confirming the remote password registered in the QCPU and the remote password specified in the external device execute line connection again 2 When the number of times notification of a remote password mismatch is received exceeds the accumulated count value buffer memory address 8205 2000 the Q Series C24 executes the following processing The line and modem are not disconnected when communicating using MC protocol An error code 7FE84 is stored in the buffer memory s MC protocol transmission error code storage area address 602 618 25 26 The CHn side error occurrence signal XE XF turns ON and the ERR LED lights up When communicating using the GX Developer An error code 7 8 is stored in the buffer memory s modem function error code storage area address 545 221 The CHn side error occurrence signal XE XF turns ON and the ERR LED lights up 3 The accumulated number of times up to the present a remote password mismatch occurred accumulated count value in the Q series C2
101. bidirectional protocol 4 4 1 Program example 150 DX 4 kt 101 The following shows a program example for receiving data using an interrupt program Program condition Interrupt pointer No of module set by GX Developer CPU side Interrupt pointer Start No 50 Interrupt pointer No of units 2 fixed CH1 side interrupt pointer 150 CH2 side interrupt pointer 151 Intelli module side Start I O No 0 Start SI No 0 fixed Setting for whether the interrupt program is started by GX Configurator SC CH1 side Issues interrupt Communication is performed using the non procedure protocol CH2 side Does not issue interrupt Program example When the series C24 I O signals are X YOO to X Y1F lt Interrupt program enabled El For CH1 side lt Normal reception gt DX3 Sets the flag for confirming H lisEr M100 normal reception abnormal lt Abnormal reception gt reception in the main program Resets by the main program lt Reception interrupt program executed gt M400 S A BUFRCVS ud 0200 Receives data and stores it in 0200 and succeeding addresses IRET D200 No of receive data From D201 Receive data 4 RECEIVING DATA WITH AN INTERRUPT PROGRAM Data register Buffer memory D200 D201 Reception area No of receive data Receive data D2nn 1 When data reception is performed with an interrupt program the de
102. bytes of the registration data Sets the user control data control number Sets the initialization command Write the data for initialization Data No 80014 Registration to buffer memory Data registration complete flag for initialization is set 3 104 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION M2 P2 Mov K80 pi Mov K3 wov nnnnnnnnnn 1 MOV HO MOV K1 H2 MOV K60 MOV 1234567890123456 MOV K16 HO H1829 DO SET SET M80 P3 SET SET Y10 X10 x13 s i 0 H221 D100 Y10 x10 RST X13 RST M60 M40 P6 t 3 RST SET Yi4 X15 E 9 9 sET Xi6 Mo R FrrowP HO H221 D102 Yi4 X15 SET X16 RST 3 105 K40 D1 D2 07 DH D12 D23 D24 D39 K41 H2 Yi4 RET Y10 M100 K1 Y10 M81 RET 14 M101 M6 K1 Y14 M61 RET MELSEC Q Data registration processing for connection subroutine Set the number of bytes of the registration data Clear the data storage device for connection Set the pager receiver designation Notification is executed Set the telephone number Set the space to the remainder of the telephone number designation area Set the external line dialing number 0 Set the line type tone Set the waiting time for the message transmission Set the message Set the message length
103. callback function to make line connections or to make line connections without using the callback function If the following is selected for the GX Developer connection system and line connections made it is possible to access the QCPU from the GX Developer by that method only on that occasion Auto Callback during fixed Auto Callback during designated number The procedure is the same as when accessing the QCPU by selecting Auto for the connection system and making line connections If line connections are made with the callback destination GX Developer limited to a maximum of 10 modules set setting 3 FH select Auto Callback during designated number as the connection system and specify the telephone No The Q Series C24 checks the telephone No received from the GX Developer side and if it is registered in the Q Series C24 the line connection status is held and it becomes possible to access the QCPU from the GX Developer If a telephone No is received from the GX Developer that is not registered in the Q Series C24 the Q Series C24 disconnects the line Data for checking the callback destination telephone No by the Series C24 are registered in callback Data No 1 to 10 Set the data registered in callback data No 1 to 10 in the Modem function system setting screen Example If line connections are being made with Auto Callback during designated number as the connection system 1 L
104. code data and transmits Part that designated user frame No 9 Added by the Q series C24 When ASCII BIN conversion disabled Data designated by sequence E program T A B 1 2 to 89 41 42H 31H 32H ABH 89 03H 12H ODH 1 OAH jM UL Calculated by the Q series C24 9 CONTENTS AND REGISTRATION OF THE USER FRAMES FOR DATA COMMUNICATION MELSEC Q With a multidrop link the user frame includes data that identifies which station transmitted the message to the external device to facilitate generation of arbitrary send data External device Data that identifies the transmitting staion to the external device C L When message transmitted from the staion A B C 1 2 3 RIF No 1 Q series C24 gt gt e gt ABC123 Data designated to the station Arbitarary data No 1 Q series C24 send data User frame designation area CPU C24 5 Station No S S S Data when transmitting T OJA T 1 A T 5 A a frame written to each X X X Q series C24 for transmission i cu RIF RIF RIF C24 Q series C24 QC24 N 2 Reception a When setting for reception by user frame is performed and the first frame is set the Q series C24 receives the message when it receives data with the same contents as the designated firs
105. codes during data communication using the non procedure or bidirectional protocol The range of additional code data that is added or deleted is explained in Sections 12 3 and 12 5 1 During data transmission Additional code data is added immediately before the transparent code and additional code data set for transmission Example Transparent Transparent Additional code code code seng Buffer memory 2 During data reception When additional code data set for reception is detected the additional code data is removed and the immediately succeeding one byte data is processed for reception Example Arbit Additional Arbit Buffer memory 4 ud LS dd Receive code code code 3 During data communication using the ASCII BIN conversion The handling of transparent codes and additional codes is done for data after ASCII BIN conversion during transmission and data immediately before the conversion during reception Example When communicating using an arbitrary format of the non procedure protocol f Head data Buffer memory transmission area reception area FFR H 0 E Arbitrary data section Send r i 1 1 1 210 2 3 E A B cll 314 324 30 324 334 1041414 4241 434 Receive 1 1 1 1 1 1 Transmission data count Receive data count Transmission data code D 1 L 1 receive data Conversion 12 1 Delete Additional
106. connections Setting of callback function designation settings by the GX Configurator SC Line Connection Callback connection during designated number Es EP 88 Callback GX Developer telephone No 1 Input the telephone No n for the callback destination telephone No and make line connections Line Connection Callback connection during designated number 1 Registration in the Q Series C24 Ku GX Developer Callback data No 1 Telephone No 1 telephone No n TA PBS Callback Modem Callback data No 2 Telephone No 2 Callback data No Telephone No 3 Not used to to Callback data No 10 Telephone No 10 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION Set the Callback function designation by the GX Configurator SC Check the received telephone No If it is registered make the line connection Telephone No 1 Telephone No 2 Callback data No 10 Telephone No 10 MELSEC Q If the maximum number of callback destination GX Developer is limited to 10 modules Setting FH or Setting 6 7H Select the GX Developer to be called back if the Q Series C24 limits the callback destination to a maximum of 10 modules Specify the callback destination telephone No when making line connection from the initial GX Developer side If the Q Series C24 chec
107. data the Q series C24 adds the first frame and last frame to arbitrary data When data is received the arbitrary data section is stored in the buffer memory as receive data User frames and various setting values for data communication with the external device can be preregistered to the Q series C24 flash ROM 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q The following table shows which special functions are available for the main data communication functions of the Q series C24 Main data communication functions Reference MC protocol Special functions section Monitoring of the PLC CPU using the PLC CPU monitoring Chapter 2 Data communication to a remote location using the modem 3 Reading received data using an interrupt program Changing the unit of the data length for communication data 0 Changing the monitoring time for data communication O Chapter6 Transmission control for data communication DC code control Including Xon Xoff control O O 7 DTR DSR ER DR control Data communication using half duplex communication Chapter Data communication using user frames Registration X Chapter9 Transmission X Chapter 10 reception O x Chapter 44 Data communication using the transparentcode x O O Chapter 12 Communication using ASCII code data by ASCII BIN conversion x o o Chapter 13 Data communication with mult
108. data count Reception data count gt Received data count 1 B Reception data count 0 Reception data count lt Received data count 1 C Reception data count Received data count KD Reception data count exclusive format 1 received data count gt 0 1 E Reception data count exclusive format 1 received data count 0 Combination without the first frame Reception data count lt Received data count Reception data count gt Received data count data 2 B 11 11 Reception data count 0 Reception data prior to the reception of the first frame Deleted When receiving the first frame Reception start 1 E When m receivin en arbitrary When receiving the in the receiving the complete last frame x1 reception code message Data of the 1 A 1 complete code is treated as 1 A 2 part of arbitrary data 1 1 C 1 Data of the complete code is Foa treated as part of 1 D arbitrary data Reception sta 2 A 2 2 A 4 Rece ption start 2 B 1 The reception processing via the receive complete code is not performed when the same data as the receive complete code has been registered in the last frame 2 The data reception interval is not monitored with the no reception monitoring time timer O when only the last frame is set When a rec
109. device Monitoring of the bit device ON OFF status 2 Monitoring of the local station s PLC CPU status 2 In monitoring word and bit devices a maximum total device point value of 960 equivalent to a maximum of 15360 bits for only bit devices or a total of 10 blocks when any continuous device range comprises one block can be registered Since monitoring of the local station s PLC CPU status will also be registered as a one block portion up to 11 blocks can be registered 11 2 Number of word device blocks registered number of bit device blocks registered CPU status monitoring 1 block 960 points 2 Total number of all word device block points total number of all bit device block points 1 point 1 word 1 point 16 bits 3 With device monitoring of the blocks for which the word and bit devices are registered the head device of each block becomes the monitoring target 2 USING THE PLC CPU MONITORING FUNCTION MELSEC Q Example1 For a block in which 10 points of word devices from D100 to D109 are registered Monitoring target Numeric value stored in D100 Data transmitted Numeric values stored in D100 to D109 Example2 For a block in which two points of bit devices from M100 to M131 are registered Monitoring target ON OFF status of M100 Data transmitted ON OFF status of M100 to M131 4 The word and bit devices that can be designated as the monitoring targets and the device codes that are used to register the
110. disconnecting even if communication between the GX Developer and PLC is interrupted a Initial setting using the GX Configurator SC See Section 8 4 4 of User s Manual Basic 1 Setting screen Modem function system setting screen 2 Setting item No communication interval time designation 3 Setting value 0 infinite wait b Operation using the GX Developer Always perform the line disconnect operation when the GX Developer on line operation is completed after the line to the Q series C24 side is connected 12 An example of what to do on the PLC CPU side for improper access from the external device The following is an example of performing on the PLC CPU side the line disconnect processing with respect to the opposite device and prohibiting receive via a modem when the number of remote password mismatch detected by the Q series C24 remote password check function exceeds the number set by the user 1 The user should determine the count and accumulated count of notification given when a remote password mismatch occurs during the unlock processing from the external device with respect to the remote password set in the QCPU See Section 3 3 6 3 a and b 2 In the GX Configurator SC system settings in order for the Q series C24 to operate set the count determined above in the following item on the Modem function system setting screen and register this to the Q series C24 See Section 8 4 4 of User s Manual Ba
111. do not use any prohibited to use signals as an output signal to an intelligent function module from the PLC CPU Writing data into the system area or outputting a signal for prohibited to use may cause a PLC system malfunction Design Precautions N CAUTION Do not bunch the control wires or communication cables with the main circuit or power wires or install them close to each other They should be installed 100mm 3 9inch or more from each other Not doing so could result in noise that may cause malfunction e When using the module while values such as buffer memory set values are registered in the Flash ROM do not turn off the power supply for the module loading station nor reset the PLC CPU If the power supply for the module loading station is turned off or the PLC CPU is reset while any values are registered the data contents in the Flash ROM become inconsistent and as a result the values must be set again in the buffer memory etc and reregistered to the Flash ROM Also this may cause failure and malfunction of the module Installation Precautions N CAUTION Use the PLC in an environment that meets the general specifications contained in the user s manual for the CPU module to use Using this PLC in an environment outside the range of the general specifications may cause electric shock fire malfunction and damage to or deterioration of the product e When installing the module securely insert t
112. for a designated time The connection in progress signals X12 and initialization complete signals X10 turn off RS CS control yes no designation area address 56 38 1 Designates whether to use the RS CS signals for controls to notify local station side data reception capability to the partner side during data transmission between the Q series C24 and modem TA 2 This setting is for the interface designated by the modem connection channel indicated in a The control of the other interface that does not use the modem function is performed by the settings in the buffer memory DTR DSR and DC control designation area address 93u 133H 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q The overview of the RS CS controls are described 1 When transmission data 1 The Q series C24 detects the modem TA data reception capability from on off of the CS signal 2 When the CS signal is on data transmission from the Q series C24 starts or continues When the CS signal is off data transmission from the Q series C24 is interrupted 2 When reception data 1 The Q series C24 side reception capability is notified to the modem TA by the on off of the RS signal 2 When the RS signal is on the Q series C24 can receive data Start continue data transmission from the modem TA to the Q series C24 When the RS signal is off the Q series C24 cannot receive data Cancel data transmission from the modem TA to the
113. for the sample program is as shown below The CH used for operation of this sample program is CH1 only CH1 Transmission channel CH2 Reception channel GX Developer QJ71C24N R2 2 Program condition This is a program to monitor transmitted data from CH1 of the QJ71C24N R2 with user instructions a b 16 8 GX Developer switch setting See User s Manual Basic Section 4 5 2 Switch number Setting value Switch 1 07C2 Switch 2 0006 Switch 3 07C2 Switch 4 0006 Switch 5 0000 Devices used by the user Monitor start instruction signal X20 Monitor option specification signal X21 Monitor stop instruction signal 57 X22 During monitor start instructions M20 During monitoring 21 During monitor stop instructions M22 Communication data monitoring specification area storage condition D300 Monitor option specification area storage condition aia ates ach arn A N ERA E D301 16 8 16 USING COMMUNICATION DATA MONITORING FUNCTION MELSEC Q C Sample program SM400 Uo 1 MV 68216 D300 g UN MV 98217 0301 Monitor start X20 is ON X20 N21 Uo FMOVP HO 69730 HOCFE Monitor data area is cleared to 0 UO Hi G8216 SET M20 Monitor start being instructed M20 Uo 68216 H2 RST M20 SET M21 Monitoring 0002 UO j 68216 Hi00F RST M20 Monitor settin
114. from the local station QCPU such as transmission using non procedure protocol Communication request from the external device including the GX Developer connected to the local station QCPU transmitted to other station upon request from the QCPU Modem 9 Modem Ethernet module Q series QCPU C24 Path for items subject dli aside ed H i to remote password check EM ZZ ZZ Path for items not subject to remote password check GX Developer p 4 r oh aS 4 check Ethernet module 1 In the above diagram a communication request from the external device cannot be received since the remote password check setting has been executed If the remote password check setting has not been executed a communication request can be received and data communication from the external device is possible b Selecting modules subject to the remote password check The user can select any Q series C24 to perform the remote password check and set this using QCPU parameters This is set on the GX Developer remote password setting screen 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q c Stations that can be accessed when the remote password check is performed 1 If the external device performs the remote password unlock processing with respect to the Q series C24 of the directly connected station local station a
115. instruction is completed with an error the complete status display device at completion D 1 turns on and the error code is stored in the control data read result S1 1 See the following manuals regarding the error code and check the errors and take corrective actions Error codes A4FFFH or less QCPU Mode User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 7000 or higher Section 10 2 of the User s Manual Basic A program that reads registered data of the user frame having registration number 3E8u to devices D4 and later When the input output signals of the Q series C24 are X Y80 to X Y9F M60 PLS KO H3E8 K80 SET 17 17 SET M60 DO D2 D3 K40 MO M100 M101 Read request Sets the frame No to be read Sets the allowable number of data to be read Clears the device in which to store the read user frame data Executes user frame reading Normal completion Abnormal completion 17 17 17 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q 17 6 PRR Instruction Applicable device MELSECNET H Special Ind Setting data Internal device MELSECNET 10 os File register Direct JOO module register Constant Others Instruction code Executing condition Command PRR F Command Setting data Setingdaa data Description Set by Data type Start I O signal of the module U Binary 16 00 to FE The 2 upper digits o
116. interrupt program is invalidated during the initial processing of the CPU module For asynchronous data communication with the Q series C24 from the external device without communication procedure setting read the data as shown in the following program Q series C24 I O signals are from X YOO to X Y1F MOVP MOVP K10 D3 G INPUT UO DO DIO MO V After RUN 1 scan only INPUT instruction execution XOE 3 CH1 error information is initialized FEND 150 SM400 Received int t BUFRCVS UO K1 D200 ecelved interrupt program execution IRET 5 CHANGING SEND AND RECEIVE DATA LENGTH UNITS TO BYTE UNITS WORD BYTES UNITS SETTING MELSEC Q 5 CHANGING SEND AND RECEIVE DATA LENGTH UNITS TO BYTE UNITS WORD BYTES UNITS SETTING The word units are used for the data length count of the amount of data sent received using the following data communication functions in data communication between the Q series C24 and the external device This chapter explains how to change the units word to byte byte to word of the data length count sent received with the following data communication functions The data length units can be set for each Q series C24 interface The Q series C24 controls the number of data to be transmitted to the external unit and the number of data when it requests the PLC CPU to read the data received from the external device according to the units set by the user 1 Data communication func
117. interval unit s Initialization connection timeout designation 1 to 60 Time out unit s Number of initialization retries designation 3 1 to 5 Number of retries Data number for initialization designation For modem functions designation 1 Sends initialization data designated by the transmission user 700 frame designation area 2000 700 to 801 Data No for initialization Data number for connection designation BB8 to 801 Data number for connection GX Developer connection designation 0 Does not connect 1 Connects No communication interval time designation 0 Waits infinitely 30 1 to 120 Non communication interval time Line disconnection wait time Unit min RS CS control yes no designation 0 Does not control 1 Controls 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q ES Dec S rere Default Correspondence protocol ication ame pP vaue MC Non Bi 57 to 143 to 8 Use prohibited System area 144 904 304 1304 For modem Switching mode number designation RW 145 914 305 1311 Switching Transmission specification designation after switching Si n tti 146 924 306 1324 RS and DTR signal status designation 00054 Bom E 7 343 1575 CR LF output designation 184 8 344 1584 Output head pointer designation 185 9 345 1594 Transmission Output count designation 186 to 285 346 to 445 user frame 15 1 1BD 544
118. is retried automatically using the initialization connection timeout time stored in the buffer memory address 50 32H and is repeated until initialization is completed normally When modem initialization is not completed normally the user should perform the following and restart the station where the Q Series C24 is installed Check the set initialization data No Check the registered contents of the initialization data corresponding to the set initialization data No If they are abnormal correct them and register them again Check if the modem s power is turned on 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q 2 When the line is disconnected from the Series C24 side using Y 12 the initialization completion signal X10 goes off together with the connection in progress signal X12 When connecting to the line again do so after first initializing the modem When the line to the Q Series C24 is disconnected from the external device side the Q Series C24 s initialization completion signal X10 does not go OFF When desiring to disable reception by the Q Series C24 side s modem execute line disconnect by the modem disconnection request signal Y 12 5 If the modem TA is initialized by a sequence program a I O signals used in initialization The initialization request signal Y10 initialization complete signal X10 and initialization connection abnormal complete signal X13 are used Examp
119. monitoring PLC CPU monitoring function Designates the timing constant cycle transmission or condition agreement transmission when sending notifying information on the PLC CPU monitoring results device information CPU status information to the external device The time interval designated in data items a and b above for reading information from the PLC CPU can also be used as the transmission time interval for constant cycle communication The conditions for condition agreement transmission are designated using data items h and i below PLC CPU monitoring transmission measure Designates the means by which the PLC CPU monitoring results are conveyed to the external device Data transmission The device information and the PLC CPU status information are sent as the monitoring results Notification Notification message is sent as the monitoring results Number of registered word blocks number of registered bit blocks Designates the number of word device blocks number of registered word blocks and the number of bit device blocks number of registered bit blocks registered in the Q series C24 as the target when performing device data monitoring or transmission CPU abnormal monitoring Designates whether or not the Q series C24 monitors abnormality of the local station PLC CPU status monitoring in the PLC CPU monitoring 2 USING THE PLC CPU MONITORING FUNCTION MELSEC Q g Monitoring device head device No
120. monitoring devices are shown in the table below Register the devices using the existing device ranges m Device type Classification Device Device range Word ASCII Default Special relay Internal system Speciaregister O s a 99 ipt 0 O xe 9 i ow 1 1 o eg Iintemalretay O m 0 to 8191 Eug Lncey 0 0 O tote Daargser o o os A Ott Linkregister 1 O w Be owim p 19 ei 2 Current value Retentive timer curentvaue O contact O om Counter c cm curentvaue 1 O o f 9 Link special register 0 to 7FFH BUDE Directinput bx Dretoupt S oO ow Indexregister O z o CAM MELLE EE x Internal user 0 to 2047 1 Designating a non existent device code will result in an error 2 When the device range in the parameter setting has been changed the new device range can be set as the PLC CPU s monitoring target 2 USING THE PLC CPU MONITORING FUNCTION MELSEC Q 2 2 3 Timing for PLC CPU monitoring The following explains the timing for PLC CPU monitoring when the PLC CPU monitoring function is executed
121. of User s Manual Basic 15 7 15 7 15 SWITCHING THE MODE AFTER STARTING 15 4 2 Mode switching sample program MELSEC Q The following shows a sample sequence program that switches the CH1 interface mode The series C24 I O signals X YOO to X Y1F X0 12 x N50 1 MV Do Mode Reception Transmission Reception Abnormal Switching processing processing read reception instruction request detection MOV H85B0 01 TO HO H90 DO K2 SET Y2 Y RST Y FROM HO H203 02 K1 D2 KO SET M50 M50 LE A AAHAN At tha catinanraligecattha hiittan Modification of the setting values of the buffer i memory special applications area P RST Y2 __ 15 8 Changes the operation mode to MC protocol format 1 Sets the transmission specifications Writes the mode switching designation contents to the buffer memory Sets the mode switching request Resets the mode switching error signal Reads the mode switching request contents Mode switching complete Changes the setting value of the communication protocol according to the communication specification Mode switching complete reset Mode switching request clear by clear command 15 8 15 SWITCHING THE MODE AFTER STARTING MELSEC Q 15 5 Switching the Mode from an External Device This section shows how the Q series C24 mode is switched from an external device 15 5 1 Mode switching proced
122. oldest data position of the monitor data area is stored using the offset value from the head address of the monitor data area 0 to monitor buffer size specification Default 0000 3 oldest data position 2 When the monitoring data exceeds the monitor buffer size the new data is written over the oldest data Ring buffer type The oldest data position of the monitor data area can be confirmed from this area Example 26114 becomes the oldest data when is the monitor data pointer using 2602 as the head address of the monitor data area LOL x HEX 16bit integer Value C DEC 9 it i C 32bit integer HEX C Real number C ASCII character f 16 6 address F EDC mase tresa 3210 _Optionsetup ion 0000 0000 0000 1111 oof Monitor data pointer 0002017 1100 1111 1110 0001 0011 0100 0110 E E 0001 0011 0100 060111 Device test Monitor data size storage area 00201 0011 0100 1000 0001 0011 0000 0001 0 0 T Il 0000 1010 Close 0001 0 0 1 1 0100 0001 0001 0011 0100 0010 0001 0011 0100 0011 0001 0011 0100 0100 0001 0011 0100 0101 0001 0011 0100 0 1 1 0 0001 O01 1 0100 Otel 0001 0 0 Il 1l 100 1000 0001 0011 00020 lI 1 0 I 0 O O1 O0 O l1 0 O O 0 10160 Oldest data in the 0001 0011 0100 0110 monitor data area Monitor data size area Address according to the monitor buf
123. or longer If a response message can be transmitted and the message wait time after reception of the command message has elapsed the Q series C24 transmits the response message 2 Changing the transmission wait time The transmission wait time is registered on the GX Configurator SC s MC protocol system setting screen For details on the registration method of the transmission wait time see Section 8 4 6 of the User s Manual Basic 1 If the external device that must wait a certain time before it can receive a response message after a command message was transmitted set the message wait time as explained above Especially for data communications with an external device connected to the Q series C24 RS 422 485 interface set the message wait time to the external device hardware gate OFF time or longer 2 The message wait time described here is the time for data communications using QnA compatible 2C 3C AC frame 7 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING DC CODE TRANSMISSION CONTROL MELSEC Q 7 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING DC CODE TRANSMISSION CONTROL The transmission control function controls termination restart the transmission and reception of data between the Q series C24 and external device by turning transmission control signals on and off or by transmitting and receiving DC codes DC1 DC2 DC3 DC4 or informs the range of validity for the data to the external device The transmission control function can be set for each Q ser
124. performing switch settings via GX Developer and registration via GX Configurator SC 1 Switch settings via GX Developer 1 Set the Communication protocol setting to MC protocol format 5 2 Setthe Station number to 0 2 Registration via GX Configurator SC Register as follows when transmitting a user frame user selected transmission data 1 or a combination of user frames 1 User frame registration screen User frame User frame No User frame registration contents Registration code 3ECH 1004 02h 014 STX Q series C24 station No ETX sum check code CR LF 402u 1026 03d FOH OD OAH Sum check code is designated by a 1 byte binary code 2 Transmission control and others system setting screen MC protocol System setting screen Set the Word byte units designation to word units Set the On demand user frame designation items to the following First frame No 1st 3ECH First frame No 2nd OH No designation Last frame No 1st 402H Last frame No 2nd No designation 1 Use the ONDEMAND instruction to designate the transmission data to two words 1234 5678n 10 6 10 6 10 ON DEMAND DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING USER FRAMES MELSEC Q Control procedure Added by Q series C24 External device First frame 1st Last frame 1st 4 User frame Send data User frame Data name 2
125. possible to access the QCPU from the GX Developer by reconnection callback of the line from the Q Series C24 Transmission costs after line connection from the Q Series C24 side are borne by the Q Series C24 side b Settings in order to use the callback function The callback function can be used by setting it through the GX Configurator SC then registering it in the Q Series C24 See 4 c Selecting the callback destination GX Developer The GX Developer that can be called back in accordance with the settings in the Q Series C24 can be selected as shown below 1 Ifthe callback destination GX Developer is fixed 1 module Callback connection during fixed Connection can be made to only the fixed GX Developer 1 module registered in the Q Series C24 2 Ifit is being made possible to change the callback destination GX Developer Callback connection during designated number It is possible to connect to the GX Developer when the callback destination telephone number Call number is specified 3 Ifthe maximum number of callback destination GX Developers is limited to 10 modules Callback connection during max designated number is 10 Connection is possible with only those GX Developers max 10 modules with a callback destination telephone No registered in the Q Series C24 A description of the callback operation in 1 to 3 is shown in 4 b 1 Line Connection Selection of the connection system
126. remote stop is enabled 2 When the PLC CPU performs an error stop during self diagnosis etc When setting the No communication interval time as infinite wait set value 0 be sure to perform line disconnection processing after the data has been communicated If the line is left connected for long periods of time without performing line disconnection after data has been communicated not only will telephone bills be applied but it may violate electronic communication business laws x3 The Modem initialization time DR signal valid invalid designation designates whether the status of the DR signal output is valid or invalid at the startup of the Q series C24 When the DR signal ON is output from the modem register valid for this item When the DR signal ON is not output from the modem register invalid for this item b All transmissions using the modem function are transmitted in full duplex Leave the following initial settings for the interface side that uses the modem function as default Default value 1 CD terminal check Not checked 2 Communication system Full duplex communication c The processes that correspond to the following output signals may not be aborted Output signal Requesting process name 10 Initialization request standby request Connection request Disconnection request Y14 Notification issued request It is recommended to leave the following initial settings for the modem
127. request execution Connection request execution Notification execution Initialization completion Line disconnection completion M102 __ Transmission execution in progress Dial in progress M103 data read execution in progress Connection in progress mE Q series C24 accessible Initialization connection abnormal Initialization data registration completion SM400 Always ON completion Data registration completion for ee PS ewe SY connection Notification normal completion Initialization completion Do Number of registration data bytes Control number designation X16 Notification abnormal completion 4 Line connection completion D1 7 Receiver designation Initialization command telephone Q series C24 ready Notification completion D2 Sumber EA c WDT error Line disconnection completion ptt External line dialing number etc Convert the registration command into Initialization command D12 Line type etc em he registration command into pulse Data communication command M30 Initialization enabled e Message Convert the initialization command into Line disconnection command Message length Notification command SEDE Number of transmission data Reception abnormal detection Notification completion M41 Convert the connection command into D51 Transmission d ta pulse Initialization request ae communication enabled pais sormessa eneee
128. sent Chapter 10 c When sending the monitoring results as data during constant cycle transmission the entire block portion of the monitoring target device information and PLC CPU status information is transmitted in batch mode 2 USING THE PLC CPU MONITORING FUNCTION MELSEC Q d When sending the monitoring results as data during condition agreement transmission head data header and end data footer for the on demand function are added to the device information for a block with matched monitoring conditions and the PLC CPU status information upon the occurrence of an error The header and footer are added to each clock and then the monitoring result data is transmitted Transmission is performed in the following order the PLC CPU status information then the device information registered in the word block and then the device information registered in the bit block When there is communication using the MC protocol form 1 to 4 all of the device monitoring head device number will be converted to hexadecimal ASCII data and sent The same conversion is performed during either constant cycle transmission or condition agreement transmission 2 Data transmission to the external device while performing communication using the non procedure protocol a The device information and CPU information are sent by the word byte unit designations When the communication data ASCII BIN conversion is designated it is converted to
129. start the interrupt program the settings of the Interrupt pointer No of module in GX Developer and the System setting in GX Configurator SC are required 4 2 Interrupt Program Startup Timing The following explains the startup timing for interrupt program when performing data reception with an interrupt program during communication using the non procedure protocol or bidirectional protocol 1 The startup timing is the same for communication using either the non procedure protocol or bidirectional protocol 2 Receive data from the external device is stored in the reception area of the buffer memory When the next input signal rises the interrupt program is started Input signal name CH1 side CH2 side CHnrecepondatareadrequestsigna x XA CHn reception abnormal detection signal x x9 4 RECEIVING DATA WITH AN INTERRUPT PROGRAM MELSEC Q 4 3 Reception Control Method Using an Interrupt Program The following explains the reception control method when receiving data with an interrupt program during communication using the non procedure protocol or bidirectional protocol Data reception using the dedicated instruction BUFRCVS instruction interrupt program SM400 150 Z BUFRCVS UO K1 D200 Control data 0200 Word count for stored receive data D201 Receive data Main program execution Interrupt program execution BUFRCVS instr
130. stops if 0000 is written in the communication data monitoring specification area of the buffer memory Set by user b Monitor stop by the system when the monitor data area is full 1 The full stop specification bit 0 of the monitor option specification area of the buffer memory is set to ON 2 When the monitor data area is full monitor buffer size monitoring is automatically stopped and 10024 is written in the communication data monitoring specification area Q series C24 is set c Monitor stop by the system when the timer 0 error occurs 1 The timer 0 error stop specification bit 2 of the monitor option specification area of the buffer memory is set to ON 2 When the timer 0 error error code 7 40 occurs monitoring is automatically stopped and 10024 is written in the communication data monitoring specification area Q series C24 is set 1 x1 Part of the data immediately after the occurrence of a timer 0 error may be entered in the monitor data area 16 3 16 3 16 USING COMMUNICATION DATA MONITORING FUNCTION MELSEC Q 16 2 Communication Data Monitoring Function Settings Settings for the communication data monitoring function can be made on the Transmission control and other system setting screen of the GX Configurator SC or by the PLC program 1 GX Configurator SC setting for the communication data monitoring function The setting items for the communication data monitoring functi
131. the The specified value is invalid 1st to 4th arbitrary data to be received The specified value is invalid Received data count designation 11 15 11 15 11 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING USER FRAMES MELSEC Q 2 Initial settings via GX Configurator SC Non procedure system setting screen This section explains the buffer memory when setting various setting data for data reception using a user frame in a sequence program Numbers in the parentheses indicate the buffer memory address a User frame use enable disable designation addresses ADu 14Du Designate Enable when using user frames to receive data b15 to bO Buffer memory address ADu 14Du Default Write 1 0 Do not use 1 Use 2 Data communication enable Q series C24 is set 1 1 is written in the user frame use enable disable designation area 2 After the preparation for the data reception using the user frames is completed 2 is written in the user frame use enable disable designation area Q series C24 is set 3 After the value in the user frame use enable disable designation area is changed from 1 to 2 start receiving data used by the user frame Until 2 is written in the user frame use enable disable designation area data transmission is also not available b First frame No designation area and last frame No designation area addresses AEn to B5u 14En to 155 From amon
132. the current PUTE instruction is completed 17 22 17 22 17 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Errors 17 23 MELSEC Q 5 Whether the PUTE instruction was completed normally or abnormally can be checked with the completion device D or status display device at completion D 1 a Completion device Turns on at the END processing of the scan where the PUTE instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing b Status display device at completion Turns on and off depending on the completion status of the PUTE instruction Normal completion Stays off and does not change Abnormal completion Turns on at the END processing of the scan where the PUTE instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing Operation when the PUTE instruction is being executed PUTE instruction END END END END Sequence processing processing processing processing program PUTE instruction Completion of reading user ie execution frames by the instruction Registration OFF i l deletion request i Completion device 1 Abnormal JON completion Status display OFF device at completion Normal completidn Onescan 1 When the dedicated instruction is completed with an error the status display device at completion D 1 turns on and the error code is stored in the control data registration deletion result S1 1 See the fol
133. the external device 1 Data transmission to the external device while performing communication using the MC protocol a The same format as for the messages sent with the on demand function is used to transmit data except that the on demand data section is replaced with the device information and PLC CPU status information The data is sent as explained in c and d below Detailed explanation is found in Section 3 17 of the Reference Manual When the interface that is to use the modem function is set in the MC protocol connection processing and disconnection processing to the modem are performed when the PLC CPU monitoring results are transmitted Example Data transmission by MC protocol with modem function condition agreement transmission Cycle time External device Sequence program Bonet matched END END END Matched Not matched Matched b When the transmission of on demand data using user frames is designated the same format as for sending on demand data using user frames is used to transmit data except that the on demand data section is replaced with the device information and PLC CPU status information The data is sent as explained in c and d below See the following explanatory items for data reception by the external device side Device information PLC CPU status information arrangement Section 3 17 of the Reference Manual Arrangement of data in the user frame section to be
134. the following settings and registrations in advance 1 The initial settings for the Q series C24 as shown in Section 3 4 2 2 The registration of the data for initialization as shown in Section 3 4 3 3 The registration of the data for connection as shown in Section 3 4 4 4 The initialization of the modem TA connected to the Q series C24 side as shown in Section 3 4 5 In addition both the initialization and line connection can be conducted simultaneously by designating the data for initialization and data for connection to perform connection processing For the data setting for initialization to perform initialization and line connection simultaneously see Section 3 4 2 3 4 5 Explanation on the above mentioned setting is omitted in this section Registering the data for connection using GX Configurator SC Settings on the modem function system setting screen The number of the data for connection that is used for line connection in order to perform data communication with the external device is registered on the GX Configurator SC s Modem function system setting screen The following explains the number designated by the Connection data number item on the GX Configurator SC s Modem function system setting screen The addresses shown in parentheses below indicate the addresses of the buffer memory where the setting values for this item on the Modem function System setting screen are stored 1 When line connecting from th
135. the same interface Only the local station s PLC CPU can be the target for the PLC CPU monitoring function A new PLC CPU monitoring registration cannot be performed while the PLC CPU monitoring function is in operation In this case 1 Perform the new PLC CPU monitoring registration after canceling the PLC CPU monitoring 2 Ifthe new PLC CPU monitoring registration is performed without canceling the PLC CPU monitoring an error will occur Also for PLC CPU monitoring registration using GX Configurator SC perform the registration after placing the PLC CPU in the STOP status and then restart QCPU While the PLC CPU monitoring function is in operation even if an error occurs with transmission notification of the PLC CPU monitoring results or reading of data from the PLC CPU the PLC CPU monitoring function operation will not stop The PLC CPU monitoring function can only be used when the system configuration is 1 1 The following describes how the Q series C24 operates when the PLC CPU monitoring result information cannot be sent to the external device due to line disconnection or other reason Even if an error occurs while the PLC CPU monitoring function is in operation the ERR LED does not light up This is the same as when using the on demand function of the MC protocol a When the setting for the transmission monitoring time designation timer 2 is an infinite wait 0H 1 Reading of monitoring data from the PLC CPU sto
136. the user frame four and transmission area data are transmitted In the description of the sample programs data transmission using user frames is described for the following conditions case 1 The series C24 signals The series C24 installed at QCPU I O signal addresses X Y80 to X Y9F 2 The Q series C24 interface used in data communications with the external device The Q series C24 CH1 RS 232 interface 3 Switch setting using the GX Developer Set the following setting values on the Intelligent function module switch setting screen in accordance with Section 4 5 of User s Manual Basic Setting item CH1 Transmission setting Switch 1 S CH1 Communication rate setting CH1 Communication protocol setting CH2 Transmission setting Switch 3 m 0000 CH2 Communication rate setting Not used Switch 4 CH2 Communication protocol setting 0000H Q series C24 station number Switch 5 Station No setting isediinihier ser frame used i u 4 Data to be registered on the GX Configurator SC s Transmission control and others system setting screen and the Non procedure system settings screen for data communication via user frames Change the default values for the items listed in the table below Use default settings for other items x n example 2 the output frame No is not registered using the GX Configurator SC It is registered using a sequence program Set according to the external device 0006H
137. transmission and condition agreement transmission 2 3 1 System setting items for the PLC CPU monitoring function The following explains system setting items for the PLC CPU monitoring function The PLC CPU monitoring function setting screens from the GX Configurator SC are shown 1 Forthe PLC CPU monitoring system settings perform the settings on the screens shown in Section 8 4 9 of the User s Manual Basic Register transmission user frames on the screens shown in Section 8 4 10 of the User s Manual Basic after checking the specifications and setting methods explained in Chapters 9 to 11 of this manual Register the data for connecting the modem function on the screens shown in Section 8 4 3 of the User s Manual Basic after checking the specifications described in Section 3 4 4 of this manual 1 Setting items and requirement when performing communication using the MC protocol foe Condition agreement Constant cycle transmission ES e transmission Setting item Reference section Data Data ug B Notification om Notification transmission transmission Cycle time units OB of this section Cycle time Po of this section PLC CPU monitoring function O 1H Constant cycle O 2 Condition agreement 3 of this section PLC CPU monitoring transmission measure Constant cycle transmission Transmission pointer 4 of this section Output count Section 11 4 2 2 A Section 2 2 5 3 Data No for co
138. wind and water damage 6 Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi 7 Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or the user 2 Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply including repair parts is not possible after production is discontinued 3 Overseas service Overseas repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi s local overseas FA Center Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ 4 Exclusion of chance loss and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation to damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi chance losses lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products damages and secondary damages caused from special reasons regardless of Mitsubishi s expectations compensation for accidents and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products and other duties 5 Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice 6 Product applicatio
139. 000 to 3029 BB8H to BD5H Data for connection All registered by user 32767 to 32737 8001H to 801FH A registration number for the initialization data or data for connection to the buffer memory is in the range of 32767 to 32737 8001 to 801FH and determined by the used area 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q 2 In this area the number of bytes for the initialization data or data for connection for 1 data to be registered to the buffer memory is designated 3 The registration of data for initialization is described in Section 3 4 3 The registration of data for connection is described in Section 3 4 4 b15 to bO Buffer memory address 6912 1 00 0 to 78 80 8142 1 0 to 78 80 Number of bytes u 0 No registration data 1 to 78 Registration data exists for initialization 80 Registration data exists for connection For user frame registration User frame designation area address 6913 to 6952 6954 to 6993 1 01 to 1 28 1 2 to 1 51 1 When registering the initialization data or data for connection to the buffer memory the number of registration data bytes for 1 data is designated 2 The registration of data for initialization is described in Section 3 4 3 The registration of data for connection is described in Section 3 4 4 b15 to Buffer memory address 6913 1 01 pata for initialization or data for connection A
140. 05H User frame Arbitrary data first frame User frame last frame User frame Arbitrary data User frame first frame last frame User frame 024 01 3 03 04 0 0 User frame 02 iFF 0143B 05 register code T TIL T 7 1 register code T e T E 9 S Station AED ext E C L S Station Horizontal C L mo md at pay a E LEE EE Xi t eode c E Xi i nv rode c Pes P i pd I i i rd iva he c i boi i E i i 4 h Ww i i E i oa p od Pide 1 i oa i W wv ud i e m Transmission 024 00 13B 314 324133 344 0341 O7H 100 Transmission 0261 00 31 32 33 34 03 30 374 10D 0A reception L reception BEEN EE data code Calculation data code Calculation range range 9 4 9 4 9 CONTENTS AND REGISTRATION OF THE USER FRAMES FOR DATA COMMUNICATION MELSEC Q How to calculate the horizontal parity code This is a numeric value obtained by calculating the XOR for the subject data and then converting it to ASCII code In the case of the example 1 314 0011 0001 XOR 2 32H 0011 0010 0000 0011 XOR 3 33x 0011 0011 0011 0000 XOR 4 34 0011 0100 0000 0100 XOR ETX 034 0000 0011 0000 0111 ASCII code o 7 30 37 4 Transmission reception data corre
141. 1 When an unregistered user frame number is designated the operation will complete abnormally 2 When the total bytes of data registered in the frame to be read is unknown read 40 words 80 bytes by the dedicated instruction 3 The SPBUSY instruction can be used to read the communication status by the dedicated instruction 9 CONTENTS AND REGISTRATION OF THE USER FRAMES FOR DATA COMMUNICATION MELSEC Q 9 4 3 Deleting user frames The following shows an example of a sequence program when deleting user frames registered in the Q series C24 flash ROM For details on the PUTE instruction see Section 17 7 When the series C24 I O signals are X Y80 to X Y9F X52 A nLs M70 Deletes request M70 K3 Do Sets the delete request 8 02 Sets the No of the user frame to be deleted K80 D3 Sets a dummy number for the allowable number of deletions K1 K1 Set the flash ROM write allow D4 MO Executes user frame deletion SET M100 Normal completion M1 _ Xs Xs Tser M101 Abnormal completion POINT 1 When an unregistered user frame number is designated the operation will complete abnormally 2 The SPBUSY instruction can be used to read the communication status by the dedicated instruction 10 ON DEMAND DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING USER FRAMES MELSEC Q 10 ON DEMAND DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING USER FRAMES During communications between external device and PLC CPU using an MC protocol
142. 1 When communicating using bidirectional protocol it stores the error code the data receive result storage area for the target interface The reception abnormal detection signal does not turn on 2 Changing the transmission monitoring time timer 2 The transmission monitoring time timer 2 is registered on the GX Configurator SC s Transmission control and others system setting screen For details on the registration method of the transmission monitoring time see Section 8 4 5 of the User s Manual Basic The transmission monitoring time timer 2 monitors the transmission termination time when the following states are generated When DTR DSR signal control is used and the DSR signal is turned off See Section 7 1 When DC1 DC3 receive control is used and DC3 is received See Section 7 2 When the RS 232 interface CS signal is turned off See Section 3 2 1 of User s Manual Basic 6 CHANGING THE DATA COMMUNICATIONS MONITORING TIMES MELSEC Q Criteria when changing the transmission monitoring time time 2 setting Find the transmission monitoring time timer 2 time from the maximum delay time of external device message receive processing or response message transmission processing and the transmission time byte t and change the set value Number of bytes transmitted second n Transmission rate number of transmit bits byte Transmission time byte t 1000 ms number of bytes transmitted s n Trans
143. 100 Sets normal completion flag Mi M 9 TsET M101 Sets abnormal completion flag 12 12 12 12 12 TRANSPARENT CODES AND ADDITIONAL CODES MELSEC Q 12 5 Handling Transparent Codes and Additional Codes During Bidirectional Protocol Data Communication The following explains the handling of transparent codes and additional codes during data communication using the bidirectional protocol 1 The additional code designation data will be added to or deleted from the data that is sent or received 2 Communication data for which transmission reception processing of transparent codes and additional codes is performed includes the message data length data section and error code Such processing is not performed for the head code ENQ ACK NAK and sum check code of a message Example Transmission sequence T When Error When C code A normal abnormal External device side K K L H 1 f Sum N Data Data section check PLC CPU side length Designated code Applicable data range D transmission data L H L oH La 1 The Q series C24 performs the following processing during data transmission reception a When an additional code set for reception is detected during data reception the additional code data is removed and the immediately succeeding one byte data is processed for reception as pa
144. 11 21 B 5 6 63134131 2 41 42 35 36 Transmission instruction X50 OUTPUT PLC CPU Completion device M9 1 essi Sears 4 Abnormal Status display device 1 completion at completion M1 7 1 H 1 Normal i completion 1 One scan 121u ASCII BIN conversion designation H 400 Transmission area H 00H 024 Designation of no of data sent 12341 Transmission data 40 56 402 56n ABH Buffer memory F Transmission instruction 00044 in byte units X50 RES Mov H1234 D10 Sets the arbitrary transmission data for D11 to D12 Mov HS6AB 011 01 Sets CH1 to the transmission channel 2 D4 Sets the number of data sent to 2 GP OUTPUT us 01 D10 MO Execute the transmission wo Lii SET M100 Sets normal completion flag Mt be M101 Sets abnormal completion flag 13 8 13 8 13 COMMUNICATING WITH ASCII CODE ASCII BIN CONVERSION 2 Example of transmission by user frame External device side I os 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 989 1 Data transmission area E E pre Z 12284 1 H D Q 28 5 G2 aS LOU D SAVE Total number i arbitrary data section ES zu i i 09 PLC CPU side 5 15 o 012DH 13 4 1 21A 5 6 Bx i i OAH 54 4 41 4 3 20 01 33449143204 1842435436095 ATH Corresponds to 2 Corresponds to
145. 12 TRANSPARENT CODES AND ADDITIONAL CODES MELSEC Q 12 3 Handling Transparent Codes and Additional Codes During Non Procedure Protocol Data Communication 12 3 The following explains the handling of transparent codes and additional codes during non procedure protocol data communication 1 The data designated by the additional code will be added to or deleted from the data to be transmitted or received 2 The following shows the range of communication data for which processing of transparent codes and additional codes is performed Applicable range during transmission 4 Message during communication using Arbitrary data section arbitrary format Applicable range during reception Applicable range during transmission _ Message during communication using user frames User frame Arbitrary User frame data first frame section last frame lt gt Applicable range during reception The Q series C24 performs the following processing during data transmission and reception a When an additional code set for reception is detected during data reception the additional code data is removed and the immediately succeeding one byte data is processed for reception as part of the receive data b When transparent code additional code data set for transmission is detected during data transmission the additional code designation data is added immediately befo
146. 1H 3BH 41H 42H code Check If the 02 and data parts match they are processed as if user frame No mentioned above was received 2 Transmission reception data corresponding to register codes FFH and 01H The Q series C24 transmits and receives the user frame part corresponding to register codes FFH and 01 by representing the station No set in the GX Developer switch setting as 1 byte binary data See the first frame part shown in the illustration in item 3 for an example 3 Transmission reception data corresponding to register codes FFH 04H FFH 05H FFH OAH and FFH OBH For FFH 04H and FFH OAH The horizontal parity code that calculates the range for the transmission reception data message is expressed as 1 byte of binary data and then transmitted and received The difference between FFH 04H and FFH is the difference in the calculation range For FFH 5 and FFH OBH The horizontal parity code that calculates the range for the transmission reception data message is expressed as 2 byte ASCII code data and then transmitted and received from the upper digit The difference between FFH 05H and FFH is the difference in the calculation range Examples of the transmission and reception data arrangement of the horizontal parity codes are shown below One first frame and one last frame each Example 1 For register code FFH 04H Example 2 For register code FFH
147. 24 side with the initialization request The number of registrations indicates the number of data for initialization registered to the Flash ROM by the user Data registration status for initialization storage area address 551 to 552 227H to 228 1 2 3 b15 b14 b13 b12 to b2 bi bO Buffer memory address 551 2274 to 552 2284 0 0 to Stores in Flash ROM registration status for initialization of data for initialization transmitted with the initialization request to the modem on the Q series C24 side The registration status of each data for initialization with registration numbers of No 9C4H to 9E1H 2500 to 2529 is indicated in the corresponding bit in the range shown in the figure below The registration of data for initialization is described in Section 3 4 3 DE E OFF No registration 1 ON Registration exists 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q Number of notification execution storage area address 553 229h 1 Stores the number of execution of the Q series C24 notification message transmission processing for the pager receiver 2 The storage value when the number of notification execution exceeds 32767 remains at 32767 3 The value for this area can be changed by the user in the range of 0 to 32767 When the storage value is changed by the user the number of execution is stored according to the changed value s
148. 2DH 1 344 12H ABH 568 103 37 4 byte units in the left ns pop entm poet sj 1 1 1 min A x x S FA y A diagram ee 2 8001 80001 41 Registration No of the First specification Second specification Third specification Fourth specification Fifth specification corresponding user frame Not transmitted ission i i Sending User frame No being transmitted Transmission instruction 9 Po not output designation PLC CPU 2 Output head pointer designation Completion device ON 1 gt Output count designation peo ess 4 Abnormal Status display device SS tint Aa Output frame No designation 1st at completion Normal completion 2 One scan 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 1 8th We NG 2 9th es lo ES 11 1002u Send transparent code designation 7 C34 10th 121 No jd ASCII BIN conversion designation x 11 Tarnsmission area Az 00H 04 transmission data count designation Uwe A gnation 12th 12344 e 401 transmission data C6 13th 56 402 ABH 14th Buffer memory 1 0002 for word unit Buffer memory Transmission instruction X50 is M50 M50 X9E X9F L 34L X v bo H1234 D1 Sets arbitrary transmission data in
149. 3 Notification performed In the case of 3 above the wait time for message transmission in the notification message must be designated The other party s phone number used to establish line connection when communicating data or performing notification is designated When phone number is less than 18 characters a space code 20 must be entered for the remainder The external line access number on Q series C24 side when performing data communication notification to the partner device is External line dialing number 10 amp External line access number on the series C24 side 11 255 Noexternal line access number required on series C24 side The line type used to perform data communication notification with the partner device is designated Line type 0 Pulse 1 Tone 2 ISDN Notifying message area 36 bytes Designated when performing notification Designated stored value and contents Number of bytes Data type Mes The wait time after line connection until message transmission is designated Unit s m 2 Binary MK 0 to 255 Wait time transmission m Valid when the pager receiver designation data connection is 3 Designate the notification message according to the display Message 30 Binary specification on the other party s device The number of designated message bytes shown above is designated 2 Binary 0 No message designation 1 to 30 Number of messa
150. 3 229s Number of notification executions 0 1 more Number of executions Notification execution data number 551 to 552 2271 to 2289 0 No notification execution 554 22 TOU ipd Data storage BB8 or more Notification executed Notification executions 555 to 557 22B to 22D Notification status confirmation Notification execution data number 0 No notification execution 570 23 en TC 5 Data storage BB8 or more Notification executed Notification execution area 5 number 571 to 573 23 to 230 574 to 591 x 23 to 24 Use prohibited System area 3072 to 6911 For user User free area 3840 words 0 RW C004 to 1AFFH Application is determined by the user 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q E Dec E Default Correspondence protocol Application Name to User registration area Registration No 80011 to 801 1 00 to 1B28x The user registration area has the following combined uses with data written For registration No by the user according to the purpose of use by the TO instruction etc 80014 See each explanation item concerning the configuration of each area the data written etc For user registration 1 If data communications is being carried out by user registration frame User registration frame See Chapter 9 2 If data communications is being carried out by the modem function
151. 3 FROMP H8 H258 Do MOVP KI MOVP K6 G INPUT U8 01 D10 M0 Ml SET Mi I SET 11 26 The illustra ADH AEH AFH e 1 2 B3H 4 B5H 120 121 25BH 600H 2020 2021 2022 2023 2024 2025 2026 2027 M100 M101 ion below is for byte unit User frame use control 2 designation First frame No designation 8 1st 9 2 6 3rd 15H 4th Last frame No designation 41BH 1st None OH 2nd None OH 3rd None OH 4th YES NO Receive transparent code designation 1002u OH Disable ASCII BIN conversion designation Receive user frame 2 ieu 3 ith 3 Receive data count to D3 00H 00H User frame receive format designation 1st Format 0 2nd Format 0 1 3rd Format 1 1 4th Format 1 Exclusive format 1 0 received data count 1st 2nd 0 3rd 2 4th Buffer memory Reads combinations of user frames received Sets CH1 to the reception channel Sets the allowable number of reception data to 6 Executes reception Sets the normal completion flag Sets the abnormal completion flag 11 26 11 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING USER FRAMES Head data External device MELSEC Q e When receiving with a combination of the first frame and arbitrary data Exclusive format 1 d
152. 3 4 4 Register read delete of the data for connection This section explains the registration reading deletion of data for connection such as the telephone number of the partner device and notification messages that are used for communicating data with external devices notify pager receivers and accessing from GX Developer using the modem functions 1 Registration destination of data for connection 1 The data for connection can be used by registering to the Q series C24 s Flash ROM or buffer memory 2 The buffer memory can register the data for initialization shown in Section 3 4 3 The data for initialization or data for connection will be registered in the applicable area 3 Itis recommended to store the data for connection during the debug process in the buffer memory The registration data in the buffer memory will be erased after the starting up the Q series C24 loading station again It is necessary to register the data for connection in the buffer memory after each start up of the Q series C24 4 It is recommended to store the data for connection to the Flash ROM after completing the debug process By registering it to the Flash ROM the registration process of the data for connection will be unnecessary thereafter 2 Types of data for connection 1 All data for connection are registered and used as defined by the user 2 The number of possible registrations are shown in the table below 3 Data for connection registratio
153. 4 1 x1 Some TAs may transmit one character as 10 bits Check the specifications when setting the series C24 transmission specifications 2 Some TAs may switch the communication rate following the start of data communication Since the Q series C24 cannot switch the communication rate set the TA side so that its communication rate does not switch 2 When using a TA whose DR terminal signal is set by a switch set the DR terminal TA output switch level to high When using a TA whose DR terminal is set by a software write the command that turns on the DR terminal into the data for initialization Set the Modem initialization time DR signal valid invalid designation to Invalid during modem function system settings with GX Configurator SC 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q 3 3 3 Compatibility with the QCPU remote password function This section explains the Q series C24 data communication for the QCPU remote password function See Section 3 1 1 6 for an overview of the Q series C24 check function for the QCPU remote password The remote password function is a function that has been added to the QCPU as a means of preventing improper access such as destroying a program or data from an external device However this function cannot completely prevent improper access The user should incorporate his her own safeguards when it is necessary to protect the security of the PLC system from imprope
154. 4 can be checked in the area where the accumulated count of unlock process abnormal completion is stored address 8956 22FCh 4 The user should clear the accumulated number of times up to the present a remote password mismatch occurred using one of the following methods Set the accumulated count of unlock processing abnormal completion to 0 on the GX Configurator SC s modem function monitor test Screen Write O in the buffer memory area where the accumulated count of unlock process abnormal completion is stored address 8956 22FCn If the CHn side ERR occurrence signal XE XF for the Q series C24 turns ON and the ERR LED lights up this could indicate improper access from the external device See also an example of measures taken on the PLC CPU side described in 12 See Section 10 1 2 of User s Manual Basic on how to turn off the Q series C24 ERR LED after it has lit up 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q 9 Number of modules for which the remote password check can be set A maximum of eight modules can be registered with remote passwords in the QCPU 1 To set the remote password in a module use the GX Developer remote password setting screen x1 The remote password modules are as follows Q series C24 series Ethernet module 10 Callback Function When the number of callback processing denials exceeds callback denial notification accumulated count buffer memor
155. 4 processes data as follows 1 Out of the data in the applicable data range shown above the Q series C24 sends and receives data whose data code is in the range of 30H to 39H 0 to 9 and 41H to 46H A to F 2 During data reception the Q series C24 regards the arbitrary data section as ASCII code data converting it to binary code data for storage in the buffer memory The user frame section is received in the data format corresponding to the registration contents in the Q series C 24 During data transmission the Q series C 24 regards data designated by the PLC CPU an arbitrary data section in the transmission message and user frame sections as binary code data converting them into ASCII code data and transmitting them External device When communicated in an arbitrary format Buffer memory transmission area reception area H D 0002u OOH 02 Head data Trasmission data count Rreceive data count Transmission data receive data Send Arbitrary data section Conversion 1 2 0 2 3 A B C 31H 32 30 32 33 4141424 43H Receive No of data in word units 13 2 13 2 13 COMMUNICATING WITH ASCII CODE ASCII BIN CONVERSION MELSEC Q Even if ASCII BIN conversion is enabled it is possible to transmit data without converting the data in any user frame portion or buffer memory transmission area When sending data without ASCII BIN conversion specify the user fr
156. 400 __ 200 5 4800 044 115200 OBu 9600 05 OCh Transmission speed of 230400 bps is available for only CH1 of the QJ71C24N R2 R4 When connecting external devices to both of two interfaces the total of the communication speed should be 115200 bps of less 230400 bps or less if using QJ71C24N R2 R4 When connecting an external device to either of two interfaces the maximum of 115200 bps is available for the interface a maximum of 230400 bps if using QJ71C24N R2 R4 In this case set 300 bps for the other interface to which no external device is connected Set 00x to the interface for which GX Developer connection is set in the communication protocol setting Serial communication module will operate at the communication speed set on the GX Developer The PLC CPU must also be aware of the following I O signals for handshake and buffer memories when the mode is switched from an external device Mode switching in progress signal X6 XD Switch setting error mode switching error storage area address 203 15 6 15 SWITCHING THE MODE AFTER STARTING MELSEC Q 15 4 Switching the Mode from the PLC CPU This section shows how the Q series C24 mode is switched from the PLC CPU 15 4 1 Mode switching procedure The following explains the procedure for switching the Q series C24 mode from the PLC CPU 1 Mode switching request Y2 Y9 Mode switchin
157. 69 10EH 270 FFu EEH to to 2 1 Sum check code 1 11FH 287 FFH 120H 288 to None 3 7 999 data sum check code series C24 station No etc as part of the user frame The data contents that are transmitted and received and the byte count depend on the code combined with register code FFH See Section 9 1 1 4 for the register code combinations that can be handled as variable data and the data contents that are transmitted and received 9 CONTENTS AND REGISTRATION OF THE USER FRAMES FOR DATA COMMUNICATION MELSEC Q 9 2 Transmission Reception Processing Using User Frame Register Data The following explains how the Q series C24 transmits and receives using user frame register data The Q series C24 checks the transmission reception of following data using registered data 1 Transmission a If user frame transmission is designated the user frame is converted or not converted from ASCII to BIN data and transmitted depending on the data communications protocol ASCII BIN conversion designation and user frame No designation based on the following data as the send data of the given part 1 2 Register code 01H to FEH 1 byte data register part Q series C24 transmission is based on the register code 01H to FEH data Example Register the data codes 03H ODH and as user frame No 3E8H When user frame No 3E8H is designated during data transmission if A
158. 8001H Data No for connection designation 8002H Registration of the modem s initialization data and line connection data modem initialization line connection and notifications are all performed by the sequence program 3 103 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION P1 3 104 XIE XIF MO Mi M3 X10 x12 X13 Y10 M30 M2 10 x12 X13 Yi H R M0 CALL P1 2 CALL P2 X20 PLS M80 M80 M30 MOV KO KIMS RST 7 SET M81 M81 E CALL P3 X24 M40 RST M6 SET M61 RST M100 RST M101 te i K2Y60 FEND Mov K30 DO Mov K1 D1 MOV ATE1QOV1 amp C1 amp D28H D2 Mov 1 amp I0 amp R2 amp S0SO0 1 D10 MO TO HO H1800 00 K17 SET Mt RET MELSEC Q Accessible flag is turned ON Modem initialization enabled flag is turned ON Line connectable flag with the remote station is turned ON To the data registration processing for initialization subroutine To the data registration processing for connection subroutine Converts the initialization command into pulse Various complete flags after the modem initialization processing is reset To the modem initialization processing subroutine Converts the notification command into pulse To the notification processing subroutine When the reset command the complete flag is reset Output the various complete flag status LED display Data registration processing for initialization subroutine Sets the number of
159. 9H OH to 9H Data length data section 41H to 46H AH to FH 12 18 12 18 12 TRANSPARENT CODES AND ADDITIONAL CODES MELSEC Q 12 6 2 Example of data transmission The following shows an example of data transmission 1 When the send transparent code designation is set to Enable and the ASCII BIN conversion is set to Disable Additional code 10H DLE transparent code 02H STX 1st group Additional code 10H DLE transparent code 03H ETX 2nd group Transparent code 2nd group External device side Additional code 2nd group 06 Data section 00041 D L HiL i 11029 A B EW0003 R F 5 04 00 10 02 11 41 42 10 03 00 0 4 00 PLC CPU side c 1 1 1 Transparent code 1st group Additional code 1st group Transmission command x50 BIBOUT Data length transmission data count Excluding additional codes Completion device Mo For word unit 0004 Ls EN E Abnormal For byte unit 00084 Status display device y completion at completion M1 Normal The following diagram is for word unit completion gt Address One scan 03 04n 4004 1102 1102 D10 14H 02H 40TH 024 B A B A 11 5 424 41 4024 41 data 00x 03H 00x 03H LF CR LF CR D13 OAH 0 404 Sequence program Buffer memory device me
160. A COMMUNICATION MELSEC Q 9 3 Precautions when Registering Reading Deleting and Using User Frames The following shows the precautions which should be observed when registering user frames and using registered user frames to transmit data to and receive data correctly from the external device 1 Precautions when registering reading or deleting user frames a b c d User frames can be registered using one of the following methods However an user frame to be registered to the flash ROM could be registered by the utility package GX Configurator SC dedicated to the Q series C24 as much as possible 1 Registering via the utility package GX Configurator SC for the Q series C24 2 Registering with the dedicated instruction PUTE from the PLC CPU 3 Registering from an external device with command 1610 through communication using the MC protocol The following settings are required when registering or deleting user frames 1 Switch setting via GX Developer Set the setting modification to Enable in the transmission setting 2 Setting via GX Configurator SC Set the flash ROM write allow prohibit setting to Allow on the monitor test screen To set from the PLC CPU write 1 in the following buffer memory at the startup of the Q series C24 when the ready signal rises Flash ROM write allow prohibit designation area address 2000 To register read or delete user frames from the PLC CPU perfo
161. C CPU is one of the following Depends on prior settings See 2 When the last frame is received When exclusive format 1 received data When data of the receive complete count is specified as 0 and the first code is received In the case of a frame is received Receive combination without the first frame When exclusive format 1 received data complete When data equaling the received data count is specified as 1 or more and data count is received equaling this count is received When a receive error time out for the When a receive error time out for the no reception monitoring time timer 0 no reception monitoring time timer 0 occurs occurs All arbitrary data received up to the point when one of the above occurs or a receive error is generated is stored in the reception area 11 10 11 10 11 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING USER FRAMES MELSEC Q 2 Timing chart for reception processing using the Q series C24 The following is a timing chart for the reception processing when data reception is performed using the user frame which includes the reception processing using the received data count The numbers in the table indicate the timing of a reception data read request to the PLC CPU see next page Combination with the first frame Timing pattern number see next page Combin ation Reception data Amount of reception data of arbitrary data Reception data count Received
162. C CODE TRANSMISSION CONTROL MELSEC Q Receive data clear described in Section 6 1 4 of User s Manual Basic clears the OS area simultaneously with clearing of the receive data save area If more data is received when the vacant OS area mentioned above is 0 bytes an SIO error is generated and the data received until the OS area becomes vacant is ignored At this time the SIO LED is turned on See Section 10 1 1 of User s Manual Basic b Q series C24 DC1 DC3 reception control contents 1 When the Q series C24 receives DC3 from the external device it terminates data transmission The sequence program cannot read the received DC3 signal 2 When the Q series C24 receives DC1 from the external device it restarts data transmission The Q series C24 resumes transmission from the data terminated on DC3 reception The sequence program cannot read the received DC1 signal External device Q series C24 3 Once DC is received subsequent DC1 are ignored and are removed from the receive data 1 The following describes the state of the Q series C24 when the power is turned on the CPU is reset or the mode is switched during DC1 DC3 transmission control and DC1 DC3 reception control DC1 is not transmitted to the external device This is the same state as when DC1 was transmitted The same state as when DC1 was received even if DC1 is not received from the external device 2 DC2 DCA transmission control DC2
163. C CPU Monitoring for Serial Communication Modules 3 18 Remote Password Unlock Lock 4 WHEN COMMUNICATING USING THE QnA COMPATIBLE 2C FRAMES 4 1 Control Procedures and Message Formats 4 2 Contents of the Data Designation Items 4 3 List of Commands and Functions for QnA Compatible 2C Frames 4 4 Precautions on the Data Communication 4 5 Example of Data Communication Using QnA Compatible 2C Frames 5 WHEN COMMUNICATING USING THE A COMPATIBLE 1C FRAMES 5 1 Control Procedures and Message Formats 5 2 Device Memory Read Write 5 3 Extension File Register Read and Write 5 4 Reading and Writing in the Buffer Memory of an Intelligent Function Module 5 5 Loopback Test 6 WHEN COMMUNICATING USING THE A COMPATIBLE 1E FRAMES 6 1 Message Formats and Control Procedures 6 2 List of Commands and Functions for A Compatible 1E Frames 6 3 Device Memory Read Write 6 4 Extension File Register Read and Write 6 5 Reading and Writing in the Buffer Memory of an Intelligent Function Module APPENDIX Appendix 1 Reading and Writing by Designation of the Device Memory Extension Appendix 2 Reading from and Writing to the Buffer Memory Appendix 3 Processing Time of the PLC CPU Side While Communicating Using the MC Protocol About the Manuals The following manuals are available for this product Please order the desired manuals using the chart below Related Manuals Manual name Q Corresponding Serial Communication Module User s Manual Bas
164. C CPU monitoring function 1 Transmission without using a sequence program 1 The PLC CPU monitoring function enables the Q series C24 to monitor the local station s PLC CPU at time intervals set by the user by reregistering data to be used for the PLC CPU monitoring function Data transmission and notification to the external device is possible by communication using the MC or non procedure protocol without using a sequence program 2 The following monitoring information selected by the user can be sent or notified to the external device as the PLC CPU monitoring results Combined use of Without the the modem Monitoring result modem function function modem communication Numeric value stored in a Local station PLC CPU b word device Pe device information on the Data transmission ON OFF status for a bit device to be monitored device Status of the local station PLC CPU module Notification message registered in data for connection character string Notification 3 Two separate timings constant cycle transmission and condition agreement transmission are used to transmit and notify the PLC CPU monitoring results to the external device In the constant cycle transmission transmission and notification are performed each time the PLC CPU is monitored n the condition agreement transmission transmission and notification are performed when the information read from the PLC CPU satisf
165. C CPU monitoring once again cancel the PLC CPU monitoring before registration Whether the CSET instruction is being executed or has been completed normally abnormally can be checked by the completion device D2 designated as a setting data a Completion device D2 0 Turns on at the END processing of the scan where the CSET instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing b Completion device D2 1 Turns on and off depending on the completion status of the CSET instruction Normal completion Stays off and does not change Abnormal completion Turns on at the END processing of the scan where the CSET instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing When the PLC CPU monitoring registration is performed the corresponding interface data communication protocol setting is only designated when non procedure protocol is used for the following data for designation in the control data User frame output head pointer for constant cycle sending batch conditions sending User frame transmission count for constant cycle sending batch conditions sending When the communication protocol setting for the corresponding interface is MC protocol there is no need to designate the user frame output head pointer and the user frame transmission count It is ignored when being designated 17 8 17 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q Operation when a CSET instruction is being executed END E
166. C2 as invalid data The sequence program cannot read the received DC4 code Non procedure protocol D D c ee 2 4 External device dD PLC CPU Stored to Q series C24 Ignored by Stored to Q series C24 buffer memory or OS area the Q series C24 buffer memory or OS area 3 Once DC2 is received subsequent DC2 are ignored and are removed from the receive data 1 MC protocol A comoatible 1C frame External format 1 device Message wait Character Sum check r Station No Command 3 The transmission control method and changing the DC code Switching between DC code control method and DTR DSR control as well as changing of the DC code are registered on the GX Configurator SC s Transmission control and others system setting screen For details on the registration method see Section 8 4 5 of the User s Manual Basic 7 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING DC CODE TRANSMISSION CONTROL MELSEC Q 7 3 Precautions when Using the Transmission Control Functions The following describes the precautions to be observed when using the Q series C24 transmission control functions 1 Agreement between external device and PLC CPU The external device and PLC CPU must agree to the following 1 Whether or not a transmission control function is to be used If a control function is used which control is to be used for data communications 2 Control timing 3 DC1 to DC4 codes when DC control is perf
167. C24 in advance and can be used in the same way as the other user frames 1 Overview The default registration frame is registered in the OS ROM of the Q series C24 The following table lists one byte data codes 01H to FEH to a maximum of five byte data which is registered in the frames and can be used for read only frame numbers 1H to 3E7H Each of these frames is treated as an user frame 2 Default registration frame write data and data contents that are transmitted and received The following shows the codes of the register data and the data contents that are transmitted and received Data contents that are transmitted and received data contents Default registration frame No Register data code Register byte Frame byte Hexadecimal decimal 1st byte to nth byte count count Data codes shown at the left 2H 2 02 4 4 5 to to to FEH 254 FEH Data codes shown at the left FFH 255 For variable data designation 1004 256 00 1 4 NUL 1014 257 1 Data codes shown at the left 1024 258 ODu OAH CR LF 1034 259 10 02H 2 2 DLE STX 1044 260 10H 03H DLE ETX 1054 261 00H FEH 2 2 Data codes shown at the left 1064 262 00d 00H 3 3 Data codes shown at the left 1074 263 FFu 1 3 2 ETX sum check code 1 108 264 034 1 0 OAH 5 4 ETX sum check code CR LF 1 1094 265 to None 100 2
168. CH1 side Set the transmission buffer to COOH to FFFu Set the reception buffer to 600 to 7FFH When the input output signals of the Q series C24 are X Y00 to X Y1F FMOVP DO K111 Clears DO to D111 KO 00 Sets the execution type wove D2 Sets the request type MOVP K1 D3 Sets the word byte units to word units MOVP H400 D4 Sets the on demand head address MOVP 05 Sets the on demand buffer size Move HOCOO 06 Sets the transmission buffer head address Move H400 07 Sets the transmission buffer size MOVP H600 08 Sets the reception buffer head address H200 D9 Sets the reception buffer size ZP CSET Uo 0200 Executes the initial setting WO Mi SET M100 M101 17 14 17 14 17 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q 17 5 GETE Instruction Applicable device MELSECNET H Setting data Internal device MELSECNET 10 File register Direct Special Index module register Constant Others Instruction code Executing condition Command GETE ES GP GETE Setting data Setingdaa data Description Set by Data type Start I O signal of the module Bi 16 00 to FE The 2 upper digits of an input output signal expressed in 3 digit User Mud its 9 Head number of the devices that store control data 51 User Head bit device number of the local station that turns ON for one scan upon
169. Contents of DTR DSR ER DR Signal Control This control uses the RS 232 interface DTR DSR signals to inform the external device whether or not the local station is ready to receive data The Q series C24 uses the DTR ER signal to inform the external device whether or not the local station is ready to receive data and uses the DSR DR signal to check if the external device is ready to receive data Example Terminate Restart Continue External device PLC CPU Data 1 1 Data 1 2 Data 2 2 Restart Continue DTR signal DSR signal 1 Q series C24 DTR control series C24 DTR control The Q series C24 uses the DTR signal to inform the external device whether or not it is ready to receive data The data transmitted from the external device by non procedure protocol is stored to the buffer memory receive data storage area through the OS area See User s Manual basic Section 6 1 2 7 1 For the following conditions the receive data is temporarily stored to the OS area and is transferred to the receive data storage area when the present receive data read processing is complete 1 Receive data size exceeds the size of the buffer memory area when receive data storage area receive data length data was received 2 The data was received before the sequence program read the previously received data The Q series C24 turns the DTR signal on off as shown below depending on the size of the vac
170. D8 tov H3030 D5 AD Ss H3030 D6 s tov H4646 D7 s tov H3030 D8 H8 H2000 Sets the flash ROM write allow M Tls PUTE U8 DO D4 Mo Executes user frame registration MO Mi M100 Normal completion MI M101 Abnormal completion 1 When registering a user frame in the flash ROM to designate an user frame number that has already been registered delete the previously registered number and then reregister 2 The user should manage the number of total bytes for registered data 3 To check unregistered user frames read the buffer memory addresses 205H to 210 indicated in Section 9 4 3 4 The SPBUSY instruction can be used to read the communication status by the dedicated instruction 9 CONTENTS AND REGISTRATION OF THE USER FRAMES FOR DATA COMMUNICATION 9 4 2 Reading user frames MELSEC Q The following shows an example of a sequence program when reading user frames registered in the Q series C24 flash ROM For details on the GETE instruction see Section 17 5 When the series C24 signals are X Y80 to X Y9F X51 P_ m M60 H3E8 M60 DO D2 D3 K40 MO M100 M101 Read request Sets the frame No to be read Sets the allowable number of data to be read Clears the device in which to store the read user frame data Executes user frame reading Normal completion Abnormal completion
171. DSR signal is turned on after data transmission was terminated restart data transmission transmit from the terminated data 8 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING HALF DUPLEX COMMUNICATIONS MELSEC Q 8 3 Changing the Communication System To change the data communication mode from full duplex communication to half duplex communication registration on the GX Configurator SC s Transmission control and others system setting screen is required The following explains setting items for changing the communication system For more details on the registration method of the communication system see Section 8 4 5 of User s Manual Basic 1 2 3 5 232 communication system designation Designate either full duplex or half duplex communication Simultaneous transmission priority non priority designation When the Q series C24 and the external device start data transmission simultaneously in half duplex mode designate whether to continue priority or stop non priority transmission from the Q series C24 Designated values 1 to 255 for setting non priority will be the transmission wait time that elapses from when the resumption of data transmission becomes available until data is actually sent Retransmission time transmission method designation When half duplex communication and non priority are set as indicated above this setting becomes valid When the Q series C24 and the external device begin transmission simultane
172. ELSEC Q 2 Specification and precautions for the connectable TA s terminal adapters a TA specification Specification ISDN INS net 64 equivalent Connection line A t DSU and TA are required High speed digital dedicated line Initialization Hayes AT command compatible See Section 3 4 3 communication B channel line exchange V 110 specification Communication standard D channel oe Electrical condition V 28 rew Circuit definition V 24 24 compliant series C24 side connector 9 pin female D sub Section 3 2 of User s to i Q series to RS 232 P Manual SN TA weal DR signal control Only the DR DSR signal must be able to turn on communication See ae z Section Other Compatible with the Q series C24 specification 3 3 1 of User s Manual Basic specification x1 TA s that turn on the CD signal simultaneously cannot be used Use a TA capable of flow control as described in 1 a in this section also for the communication between the TA and terminal control is a function of the TA itself that becomes available by issuing the AT commands to the modem See the TA manual for details b Precautions for selecting a TA 1 Set the TA on the Q series C24 side as shown below Setting item Setting range Depends on the TA in use TA command Hayes AT command SI SO control None Communication method Data bit Data format Match the series C2
173. FH byte 1st byte b Variable data designation contents data contents transmitted and received and handling by the Q series C24 The table below shows the register codes 00 to FFH FFH combinations for handling variable data the data contents that are transmitted and received and how the Q series C24 handles the data Combinations other than those shown in the table cannot be registered 9 CONTENTS AND REGISTRATION OF THE USER FRAMES FOR DATA COMMUNICATION MELSEC Q Changeable data register code Data contents transmitted and received Q series C24 handling range 3 explana tion 1st byte 2nd byte 3 exp Transmission Transmits the data code 00H NUL data 1 byte Calculation Detailed Reception Skips the given part 1 byte of the receive user frame Skips the check and performs receive processing Transmits and receives the station No set in the GX Developer switch setting as 1 byte binary code data 00H to 1FH O4 1 Transmits and receives the horizontal parity code in the calculation range using 1 byte of binary code data 5 1 Transmits and receives the horizontal parity code in the calculation range using 2 byte ASCII code data 1 Transmits and receives the horizontal parity code 1 the calculation range using 1 byte of binary code data Transmits and receives he horizontal parity code in the calculation range using 2 byte ASCII
174. For notification execution data storage Notification execution data number storage area address 554 558 22AH 22 1 Stores the registration number of the data for connection used in the Q series C24 notification message transmission processing to the pager receiver as log information 2 The latest five data is stored in order at the corresponding areas data 1 data 2 The latest information is stored in the data 1 notification execution data number storage area The old notification execution data number other than the latest five are deleted in order b15 to bO Buffer memory address 554 22 BB8u to 5 80014 to 801 Data 1 570 23 BB8x to BD5n 8001 to 801 Data 1 C 0 Notification not executed BB8 or more Notification executed execution number 8 to BD5x 3000 to 3029 t For user registration frame registration Number of bytes in registration data designation area address 6912 6953 1 00 1 29 1 The initialization data or data for connection can be stored into the buffer memory as well as the Q series C24 s Flash ROM Data type Registration destination Registration number Decimal Hex Flash ROM 9 stered byt e OS 2000 to 2013 7 DOH to DDH Si 7 Userregistereddata tered data 2500 to 2529 9C4H o 9E H Initialization data All registered by user 32767 to 32737 8001H to 801FH Flash ROM All registered by user 3
175. GX Configurator SC after debugging is completed Y Start data communications Transmission Reception Designate user frame No to Read receive data transmission user frame designation area address B7u to 11Du 157u to 1BDu of the Q series C24 buffer memory eee See Section 11 2 1 11 2 2 Designate transmission data pee See Section 11 4 arbitrary data area in transmit message to transmit area of the Q series C24 buffer memory Data transmission j 2 11 2 11 2 11 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING USER FRAMES MELSEC Q 11 2 Data Reception In data reception using the user frame the reception method on the Q series C24 side includes format 0 and format 1 This section explains data reception for each format 11 2 1 About reception data In reception using the user frame data arranged as indicated below can be received User frame User frame first frame y last frame E Reception e User frame 1 User frame Explanation ih method Combination first frame Arbitrary data last frame secti n Remarks Format 0 This section For data reception mixed settings are possible With the first 1 frame 1 This section 2 Without the first This section Format 0 frame 1 3 Specified data exists When ASCII BIN conversion is set to Disable Codes stored to
176. Handling Transparent Codes and Additional Codes During Non Procedure Protocol Data Communications cette itt titus fb ni M D DUM D tiep e TI AERE LIN 12 3 12 4 Example of Data Communication Using the Non Procedure Protocol 12 8 12 4 1 Example of data reception 12 9 12 4 2 Example of data transmission sess nnns 12 11 12 5 Handling Transparent Codes and Additional Codes During Bidirectional Protocol Data Comminicatlon g 25 Rp iR pud igi 12 13 12 6 Example of Data Communication Using the Bidirectional 12 16 12 6 1 Example of data reception sssssssssssssssssssseseneeenee nnne nnne nennen nnns 12 17 12 6 2 Example of data transmission ssesssssssssssssssseseeee eene enne nnne nnns 12 19 13 COMMUNICATING WITH ASCII CODE ASCII BIN CONVERSION 13 1to 13 14 13 1 ASCII BIN Conversion 21 1 e ee ne te cen Le tov den De i teu le te ide a Do ede e d c de eee 13 1 13 2 Settings for ASCII BIN Conversion sssssssseseeeeeneeennenneen nennen nennen nnne 13 1 13 3 Performing ASCII BIN Conversion for Data Communicated via Non Procedure Protocol 13 2 13 4 Example of Data Communication Using the Non Procedure 13 4 13 4 1 Exampl
177. II BIN CONVERSION MELSEC Q 2 Reception based on the received data count Head data d Two bytes of reception data is read to f Number of bytes after the PLC CPU as one byte data T T T T T ASCII BIN conversion 0 1 2 3 4 5 A B C D E 9 6 2 3 when 1 1 1 1 1 word units are used 1 1 1 External device 6 when byte units are used 0421 H32H33H34H35H41 H42HA3H44H45H3OH 2 19 a d Set to even byte PLC CPU side Reception data read request X83 Store data received count PLC CPU INPUT The diagram below is for when Completion device MO word units are used X XN SETS 1 Abnormal completion Status display device M1 at completion Normal completion i 6004 o0 03H 00H 03H 4 0 6014 23H 01H 602H 45H 45H 6034 CDH E9H CDH Buffer memory Sequence program device memory Reception data read request x83 wv K Do Sets CH1 to the reception channel move 03 Sets the allowable number of receiving data to 6 L aaa Do D10 NO Executes reception NO T M100 J Sets the normal completion flag T SET M101 Sets the abnormal completion flag When the receive transparent code designation is set to Disable and ASCII BIN conversion is enabled the codes of receivable data and the codes of receive data that is stored in the reception area of the buffer memory are as f
178. ING THE PLC CPU MONITORING FUNCTION MELSEC Q c In the condition agreement transmission for device monitoring the head device for each block is the monitoring target for condition monitoring of each block device For the condition agreement transmission the monitoring conditions that can be designated for the device to be registered by the user and the registration values when designating the monitoring condition are shown in the table below Register the monitoring conditions for the head device of each block using the following table Valid designated Registration value af TRE device Monitoring condition item to be judged Faredgetignered Forlevelingaered n Mes Bit Word transmissions transmissions Device value or status device monitoring condition value or status 0001 0101 Device value or status device monitoring condition value or status 0002 Monitoring device monitoring condition value 0003 Monitoring device lt monitoring condition value 0004 0104 nsigne Monitoring device gt monitoring condition value 0005 0105 Monitoring device gt monitoring condition value 0006H 0106 Monitoring device lt monitoring condition value 0007 0107 Monitoring device monitoring condition value 0008 0108 Signed E Am Monitoring device gt monitoring condition value 0009 0109 Monitoring device gt monitoring condition value 000 010 d In
179. LC CPU communication using the MC protocol non procedure protocol and bidirectional protocol can be performed 3 From the PLC CPU to the external device communication using the MC protocol transmission by the on demand dedicated protocol function only the non procedure protocol and bidirectional protocol can be performed 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q 4 Notification to the pager receiver 1 In order to notify to the pager receiver of the PLC system maintenance information the Q series C24 performs calling and message transmission according to the user designated connection data when the output signal from PLC CPU is turned from ON to OFF 2 Because Q series C24 notification processing is performed while the output signals from PLC CPU are turned OFF from ON dedicated notification can be performed when the PLC CPU enters the STOP state due to an error etc Notification Out of material detection Notification issued request Y 14 Notification execution direction Data number for connection 5 Communication from the GX Developer 1 Access from the GX Developer to the remote PLC CPU can be made read and write from to the device data and sequence program 2 The QCPU can be accessed after reconnection from the Q Series C24 side using the callback function Public line Modem Modem RS 232 cable GX Developer Transmission costs after line con
180. ND END Sequence program Scan processing processing Scan processing O n m 4 o c Q 5 15 o c Q o 2 H Q c m o 5 Completion device Completion device 1 Q series C24 Setting processing Errors 1 When the dedicated instruction is completed abnormally the error flag SMO turns on and the error code is stored in SDO See the following manuals regarding the error code and check the errors and take corrective actions Error codes 4FFFH or less QCPU Mode User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 7000 or higher Section 10 2 of the User s Manual Basic 17 9 17 9 17 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Program example MELSEC Q 1 A program that registers the PLC CPU monitoring The following example shows how to register the PLC CPU monitoring and send the monitoring results from the interface on the CH1 side The following registration is done to send the contents of MO to M15 and D100 to D109 to the external device on a constant cycle cycle time is 3 min When the input output signals of the Q series C24 are X YOO to X Y1F Mov SET RST N32 WR irr cs Uo KI 00 D200 Mt SET RST M30 M31 D10 D11 013 014 015 016 023 024 025 932 35 W36 N32 Converts registration command to pulses Sets execution type Sets request t
181. NMARK industri amp automation Geminivej 32 DK 2670 Greve Phone 45 0 70 10 15 35 Fax 45 0 43 95 9591 mail IpiaGlpmail com UTU Elektrotehnika AS P rnu mnt 160i EE 11317 Tallinn Phone 372 0 6 51 7280 Fax 372 0 6 51 7288 e mail utu utu ee ESTONIA Beijer Electronics OY FINLAND Ansatie 6a FIN 01740 Vantaa Phone 358 0 9 886 77 500 Fax 358 0 9 886 77 555 email infoGbeijer fi UTECO A B E F 5 Mavrogenous Str GR 18542 Piraeus Phone 302 0 10 42 10 050 Fax 302 0 10 42 12 033 e mail sales uteco gr GREECE Meltrade Automatika Kft 55 Harmat St HU 1105 Budapest Phone 36 0 1 2605 602 Fax 36 0 1 2605 602 e mail office meltrade hu HUNGARY SIA POWEL Lienes iela 28 LV 1009 Riga Phone 371 784 22 80 Fax 371 784 22 81 e mail utuGutu lv LATVIA Sirius Trading amp Services srl ROMANIA Str Biharia No 67 77 RO 013981 Bucuresti 1 Phone 40 0 21 201 1146 Fax 40 0 21 201 1148 e mail sirius siriustrading ro INEA d o o SLOVENIA Stegne 11 SI 1000 Ljubljana Phone 386 0 1 513 8100 Fax 386 0 1 513 8170 e mail inea inea si Beijer Electronics AB SWEDEN Box 426 S 20124 Malm Phone 46 0 40 35 86 00 Fax 46 0 40 35 86 02 email info beijer se ECONOTEC AG Postfach 282 CH 8309 N rensdorf Phone 41 0 1 838 48 11 Fax 41 0 1 838 48 12 e mail info econotec
182. OMP H8 H258 00 Ki Reads combinations of user frames received MOVP KI Di Sets CH1 to the reception channel MOVP K6 Sets the allowable number of reception data to 6 G INPUT U8 DI D10 MO Executes reception M1 h SET M100 Sets the normal completion flag Mi ft M101 Sets the abnormal completion flag 11 27 The illustration below is for byte unit 11 27 11 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING USER FRAMES MELSEC Q 11 3 3 Application example for data reception using a combination that does not specify the first frame In the description of this program example conditions for data reception using a user frame are as follows 1 The series C24 I O signal The series C24 is installed at QCPU I O signal addresses X Y80 to X Y9F 2 Q series C24 interface used in data communications with the external device The Q series C24 CH1 side RS 232 interface is used 3 Data to be registered on the GX Configurator SC Transmission control and other System settings screen and Non procedure system settings screen used for data communication using a user frame Change default values for the items listed in the table below Use default values for other items Set contents Buffer memory address to Remarks store registration value The unit is set to Word in the Explanation section count designation tha
183. ONS 3 1 Performance Specifications 3 2 RS 232 Interface Specification 3 3 RS 422 485 Interface Specifications 3 4 Serial Communication Module Function List 3 5 Dedicated Instruction List 3 6 Utility Package GX Configurator SC Function List 3 7 List of GX Developer Setting Items for Serial Communication Modules 3 8 List of Input Output Signals for the PLC CPU 3 9 List of Applications and Assignments of the Buffer Memory 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION 4 1 Handling Precautions 4 2 Settings and Procedures Prior to Operation 4 3 Part Names and Functions 4 4 External Wiring 4 5 Settings for GX Developer 4 6 Settings with the Utility Package GX Configurator SC 4 7 Individual Station Test 4 8 Loopback Test 4 9 Maintenance and Inspection 5 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE MELSEC COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL 5 1 Data Communication Functions 5 2 Utilizing the MX Component A 11 SH 080006 F 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL 6 1 6 2 6 3 Data Reception from the External Device Sending Data to the External Device Data Communications Precautions 7 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL 7 1 7 2 7 3 7 4 Data Reception from the External Device Sending Data to the External Device Processing when Simultaneous Transmission Performed During Full Duplex Communications Data Communications Precautions 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC Functions Available with Utility P
184. PLC CPU and external devices by designating a master station and slave stations Master station external device Communicati request Slave station external device Slave station external device Slave station external device Master station Before 2 External device 2 1 Station No 0x CPU C24 14 9 One of the external devices is made the master station and the other external devices communicate data with the PLC CPU after obtaining permission from the master station Example Permission granted response Communica tions request Permission granted response General report to start and end data communications between master station and PLC Start End Communications complete report p Response io Communications request 1 Permission granted response HK 2 n Data communications with PLC CPU Data communications with PLC CPU The following uses an example to describe the procedure when external devices communicate data with the PLC CPU In this example after the start of data communications between external devices and the PLC CPU the external devices perform a maximum data communications time time out check Slave station external devices that are not communicating data with the PLC CPU check if the external device that completed data communications with the PLC CPU transmitted a com
185. PU 3 When a remote password is set in the QCPU with the GX Developer the following access from the external device to QCPU using the Q series C24 modem function can be performed by executing the unlock processing to the remote password Data communication using MC protocol Accessing the PLC using the GX Developer The remote password function is a QCPU function designed to prevent improper access to the QCPU by users The QCPU remote password function can be used by setting a remote password in the QCPU with the GX Developer Q series C24 Modem TA 1 ILI Modem TA 1 External device Pager receiver 1 TA is an abbreviation for Terminal Adapter 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 3 Receiving data with an interrupt program detailed explanation in Chapter 4 1 In data communication between the Q series C24 and the external device data can be received using an interrupt program with the following data communication functions Data reception during communication using the non procedure protocol Data reception during communication using the bidirectional protocol 2 Receiving data using an interrupt program expedites data reception by the PLC CPU Data Q series C24 transmission EE issued Main program Main program Interrupt program executed PLC CPU FEND SM400 ina H
186. PU USER 2 a Station No 04 Station No 14 Station No 24 Station No 154 CPU C24 CPU C24 CPU C24 CPU C24 B NM C24 series C24 QC24 UC24 1 When the system starts the external device with the lowest station No 1 is given the line usage right 2 The external device that obtained the line usage right a When communicating data with the PLC CPU begins processing from 4 after communicating data with the PLC CPU within the maximum data communications time from among all the external devices b When not communicating data with the PLC CPU immediately begins processing from 4 3 The external devices that have not obtained the line usage right check the line usage time of the external device that obtained the line usage right and ignore the receive data not addressed to their own station When the line usage time exceeds the maximum data communications time each external device performs the processing of 7 14 6 14 6 14 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING EXTERNAL DEVICE AND PLC CPU M N CONFIGURATION External device that obtained the line usage right Before 5 Before 5 External device External device External device External device Station No 1Bu Station No 1C4 Station No 1Du Station No 1Ex 4 veru Ee 3 Data communications HT C
187. PU First flame Arbitrary data are Received data count 2n 9 corresponds to register AEn First frame No designation 9 8 1st ECT UC Sot Soe R p AFH aoi 2nd Reception data read request X83 i BOH 3rd 1 1 1 1 15 4th 1 B2u Last frame No designation i 41 151 Completion device MO 1 None JON 4 Abnormal B34 Us 2nd Status diaplay device completion None a at completion Normal 3rd i 1 completion i i Bs Non arth gt 1 2 0 scan i 5 1204 YES NO Receive transparent i E 1002H OH code designation 121 Disable ASCII BIN conversion User frame receive i E designation i ul Receive user frame 2 format designation i 25BH 2 th gt to DO 2020 1st Format 0 i 75 3 0 i L IPs 004 064 Receive data count gt to D3 1 A 2021H Receive data 2nd Format 0 6014 0 0 arbitary data 2022 Staa SON ol ra 4 H 1 3 Forma i 62 02 2023 33H 32H IDE H 1 4th Format 1 b03 A STX Exclusive format 1 received d 41H 02H 2024 data count designation 1st 604 8 625 43H 42H On 2nd R 12344 2096 12H 34H 3rd CR L OAH J 2027 Ath 3 Reception data read request Uter memory x83 Buffer memory FROMP H8 H258 DO KI Reads combinations of user frames r
188. Q series C24 3 The on off of the RS signal is controlled by the following conditions of the Q series C24 ON OFF control of the RS signal Performed when the OS area for reception data storage in the Q series C24 becomes 64 bytes default or less OFF ON control of the RS signal Performed when the OS area for reception data storage in the Q series C24 becomes 263 bytes default or more I Modem function error code storage area address 545 221 1 Stores the error code when an error occurs during the modem function or abnormal signal such as the initialization connection abnormal completion signal X13 turns on 2 See Section 10 2 of User s Manual Basic for the error codes m Modem function sequence status storage area address 546 222 1 The current status during use of the modem function is stored as a number 2 See Section 3 4 1 for storage values for the modem function sequence status when using the modem 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q n Number of data registrations for connection storage area address 547 Registration status of data for connection number 8 3000 Registration status of data for connection number BC7u 3015 Registration status of data for connection number 5 3029 Registration status of data for connection number BC8 3016 22 1 2 3H Stores in Flash ROM the number of registered data for connection used by the Q series C24 for t
189. Q series C24 including multidrop link stations connected to an external device is available for mode switching from the external device See the Reference Manual Section 3 13 It is not available for other Q series C24 stations connected over a network system POINT It is recommended to switch the mode on the PLC CPU side 3 Data communications after mode switching The Q series C24 requires approximately 400 ms as processing time of mode switching only While the mode switching is being executed the setting values cannot be stored into the buffer memory special applications area and data cannot be transmitted between the Q series C24 and the external device IK Approx 400 ms PES Mode switching processing Mode switching signal X6 XD 4 Linked operation mode switching Do not switch the mode when two interfaces of the Q series C24 are in linked operation Also do not switch the mode for linked operation 15 4 15 4 15 SWITCHING THE MODE AFTER STARTING MELSEC Q 15 3 I O Signals for Handshake with PLC CPU and Buffer Memory This section describes the I O signals for handshake and the buffer memories used when mode switching is performed 1 I O signals for handshake with PLC CPU signal Device turned ON OFF Signal name CPU C24 i y Complete REMARK The following signals can also be used as I O signals in addition to the above See Section 3 8 of User s Manual Basic for the
190. Q0V1 amp C1 amp D28H M0V 1 amp I0 amp R2 amp S0SO 1 TO HO H1B00 DO SET M2 MOV K80 FMOV KO 01 MOV MOV nnnnnnnnnn SMOV MOV HO MOV K1 MO TO HO H1B29 DO SET M31 SET SET Y10 X10 X13 Y10 X10 RST RST M81 M82 P8 K2Y80 FEND 01 02 010 K17 Mt RET K40 Di 02 07 011 012 K41 M2 RET Y10 M100 M3 K1 Y10 M32 RET MELSEC Q Convert the reset command of various requestb signal into pulse To the various request signal and the complete signal OFF subroutine Output the various complete flag status LED display Data registration processing for initialization subroutine Set the number of bytes of the registration data Set the user control data control number Set the initialization command Write the data for initialization Data No 80014 Registration to buffer memory Data registration complete flag for initialization is set Data registration processing for connection subroutine Set the number of bytes of the registration data Clear the data storage device for connection Set the pager receiver designation Notification is not executed Set the telephone number Set the space to the remainder of the telephone number designation area Set the rxternal line dialing number 0 Set the line type tone Write the data for connection Data No 8002 Registration to buff
191. QCPU stations Set in the QCPU station which is the entrance of the PLC system as viewed from the external device the local station QCPU in the diagram below Set in the local station to allow prohibit access to the network System 1 from the external device i i 1 Public line password password i Modem HH A Local station check Ethernet External device QCPU module Q series C24 access source Ethernet i L1 module station Ethernet station module module Relay Sce Ethernet Ethernet poe Ethernet Access LsebbSib E EE N E EE EE Not set in the relay station or access station ue cu ecc eee Os Tee Network System 1 5238 When set station other than the QCPU which is the entrance of the PLC system relay station or access station in the above diagram access to other stations beyond the set station is prohibited 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q 3 1 2 Function list The following describes the overview of the modem function Function Overview No Initializes the modem TA using the user designated initialization data AT command Auto Modem TA initialization initialization of the modem is possible Dials the partner telephone number according to the user designated conn
192. REE EXE EE ahe gt with arbitary PLC CPU Station 0 Station 1 v Station 2 Station 15 CPU C24 5 CPU 24 CPU C24 CPU C24 EI a gea eet eim C24 Q series C24 QC24 N UC24 4 External devices that communicated data with the PLC CPU or external devices that do not have to communicate data with the PLC CPU transmit the data for transferring the line usage right to the external device of the next station No A message structure example is shown in 5 When a response message see 5 is not received from the next external device to which the line usage right was passed data transmission for transferring the line usage right to the external device of the next station No is repeated until the line usage right is accepted 5 The external device that accepts the line usage right transmits a response message to the external device that passed it the line usage right Example Message of 4 above External device that transfers line usage right 1 destination station No Transmission c 2 P E E 9 c e E station No Command Sum check Message wait 1 Command ZZ is command for description purposes The user should select the command that transfers accepts the line usage right External device passed line usage right 1 c Q E 9 c destination 4 station No Transmission
193. SCII BIN conversion is disabled the Q series C24 transmits the data codes 03H 0 OAH ETX CR LF as the send data of the given user frame part If ASCII BIN conversion is enabled the Q series C24 converts each of the data above to 2 character ASCII code data and transmits Part that designated user frame No 3E8x Added by the Q series C24 When ASII BIN conversion disabled Data designated by sequence program rni XTRIF A B 12 to 89AB 41 428 31 320 AB 894 03H 100 10 Register data codes FFH 00H to FFH 2 byte data register part The Q series C24 transmission is based on the variable data corresponding to the combination of the register codes FFH and 00H to For example if sum check code is registered the Q series C24 will calculate and transmit the sum check code If the Q series C24 station No is registered the station No set in the Q series C24 is transmitted Example Register the data codes 03H FFH FOH ODH OAH as user frame No 3E9H When user frame No 3E9H is designated during data transmission the Q series C24 calculates the sum check code as the send data of the given user registration frame part If ASCII BIN conversion is disabled the Q series C24 transmits the calculated sum check code as the send data of that user frame part If ASCII BIN conversion is enabled the Q series C24 converts the calculated sum check code to 2 characters byte ASCII
194. SJ71QC24N R2 QU71C24N QJ71C24N R2 QU71C24N R4 QJ71C24 QJ71C24 R2 Serial communication modules QnA series Generic term abbreviation Other generic terms and abbreviations This manual uses the following generic terms and abbreviations to explain the data communication devices for the Q series C24 The names model names are provided when it is necessary to explicitly identify the model being discussed Description of generic term abbreviation Generic term for buffer memory of the intelligent function modules special function modules used for storing data sent to or received from the PLC CPU setting values monitor values etc Generic term for the external devices with which data can be sent received using the MC protocol or the bidirectional protocol Data communication functions Generic term for MC protocol non procedure protocol and bidirectional protocol GX Configurator SC Abbreviation for GX Configurator SC SWOD5C QSCU E or later Initial settings for the module monitoring and testing can be performed without using a sequence program and without considering I O signals or buffer memory Intelligent function utility Converting sequence programs necessary for data communication processing into FB can shorten program production man hours In addition the monitoring and analysis of the transmitted received data by the communication network can shorten the sys
195. ST x27 RST RST RST REMARK M41 Yi M49 M3 M4 K1 Y11 M49 M3 M4 X10 Initialization complete signal X1E Ready signal X1F WDT error signal MO Accessible flag M1 Data registration complete flag for initialization M2 Data registration complete flag for connection See Section 3 4 4 M3 Initialization complete flag M40 Connectable flag Turns the ready flag ON Turns the line connectable flag ON See Section 3 4 3 See Section 3 4 4 Line connection command Sets connection request signals When the connection in progress signal ON normal completion sets the connection complete flag Reads the error code at connection abnormal completion Resets the flag with the clear command When the line connection is initiated from the partner device neither registration setting nor connection processing is necessary As shown in example 3 of this section s 3 data communication is possible if the connection in progress signal X12 turns ON after the completion of Q series C24 modem TA initialization For an example of the modem TA program for initialization see Section 3 4 7 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q 3 4 7 Data communication and notification This section explains the cautions for data communication with the partner device using modem function and procedures for notification to pager receivers 1 Requirements for data communicatio
196. Setting Method for Writing to the PLC CPU during RUN 2 6 Accessing Other Stations 2 7 Precautions on Data Communication 2 8 Time Chart and Communication Time of the Transmission Sequence of the Serial Communication Module 2 9 Transmission Time When Accessing Other Stations Via MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 2 10 Compatibility with Multiple CPU Systems 2 11 Compatibility with the QOOCPU Q01CPU Serial Communication Function 3 WHEN COMMUNICATING USING THE QnA COMPATIBLE 3E 3C AC FRAMES 3 1 Message Formats 3 2 List of Commands and Functions for the QnA Compatible 3E 3C AC Frames 3 3 Device Memory Read Write 3 4 Buffer Memory Read Write 3 5 Reading from and Writing to the Buffer Memory of an Intelligent Function Module 3 6 PLC CPU Status Control 3 7 Drive Memory Defragmentation for Other Station QnACPU 3 8 File Control 3 9 Registering Deleting and Reading User Frames for Serial Communication Modules 3 10 Global Function for Serial Communication Modules 3 11 Data Transmission to an External device On Demand Function for Serial Communication Modules 3 12 Initializing the Transmission Sequence for Serial Communication Modules 3 13 Mode Switching for Serial Communication Module SH 080008 E 3 14 Turning Off Displayed LEDs and Initializing Communication Error Information and Error Code for Serial Communication Module 3 15 Turning Off the COM ERR LED for Ethernet Modules 3 16 Loopback Test 3 17 Registering or Canceling PL
197. T instruction is being executed or has been completed normally abnormally can be checked with the completion device D2 designated by the setting data a Completion device D2 0 Turns on at the END processing of the scan where the CSET instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing b Completion device D2 1 Turns on and off depending on the completion status of the CSET instruction Normal completion Stays off and does not change Abnormal completion Turns on at the END processing of the scan where the CSET instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing Operation when the CSET instruction is being executed END END END Sequence program processing Scan processing processing CSET instruction Instruction execution Completion device Completion device 1 _ 3 Q series C24 Setting processing 17 13 17 13 17 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q Errors 1 When the dedicated instruction is completed abnormally the error flag SMO turns on and the error code is stored in SDO See the following manuals regarding the error code and check the errors and take corrective actions Error codes 4FFFuH less QCPU Mode User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 7000 or higher Section 10 2 of the User s Manual Basic Program example A program that changes the transmission buffer area for interface on
198. TTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTT es ee geg 5 S 2 gg 5 g 3 3 FH 3 E HE 55 8 8 go Ey 8 8 ao 53 8 E t 28 3 3 5 25 a E a a 2 3 p 5 L H L H LEH L H LIH L Ep ob t 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 o o 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 9 1 0 0 0 2 0 0 e 3 M 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 T3 0 i i i 57 2 1 34H 30H 30H 30 30H 130H 30H 30H 31 130 2 30H 338 2AH 30H 30H 30H 30 30 1 30H 31 31H i w100 w101 w102 w103 I T 1 1 3 0 olol MMMMMMMMMMMMMMMM 1111110000000000 543210887868543210 2 18 2 18 2 USING THE PLC CPU MONITORING FUNCTION MELSEC Q 3 Notification to the interface side using the modem function a The notification message text string data contained in the user registered data for connecting the modem function is conveyed using the modem function The device information and the CPU status information read from the PLC CPU are not sent to the external device in the notification message Include the device information and the CPU status information by which the PLC CPU status can be checked in the preregistered notification message b The method for message notification is functionally the same as the notification using the modem function described in Chapter 3 The di
199. This diagram is for when word i completion units are used s gt scan 2 Data length 600 00H 4 gt D3 00H 04 GOTH 12 010 12 6024 Bo sa DII Bch Data section n gt 6031 Fo DEn 012 Fo pp 04 013 Buffer memory Sequence program Reception data read request device memory X83 MOVP KI Di Sets CH1 to the reception channel Move K6 D4 Sets the allowable number of receive data to 6 G BIDIN DI D10 MO Executes reception SET M100 Sets the normal completion flag 1 101 Sets the abnormal completion flag When the receive transparent code designation is set to Enable and ASCII BIN conversion is set to Enable the codes of receivable arbitrary data sections and the codes of receive data that is stored in the reception area of the buffer memory are as follows ree U Receivable codes Codes stored in the reception area Sections for which the Additional reception transparent OTH to FFH Delete code designation is Transparent enabled code 30H to 39H to 9H Data length data section 41 0 408 Aitor 13 13 13 13 13 COMMUNICATING WITH ASCII CODE ASCII BIN CONVERSION MELSEC Q 13 6 2 Example of data transmission The following shows an example of data transmission when ASCII BIN conversion is enabled When the send transparent code designation is set to Enable and ASCII BIN conversion is set to Enable Additio
200. U LJ LJ i Y Q series C24 Response message ready to receive data state Timer 0 monitoring time i Timer 0 elapsed time reset rimer 1 monitoring time Timer 2 monitoring time H W gate OFF time Message wait time Timer 2 elapsed time reset Timer 1 elapsed time reset 6 CHANGING THE DATA COMMUNICATIONS MONITORING TIMES MELSEC Q 6 1 No Reception Monitoring Time timer 0 Setting The no reception monitoring time timer 0 is the time for clearing the series C24 state when the Q series C24 was placed into the data receive wait state by trouble in the external device The Q series C24 monitors the reception interval in byte units at the start of data reception from the external device and ends monitoring when the preset last data is received and repeats this operation The following explains the no reception monitoring time timer 0 operation 4 1 byte External device Data 1 2 Data 1 Data wei Data receive interval M depends on the transmission rate etc Monitoring time E Elapsed time reset When changing the no reception monitoring time timer default value by the sequence program and checking timer O with the new value at the Q series C24 after changing the default value switch the mode as described in Chapter 15 1 Q series C24 operation by no reception
201. U agrees with conditions set by the user Condition agreement transmission b The PLC CPU monitoring function can be used in communication using MC protocol or non procedure protocol c Using the PLC CPU monitoring function makes it possible to do the following Sends device data without using a sequence program Simplifies the device monitor procedure Sends CPU module error information MELSEC Q25HCPU mcn O Foren wende External device REI iz ae PI CPU error Monitoring information device information C3 p XL s E Abnormal detection RS 232 gt MITSUBISHI Error occurrence 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 2 Communicating with the external device at a remote location via a modem detailed explanation in Chapter 3 1 Connecting a modem or TA terminal adapter to the RS 232 interface facilitates communication via a public line private line digital line ISDN such as data communication with a device at a remote location listed below and calling a pager device Data communication using the MC protocol Data sending and receiving using the non procedure protocol Data communication using the bidirectional protocol PLC access using the GX Developer 2 Initialization of a modem or TA line connection dialing and line disconnection are performed by the PLC C
202. USING DC CODE TRANSMISSION CONTROL MELSEC Q If the user data received from the external device includes the relevant DC code when DC1 DC3 reception control and DC2 DCA reception control are used the Q series C24 uses the corresponding DC code control If the user data transmitted from the PLC CPU includes a DC code it is sent unchanged 6 Handling of DTR and DSR signals when DTR DSR control is not used When the DTR DSR control function is not used the Q series C24 handles the DTR and DSR signals as described below 1 Leaves the DTR signal ON 2 Ignores the DSR signal ON OFF state 8 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING HALF DUPLEX COMMUNICATIONS MELSEC Q 8 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING HALF DUPLEX COMMUNICATIONS For data communications between the Q series C24 and an external device using the RS 232 interface it is set so that the Q series C24 and the external device do not transmit data at the same time The QJ71C24 N R2 can be set for each interface When the Q series C24 is started full duplex communications is set The user can change the communications method to match the specifications of the external device Since half duplex communications does not have to be set in the following cases you do not have to read this section 1 When data is only transmitted or receive during non procedure protocol data communications 2 When it is designated in the external device that no data transmission is performed from the
203. W103 4 points Number of registered bit blocks 1 MO to M15 1 point When the condition satisfied monitoring device is W100 0 and MO ON When ASCII BIN conversion is not performed The total number of bytes the device data section is the number of device points X 2 When the word byte unit designation is byte For W100 to W103 block data For MO to M15 block data 1 LT TT T T 7 o pa o 520 2 8 28 E B 35 3 co 90 o co 2 2a 2 28 c o Es c Es 5 5 gt E gt 20 gt 5 o6 25 a 8 2 t a 2 A t a E 5 D gt 1 L 4H L HL H L H L HL H E L 1 1 1 M 1 i i 1 1 i i 004 1 OOH 4 4 0 00H 00 1 OOH 02 0 0 004 OOH 904 014 00H 304 114 W100 W101 W102 W103 When the word byte unit designation is word For W100 to W103 block data For MO to M15 block data LT TT TT o o So 5 8 Be 22 8 co o co o 2a 2 O Es c Es I 360 gt 5 36 gt 5 o 25 a 8 2 a E B t a 1 5 2 gt gt 1 i 1 LH E H H Lik LiH LIH L Le 2 H L L 1 1 1 1 1 w 1 i i i 1 I 1 0 014 00H 4 4 00 0 OOH 00s 0141 OOH
204. X 2 When the word byte unit designation is byte When the word byte unit designation is word TT TT e 88 2 g e 88 s2 g 8 23 55 8 8 23 55 5 2 g Jes 8 8 2 JES 8 8 z2 5 29 8 a E a a z E a 3 p E L H L L L O1H 00nj00n OOH 01H 00H 01H OOH O1H 00n 00n OOH 01H OOH OOH 01H When ASCII BIN conversion is performed The total number of bytes for the device data section is the number of device points X 4 When the word byte unit designation is byte When the word byte unit designation is word TT TT 1 T Farsi 52 8 8 52 E 8 2 56 p 8 2 56 8 p Ex 8 p Es S 8 5 z 3 8 5 2 5 a z E a a z E a 2 2 gu oe bs Hrs mE E Q 0 0 0 0 0 0 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 31H 30H 31H 30H 3 When user frame No B080u is designated The transmission block count will be sent as follows Example Number of registered word blocks 2 DO to D3 4 points W100 to W 107 8 points Number of registered bit blocks 1 MO to M31 2 points When ASCII BIN conversion is not performed When ASCII BIN conversion is performed word blocks bit blocks CPU abnormal monitoring Number of registered 2 n o 2 dd 2 E E z Number of registered word blocks Number of registered bit blocks CPU abnormal monitoring 02H 01
205. X i 6B External device NM i EU ERO Ecos w tam The figure shown below is for word units 02451420H OAH BBH30431H32433H02H4 1442443341 2H0DHOAHO3H EEH 1 1 n jii M Y A Y NEA User frame use control 7 designation First frame Arbitrary data area Last frame PLC CPU corresponds to register No 8 corresponds to register AEn First frame No designation 3E8H 151 41 9 2 2 en B3H None 0 2 0 0 Reception data X83 read request 1 Last frame No designation Completion device MO oN 7 J Abnormal g completion device at completion Nomal 3rd 1 scan ie 1 YES NO Receive transparent 1002u code designation Each 1st designated frame i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i completion t i i 1 1 i i i i i 1 i i i i i i i i 121 Disable ASCII BIN conversion User frame receive designation 20204 format designation 25Bu mo Receive user frame to DO 1st Format 0 1 C th 2021 6008 mw Receive data count 3 to D3 i 0 2nd Format 0 O0H 06H 1 0 Receive data 601 arbitrary data 202 1 3rd Format 1 3t
206. a a One byte of register code 01H to FEH data This is the register code for transmitting and receiving the register code 01H to FEH data b Two bytes of register code FFH 00H to FFH FFH data This is the register code for transmitting and receiving the variable data Sum check code Q series C24 station No etc shown in 4 as part of the user frame is the register code of the first byte for handling variable data 4 Variable data Variable data is the generic term for the following data These variable data can be handled as part of a user frame Sum check code whose objective is an arbitrary range in the transmit and receive messages Horizontal parity code whose objective is a determined range in the transmit and receive messages Two s complement sum check code whose objective is a determined range in the transmit and receive messages Q series C24 station No One byte data in data transmission NULL Code 00H One byte of arbitrary data in data reception Used to handle an arbitrary byte of data as part of the user frame during receiving check by the Q series C24 a Variable data designation method Variable data is designated by combining write code FFH and the data codes shown in the table below The sum check code Q series C24 station No and other variable data can be handled according to FFH of the first byte and 00H to FFH of the second byte e Bite ieee 1004 to F
207. a the reception data count will be 0 when a read request is performed to the PLC CPU 5 The received data count initially set in the Q series C24 uses the default value 6 The Q series C24 performs the following processing with respect to the reception data that is the same as the receive complete code initially set in the Q series C24 When included in the last frame Reception is not processed via the receive complete code Example By registering CR LF as the last frame a read request is performed to the PLC CPU when the end of the reception data receives a message of CR LF Last frame ACK CR LF v Reception start timing Receive complete timing Stored in the reception area read timing The received data count is Handling of the Q series C24 receive data 1 When an user frame first frame last frame of a code registered in the Q series C24 is received receive processing by user frame is performed 2 Ofthe first frame No and last frame No maximum 4 sets initialized by the user at the buffer memory receive user frame designation area the set No Cth of the user frame received from the external device is stored to the receive user frame storage area If receive transparent code is designated the data of the additional code included in the arbitrary data area is removed immediately after reception before conversion when the receive data is converted from ASCII code to bin
208. abled by notification DTR signal is ON Transmission control end free area 263 to 4096 Default 263 Receive data clear described in Section 6 1 4 of User s Manual Basic clears the OS area simultaneously with clearing of the receive data storage area If more data is received when the OS area mentioned above are 0 bytes an SIO error is generated and the data received until the OS area becomes vacant is ignored At this time the SIO signal is turned on See User s Manual Basic Section 10 1 1 2 Q series C24 DSR control The Q series C24 uses the DSR signal to detect whether or not the external device is ready to receive data and to control data transmission to the external device as shown below depending on whether the DSR is on off 1 Ifthe DSR signal is ON and there is send data the series C24 transmits it to the external device 2 Ifthe DSR signal is OFF even if there is send data the Q series C24 does not transmit it to the external device When the DSR signal is turned on the Q series C24 transmits the send data to the external device 7 3 7 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING DC CODE TRANSMISSION CONTROL MELSEC Q 7 2 Control Contents of DC Code Control This control uses the Q series C24 transmission control data to inform the external device whether or not local station is ready to receive data and the valid range of the send and receive data The four kinds of Q series C24 DC code control shown below are
209. ackage Installing and Uninstalling Utility Package Explanation of Utility Package Operation System Registration to Flash ROM Auto Refresh Setting Monitor Test Non Procedure Protocol Receive Data Clear 9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Dedicated Instruction List ONDEMAND Instruction OUTPUT Instruction INPUT Instruction BIDOUT Instruction BIDIN Instruction SPBUSY Instruction CSET Receive data clear 10 TROUBLESHOOTING 10 1 Checking the Status of the Serial Communication Module 10 2 Error Code Tables 10 3 Troubleshooting by Symptom APPENDIX Appendix 1 Functional Improvements of the Q Series C24 Appendix 2 QnA A Series Module Appendix 3 Processing Time Appendix 4 ASCII Code Table Appendix 5 External Dimensions Appendix 6 Example of Connection when a Converter is Used Appendix 7 Communication Support Tool MX Component Appendix 8 Example of Clear Process Program for Receive Data Appendix 9 Setting Value Recording Sheet 11 Related Manual 2 Corresponding MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual 1 OVERVIEW 1 1 Overview of the MELSEC Communication Protocol 1 2 Features of the MELSEC Communication Protocol 2 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE MELSEC COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL 2 1 Types and Applications of Data Communication Frames 2 2 Accessible Range of Each Data Communication Frames 2 3 How to Read the Control Procedures of the MC Protocol 2 4 Access Timing of the PLC CPU Side 2 5
210. address 8 O to 100 CH1 side 158 0 to 100 CH2 side L 0 No designation 1 Send from the first to to 100 Send from the 100th Transmission using a user frame cannot be performed when the value of the output head pointer designation area is O 11 35 11 35 11 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING USER FRAMES MELSEC Q 4 Output count designation area addresses 9 159 Write the output count of the user frames to be sent from the position desingnate in the output head pointer designation area b15 to bO Buffer memory address 9 O to 100 CH1 side 159 0 to 100 CH2 side 0 No designation 1 Transmit 1 frame to to 100 Transmit 100 frames The operation is completed normally without data transmission if the value for the output count designation area is 5 Output frame No designation area addresses BAH to 11DH 15AH to 1 Write the user frame No to be sent in the order in which they are output from the position designated in the output head pointer designation area When sending data that is written in the transmission area use 8000 as a temporary user frame number By designating user frame number 8000 the series C24 transmits the data of the transmission data designation area for the data count designated in the transmission data count designation area s Buffer memory address to 801Fu 1st to to r CH1 side 110 to 801
211. adecimal However if this is done by either MC protocol communication form 1 to 4 or non procedure protocol communication when ASCII BIN conversion of the communication data has been designated the head device No for all devices to be sent to external devices as the monitoring results will be converted to hexadecimal ASCII data and sent h Monitoring condition When condition agreement transmission is designated with the PLC CPU monitoring function c designate the conditions for transmitting information for the monitoring condition value i Monitoring condition value When condition agreement transmission is designated with the PLC CPU monitoring function c this item designates the status numeric value of the monitoring condition h When the monitoring device is a word device Designate the monitoring condition value with a numeric value When the monitoring device is a bit device Designate the monitoring condition with a numeric value 1 0 corresponding to ON OFF 2 USING THE PLC CPU MONITORING FUNCTION PLC CPU monitoring function Condition agreement PLC CPU monitoring transmission measure Data transmission Number of registered word blocks Number of registered bit blocks a 4 PLC CPU abnormal monitoring zum MERE than those listed Io 1 block monitoring device Monitoring device at left are not Head device No required Read point Output count Output frame No Output frame No O
212. ag M51 te Er ONDEMAND uo 00 010 MO Executes on demand transmission MO M1 SET M100 Normal completion M1 a sET M101 Abnormal completion Resets the transmission preparation RST M51 N completion flag 1 The SPBUSY instruction can be used to read the communication status by the dedicated instruction 2 For details on the dedicated instructions see Chapter 9 of User s Manual Basic 3 Designate the storage capacity for transmission data stored in D10 to D11 in the above program example and data length stored in D2 in the above program example so that they do not exceed the range of buffer memory assigned by the user for the on demand function 10 9 10 9 11 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING USER FRAMES MELSEC Q 11 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING USER FRAMES 11 1 Registering the fixed format portion of the message transmitted received by the opposite device and the Q series C24 as a user frame beforehand allows data transmission reception using a user frame The use of the user frame to perform data transmission reception facilitates the creation of transmission data on the PLC CPU side and a simplified sequence program for checking the reception data This Chapter explains the data transmission reception method and procedure when performing data communication with the Q series C24 non procedure protocol using a user frame User frame Data transmission Arbitrary data ES
213. allback function a Callback function designation area Address 8193 2001 1 1 f communications are done by connecting to the GX Developer via a modem specify whether the callback function is to be used or not Also specify the callback operation in the case that the callback function is used 2 This specification becomes valid if Connection is entered in the GX Developer connection designation area Address 54 36h 3 Show the setting value the value stored in this area in the GX Configurator SC and show the corresponding Q Series C24 s callback operation This becomes invalid if any setting values other than those shown below are specified and the callback function does not operate When the callback function is not to be used Auto When the callback function is to be used Setting 1 9 to setting 6 7H Setting 1 9H Auto Callback connection during fixed Setting 2 BH Auto Callback connection during designation number Setting 3 FH Auto Callback connection during max designation number is 10 Setting 4 1H Callback connection during fixed Setting 5 3H Callback connection during designation number Setting 6 7H Callback connection during max designation number is 10 b Callback denial notification accumulated count designation area Address 8194 2002 1 2 Use 0 to FFFFH to designate the accumulated count that will be the notification timing to the QCPU when
214. am below After executing registration write the Q series C24 transmits the designated data in the designated order upon execution of the PRR instruction 11 33 11 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING USER FRAMES MELSEC Q Example Sending data in the following sequence Sending Contents of sent registered Transmission data type User frame No sequence data 1 When sending data that was written to the transmission area 8000 is used as a temporary user frame number Refer to b 5 1 User frame 2 2 02 5 User frame 3E82H 1000 00H 3BH station No oa RE E ODs OAH 4 User frame 400u 1024 ETX Sum check CR LF Address Buffer memory Transmission user frame designation area 0 or the following frame designation No User frame being transmitted designation No area B7u 0 eeeeeCR LF output designation area B8u 1 seeeeOutput head pointer designation area 9 4 eeeeeOutput head pointer designation area 2 1st 8 2nd To the BCu 80004 3rd 1 oues taadaa external device _ 4004 4th nares 5th 6th Transmission area 400 20r4 Transmission data count word unit byte unit 401 42HB 41 4029 44 D 430 Transmission data When the ASCII BIN conversion is not performed User frame User frame Arbitrary data User frame Figure at left i
215. ame No using the following method Specify the number obtained by adding 4000H to the registered user frame No b15b14b13 to b0 Number of frames 0 Conversion enabled 1 Conversion disabled 0 Frame registered in Flash ROM 1 Frame registered in buffer memory When sending data in the sections designated in 4001 to 44AFH to the additional codes by transmission transparent code designation will not be added See Section 12 3 Designated No when transmitting without User frame No to be sent ASCII BIN conversion 1H to 3E7H 1 to 999 4001 to 43 7 _ 16385 to 17383 8 to 4AFH 1000to 1199 43 8 44 _ 17384 17583 8000 to 801 32768to 32737 000 to 1 16384 16353 2 The processing steps taken by the series C24 when communicating with ASCII BIN conversion and transparent code designation enabled are explained in Section 12 3 Transmission reception in arbitrary formats Transmission reception using user frames 13 3 13 3 13 COMMUNICATING WITH ASCII CODE ASCII BIN CONVERSION MELSEC Q 13 4 Example of Data Communication Using the Non Procedure Protocol This section shows examples of data communication using the non procedure protocol when the following settings registrations are made 1 Settings via GX Developer Perform the following settings on the Intelligent function module switch setting Screen See Section
216. ample of data reception The following shows an example of storing receive data in the data register 1 When the receive transparent code designation is set to Enable and the ASCII BIN conversion is set to Disable Additional code 10H DLE transparent code 02 STX Additional code the Q series C24 deletes ie Transparent code Data T T T T T T T T S ni E N length Data section check External device side Q 00044 p 1 CL code De AA 1102 B 1234jR FLL 5 4 00 0 02 11 1 42 34 12 7 00 Reception data read X83 request Data length receive data count Excluding additional codes PLC CPU For word unit 00044 2 Completion device ON SAB normal k MES A completion The following diagram is for word unit Status display device M1 Y at completion Normal completion Data length 9 6004 9 08 One scan 11024 11024 601 D10 H 18 028 11H 02H B A B A Aegan 6024 41 DIT 41 5034 12344 1 1234 12H 34H 12H 34H LF CR LF CR 6041 013 Buffer memory Sequence program device memory Reception data read request WOVP KI Di Sets CH1 to the reception channel Sets the allowable number of P receive data to 6 G BIDIN us DI D10 Executes recept
217. ansmission execution by the PRR instruction PRR instruction T 1 Completion OFF i device EUM Abnormal i completion Status display OFF i device at completion 1 1 v Normal completion 1 When the dedicated instruction is completed with an error the status display device at completion D 1 turns on and the error code is stored in the control data transmission result S1 1 See the following manuals regarding the error code and check the errors and take corrective actions Error codes 4FFFH or less QCPU Mode User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 7000 or higher Section 10 2 of the User s Manual Basic 17 19 17 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q Program example A program that sends arbitrary data and the first to fifth user frames registered in the output frame setting When the input output signals of the Q series C24 are X Y80 to X Y9F Transmission instruction X50 PLs N50 M50 X9E X9F 00 H1234 Di Sets arbitrary transmission data H56AB D2 DO K3 Sets the number of transmitted data H3F2 D5 Sets the transmission user frames in D5 to D9 H3F3 06 H8001 D7 H8000 D8 H41B D9 HO D10 D5 K6 Sets output frame No in the buffer memory M50 1 K1 D11 Sets CH1 to the transmission channel wov 012 Clears the device which t
218. ansmission data for transmission buffer GP PRR_U8 D1 MO Executes user frame transmission 9 sET M100 Sets normal completion flag M101 Sets abnormal completion flag 13 9 13 9 13 COMMUNICATING WITH ASCII CODE ASCII BIN CONVERSION MELSEC Q 13 5 Performing ASCII BIN Conversion for Data Communicated Via the Bidirectional Protocol This section explains the ASCII BIN conversion of data to be communicated using the bidirectional protocol 1 The following shows the range of transmission reception data for which ASCII BIN conversion can be performed Applicable data range at transmission reception ee 7 1 Arbitrary data section Message at data transmission 1 i Sum check code reception length Data section Applicable data range at transmission reception Wc A Response message c A gt z Error code K When sending or receiving data the Q series C24 processes data as follows 1 Range of ASCII BIN conversion The Q series C24 performs the ASCII BIN conversion for any data section data length and data section and error code in a message 2 Conversion of data length At transmission The Q series C24 converts a transmission data count to 4 digit ASCII code data hexadecimal then sends it beginning with the lowest byte L At reception The Q series C24 converts a received data length 4 digit ASCII code data hexadecimal to 2 b
219. ant OS area Vacant area 64 bytes default or less OFF Vacant area 263 bytes default or more ON ON ON DTR signal 9H ON Ready to receive OFF Not ready to receive ti P ORIG ic Q series C24 Q series C24 OS area OS area Data storage 8448 Data storage 8448 bytes bytes 64 bytes Vacant area 263 bytes Vacant area arises armors default default p read complete from sequence program 7 2 7 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING DC CODE TRANSMISSION MELSEC Q CONTROL b Specification of free OS area The limit of free OS area for data reception under the DTR DSR ER DR signal control is specified in GX Configurator SC s Transmission control and others system setting See User s Manual Basic Section 8 4 5 When it reaches the limit this status is notified to disable data reception The set values must satisfy the following condition Transmission control start free area Transmission control end free area 1 Transmission control start free area specification Address 2012 2112 Specifies an available capacity in the OS area so that the full status is notified to disable the data reception DTR signal is OFF Transmission control start free area 64 to 4095 Default 64 2 Transmission control end free area specification Address 2013 2113 Specifies an available capacity in the OS area so that data reception is en
220. anual See the diagram in the application Basic User fi ive fe t S EN ACTUS UI UNE Format 0 Format 1 2020 to 2023 example designation Exclusive ormat received data to 2024u to 20274 count designation 1 This program example gives the registered contents of the user frame No specified as the first frame No and the last frame No When receiving with a combination that specifies the first frame User frame No 3E8x Registered code 02h 51 20H Registered data contents STX Q SP External device station No First frame No 9 02 41 STXA 6H 064 ACK 154 154 NAK 41 03 FOH ETX Sum check code none Last frame No 11 22 none 11 22 11 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING USER FRAMES MELSEC Q a When receiving with a combination of the first frame arbitrary data and last frame reception using Format O Additional code Removed by Q series C24 Transparent code When STX handled n s as transparent code E X 0H02H Receive data count Word units Receive byte count excluding frame and additional code 12 2 6 Head data o Byte units Si 1 iS 1 iC Li Ei x i s Receive byte count excluding frame and TQ Bz 110 112 i 1 Bo additional code 12 135 1 1
221. ary code 11 8 11 8 11 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING USER FRAMES MELSEC Q The following shows the difference in how reception data for each reception method Format 0 and Format 1 is treated when data is received using the combination of first frame arbitrary data 1 When data is received using Format 0 combination 1 C 1 The Q series C24 regards all arbitrary data after the first frame as valid data and stores it sequentially in the reception area 2 Aread request is performed to the PLC CPU each time arbitrary data equaling the received data count is received and this process is repeated Y vv Reception First f Arbit J dat data irst frame rbitrary data i re 4 gt lt gt Equaling the received Equaling the received 1 data count data count Y v Reception start timing Ignored Receive complete timing Stored in the Stored in the read timing reception area reception area 2 When data is received using Format 1 combination 1 D 1 E 1 After the first frame is received the Q series C24 regards all arbitrary data equaling exclusive format 1 received data count specified for the received first frame combination as valid data and stores it in the reception area It then performs a read request to the PLC CPU 2 After data equaling exclusive format 1 received data count is received any data until the next first frame will be ignored Data will not be stored in the reception area
222. ary number 11110110 Reversed then converted to a two s complement v E64 Converted to a hexadecimal ASCII code Y 6 464 364 9 CONTENTS AND REGISTRATION OF THE USER FRAMES FOR DATA COMMUNICATION MELSEC Q 5 Transmission reception data corresponding to register codes to 9 The sum check code that calculates the subject range for transmission reception data message is expressed as the binary code ASCII code data shown below then transmitted and received Data contents transmitted and received The lower 2 bytes of the calculated sum check code are transmitted FFH EEH or FFH F4H and received as 2 byte binary code data The lower byte of the calculated sum check code is transmitted and FFH FOH or FFH F6H 3 received as 1 byte binary code data FFH F1H or FFH F7H The lower byte of the calculated sum check code is converted to 2 digit ASCII code then transmitted and received FFH F3H or F9H The lower 4 bits of the calculated sum check code is converted to 1 digit ASCII code then transmitted and received An example of the contents arrangement of the transmission and reception of the sum check code is given below Example Arrangement of data transmitted and received one first frame and one last frame User frame Arbitrary data User frame first frame last frame User frame register code 024 01 3 034
223. assword is set will be indicated 2 Access processing Normal completion of the remote password unlock processing allows the specified station to be accessed Perform communication using MC protocol Perform on line operation when the GX Developer is connected 3 Access prohibition processing lock processing When the specified station access is completed the process for disconnecting the line for the modem function is performed in order to disable further access When line disconnection is completed the remote password lock processing is performed automatically 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q When accessing the local station QCPU When accessing other station QCPU A station x1 A station Modem Modem Modem ERE Remote 1 Paseo ERES 2p _ password 7 63 Local station Ethernet QCPU module Ethernet 1 Unlock and lock processing for the local station L1 remote password is possible Remote password unlock and lock processing for Ethernet the relay station and access station cannot be performed module ay station x2 Lock processing is performed when a line for the modem Ethernet function is disconnected o x3 Even if the Ethernet module that transmits a communication request to other Ethernet is set as a module subject to the remote password check unlock and lock processing is not nece
224. ata reception a message comprised of the first frame and arbitrary data can be received Adding the receive function For each combination of receiving user frame that the user has set any data Chapter ps x O x using user frames length can be specified for the arbitrary data 11 Setting the data length for the arbitrary data to 0 makes it possible to receive 1 byte only such as ACK NAK When executing data transmission using the following protocol it is possible to Multiple designations of send designate a maximum of 10 types of sending transparent codes for each Chapter interface x transparent codes 12 Non procedure protocol Bidirectional protocol Switching to the GX Devel pas d b ec This functions allows the GX Developer connection mode to be switched by Oo MED Nd S TH MET an external device or the PLC CPU 15 the mode Communication data This function allows the monitoring of communication data transmitted on the O monitoring function communication network of the Q series C24 and an external device 16 be used X Cannot be used 2 USING THE PLC CPU MONITORING FUNCTION MELSEC Q 2 USING THE PLC CPU MONITORING FUNCTION This chapter explains the PLC CPU monitoring function with which the Q series C24 monitors the PLC CPU based on the monitoring information reregistered by the user 2 1 Overview The following explains an overview of the PL
225. ata reception channel to CH1 Sets the data setting completion flag for reading the receive data Executes the receive data reading Receive data read execution flag is set Receive data normal completion Receive data abnormal completion Resets subroutine of various request signal and complete signal Various request signal is reset When any complete signal ON the modem disconnection request signal is set When the initialization complete signal OFF and the modem disconnection complete signal ON the request signal is reset When the relation various signal OFF the flag is reset 3 102 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q 3 5 3 Sample program for notification 3 103 Modem initialization and notification are executed by commands from the user Before executing this program perform the following settings changing the default values on the GX Configurator SC s Modem function system setting screen and register them in the Q series C24 Settings other than the items shown below are not required Settings on the GX Configurator SC s Modem function system setting registration Screen For more details see Section 8 4 4 of User s Manual Basic Setting item Setting value Modem connection channel designation CH1 Notification execution designation Perform notification No communication interval time destination 2 min Data for initialization designation
226. ata with the master station until data communications with the PLC CPU is necessary When data communications with the PLC CPU becomes necessary that slave station performs processing from step 1 When the master station itself wants to exchange data with the PLC CPU and a slave stations does not have the line usage right it transmits all external devices except PLC CPU a general report data and obtains the line usage right before communicating data with the PLC CPU After data communications with the PLC CPU is complete the master station transmits all external devices general report data to inform the slave stations that data communications with the PLC CPU is complete During this time the slave stations do not communicate data with the master station until master station data communications is complete Example 4 2 1 Station No for all external devices g amp sls8s 2 2 general report 9122 252 S S 08 2C ds ZX and ZY d 2 58 ommands an are commands External device of S 2 2 master station that 9 9 8 2 or description purposes obtained the line E 3 The user should select the command usage right 1 ol ar lol 02 when the master station communicates 3B 34 464 31 42 5A 58 30 30 37 data with slave stations 4 2 ees 9 e xo External device of 5551585 oO E 23 master station that 25285 2 9
227. ation in the Series C24 and make the line connection GX Developer Telephone No 2 Modem Callback ER reception waiting Callback data No 1 Telephone No 1 Callback data No 2 Telephone No 2 Line connection Callback data No 3 Telephone No 3 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q d If callback processing was not executed normally an error message screen is displayed on the GX Developer side Perform the processing operation reconnection operation etc corresponding to the displayed message The operating state on the Series C24 side can be confirmed by the following items in the GX Configurator SC monitor test screen GX Configurator SC Buffer memory Monitor item Description Monitor test screen address X10 Modem initialization completion X Y monitor test Section 3 3 5 X12 Connection in progress Modem function Modem function sequence status 222 Section 3 3 6 monitor test e Setthe settings related to the callback function in the following areas of the GX Developer Starting Procedure GX Developer Tools Options 1 Line callback cancel wait time Setting range 1 to 180 s Default 90 s This specifies the waiting time after sending a response to a callback request from the Q Series C24 until the line is disconnected from the GX Developer If the line is not d
228. ation procedure for the serial communication modules and one of the data communication functions for communicating any data between the PLC CPU and an opposite device Details are explained in Chapter 7 Independent operation A mode of interface operation to communicate data with external devices using a function specified in each communication protocol setting Two interfaces of serial communication modules do not interact Linked operation The operation mode of each of the two interfaces for a serial communication modules that are connected to external devices and linked to one another in order to communicate data to from the external devices The two interfaces communicate data using the identical data communication function MC protocol identical format or non procedure protocol and the identical transmission specifications Linked operation using the bidirectional protocol is not allowed MELSEC communication protocol MC protocol A communication procedure for the Q series serial communication modules or the Ethernet interface modules and a name of communication method for accessing to the PLC CPU from an external device This is called the MC protocol in this manual There are two communication methods one uses ASCII code data and the other uses binary code data Details are explained in the Reference Manual Message send function Printer function This function registers character data messages to be s
229. ations is impossible with half duplex data communications Data communications by command transmission from external device using an MC protocol excluding the format 3 and format 5 control procedure Data communications using the format 3 and format 5 control program and data transmission from sequence program using the on demand function cannot be performed 3 The data transmitted by one external device is received by all the other external devices including the external device that transmitted the data The send data from a PLC CPU is also received by all the external devices Therefore it may be necessary for devices that received data not addressed to them judged by station No in the message to ignore the receive data At the PLC CPU Q series C24 also ignores the receive data other than that addressed to it 4 Connect to multiple external devices and connect the terminating resistor as described in Section 4 4 2 of User s Manual Basic 14 1 14 1 14 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING EXTERNAL DEVICE AND PLC CPU M N CONFIGURATION MELSEC Q 5 When communicating data by using an m n system configuration designate the following station number at the Station No and Local station No items in the command message to be transmitted from an external device 1 When accessing the PLC CPU ME eee compatible 2C 3C 4C compatible 1C frame i Station No of Q series C24 to be passed through Station No described in Conte
230. available These control functions can be used simultaneously 1 DC1 DC3 transmission control DC1 DC3 reception control The Q series C24 informs the external device whether or not local station is ready to receive data by transmitting the DC1 and DC3 signals and checks whether or not the external device is ready to receive data by receiving the DC1 and DC3 signals DC1 Control data that informs the external device that the Q series C24 is ready to receive data DC3 Control data that informs the external device that the Q series C24 is not ready to receive data Example Terminate Restart Continue External device PLC CPU Terminate Restart Continue a Q Series C24 DC1 DC3 transmission control and free OS area specification The control is performed in the same as those described in Section 7 1 1 DTR control and the free OS area specification are the same as those described in Section 7 1 1 b The Q series C24 transmits DC1 or DC3 to the external device instead of turning the DTR signal on off For the DC1 and DC3 transmit timing replace DTR signal ON OFF as shown below DTR control DC1 DC3 transmission control signal OFF transmit Transmitted when the vacant OS area drops to 64 bytes default or less signal ON DC1 transmit Transmitted when the vacant OS area reaches 263 bytes default or more External device PLC CPU 7 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING D
231. ble setting TRES specification Setting modification OFF ON OFF ON OFF Disabled ON Enabled enable disable setting Transmission rate setting Set according to modem TA on local station 1 bps Station number setting 00 to 31 x1 When the first five digits of the serial No are 03042 or earlier the transmission speed cannot be set to 115200 bps for connection between the Q series C24 and the GX Developer via a modem This gives an example of the switch setting when the modem function is used to connect the GX Developer to the Q series C24 CH1 side and the PLC is accessed Perform the switch setting similar to this example also when performing data communication or notification See Section 4 5 2 of User s Manual Basic for more detail on switch setting Start procedure GX Developer parameters I O assignment setting Switch setting Setting example L Sot Type Modelname Switch 1 Switch 2 Switch 3 Switch 4 Switch 5 ee ee ey ey LO j PLC Pic Of 0 Intelli QJ71C24 R2 07E2 0005 0000 0000 0000 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION Bit Switch number Specified Description Setting value Position value bO OFF Operation setting Independent b1 ON Data bit 8 bits b2 OFF eu Parity bit No b3 OFF Aa Odd even parity Odd A transmission E Switch 1 b4 OFF s
232. bnormal completion 41BH 2nd ae device at M1 Y 2 E No designation comprenon Normal completion i o No designation 1 i 9 an scan Designate r 120 No designation Receive transparent i 1002 code designation i 121 Convert ASCII BIN conversion E 1 designation i 125B Receive user To DO 1 frame 7 th Number of data i 600 00H 03H received gt To D3 i Number of receive 601 arbitrary data section 2 01 besss D10 to D12 8024 BCH 603 H DEH Reception data read request X83 H8 25 DO K1 1 Reads combination of received user frames MOVP K1 D1 Sets CH1 to the reception channel MOVP K6 D4 1 Sets the allowable number of receive data to 6 G INPUT U8 D1 D10 Mo Executes reception MO M1 SET M100 1 Sets the normal completion flag M1 HR fet M101 1 Sets the abnormal completion flag 13 7 13 7 13 COMMUNICATING WITH ASCII CODE ASCII BIN CONVERSION MELSEC Q 13 4 2 Example of data transmission The following shows an example of data transmission 1 Example of arbitrary data transmission External device side Eight characters of data in the transmission area are sent in two characters per byte through ASCII BIN conversion Data transmission area arbitrary data section PLC CPU side 3 4
233. broutine resetting various request signals and completion signals Various request signals are reset When any completion signal is ON the modem disconnection request signal is set When the initialization complete signal is OFF and the modem disconnection completion signal is ON the request signal is reset When the related signals are OFF the flag is reset 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q 2 Sample program on the connection reception station side The modem initialization and data communication by the non procedure protocol are executed by commands from the user Before executing this program perform the following settings changing the default values on the GX Configurator SC s Modem function system setting screen and register them in the Q series C24 Settings other than the items shown below are not required Settings on the GX Configurator SC s Modem function system setting registration screen For more details see Section 8 4 4 of User s Manual Basic Modem connection channel designation CH1 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MO M30 M50 M51 M31 K1M3 M7 M32 P3 M52 M53 P51 M55 M56 P8 SM400 K2Y80 3 100 MELSEC Q Accessible flag is turned ON Modem initialization enabled flag is turned ON Exchangeable flag with the partner station is turned ON Data transmission enabled flag to the pa
234. cannot be used b Precautions for selecting a modem 1 When using a cellular phone A modem with the error correction function of MNP class 10 is recommended However note that communication may not be established depending on the line condition 2 Modem setting Set the modem on the Q series C24 side as shown below Setting item Setting range Communication rate Depends on the modem in use 1 Hayes AT command SISO control Communication method No procedure Data bit Data format Stop bit Match the Q series C24 2 3 Parity bit x1 When using different modems the slower communication rate will be in effect 2 Some modems may transmit one character as 10 bits Check the modem specifications when setting the Q series C24 transmission specifications x3 Some modems may switch the communication rate following the start of data communication Since the Q series C24 cannot switch the communication rate set the modem side so that its communication rate does not switch When using a modem whose DR terminal signal is set by a switch set the DR terminal modem output switch level to high When using a modem whose DR terminal is set by a software write the command that turns on the DR terminal into the data for initialization Set the Modem initialization time DR signal valid invalid designation to Invalid during modem function system settings with GX Configurator SC 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION M
235. cation modules The model names of serial communication modules are used to identify the specific models Generic term abbreviation Description of generic term abbreviation Ethernet modules Abbreviations for Q series Ethernet interface modules QJ71E71 100 QJ71E71 B5 QJ71E71 B2 Q series E71 E71 Indicated as E71 in the diagrams Abbreviations for series serial communication modules QJ71C24N QJ71C24N R2 QJ71C24N Q series C24 C24 Y R4 QJ71C24 QJ71C24 R2 Indicated as C24 the diagrams Generic term for AJ71QC24 AJ71QC24 R2 AJ71QC24 R4 A1SJ71QC24 A1SJ71QC24 R2 Generic term for AJ71QC24N AJ71QC24N R2 AJ71QC24N R4 A1SJ71QC24N A1SJ71QC24N lacza Generic term for Generic term for QC24 QC2AN eee QC24N Kcu paa eti Si Q25HCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU lacpustation sid station Abbreviation for PLC installed Abbreviation for PLC installed QCPU Generic term for Q2ACPU Q2ACPU S1 Q2ASCPU Q2ASCPU S1 Q2ASHCPU Q2ASHCPU S1 Q3ACPU Q4ACPU Q4ARCPU QnACPU station Abbreviation for PLC installed QnACPU Q QnACPU Generic term for QCPU QnACPU UC24 Generic term for AJ71UC24 A1SJ71UC24 R2 A1SJ71UC24 R4 A1SJ71UC24 PRF A1SJ71C24 R2 A1SJ71C24 R4 A1SJ71C24 PRF A2CCPUC24 A2CCPUC24 PRF Computer link modules series computer link modules Generic term for the module below AJ71QC24 AJ71QC24 R2 AJ71QC24 R4 A1SJ71QC24 A1SJ71QC24 R2 AJ71QC24N AJ71QC24N R2 AJ71QC24N R4 A1SJ71QC24N A1
236. ce Abbreviation for Interface conforming to RS 422 and RS 485 Special function modules Generic term for the A QnA series PLC modules that are operated by commands from the PLC CPU equivalent to the Q series PLC intelligent function modules Examples CC Link interface module A D and D A conversion modules High speed counter module Ethernet interface module Computer link module and serial communication module Switch setting Generic term for intelligent function module switch setting User s manual Basic or Basic Q corresponding serial communication module user s manual Basic User s manual Application or Application Q corresponding serial communication module user s manual Application Definitions and Descriptions of Terminology The following table lists the definitions and descriptions of terminology used in this manual and related manuals for the Q series C24 Terminology Description A compatible 1C frame Formats 1 to 4 One of the message formats for the serial communication modules for performing communication using the MC protocol and ASCII code data This is the same message format as when communicating using the protocol for the A series computer link modules Device memory read write operations for the QCPU are allowed within the device range of the AnACPU Details are explained in Chapter 5 of the Reference Manual Bidirectional protocol A communic
237. ces storing the registered data that has been read Head bit device number of the local station that turns ON for one scan upon instruction completion D 1 also turns on if the execution completes abnormally The file registers of each of the local device and the program cannot be used as setting data Control data Setting data Setting range Set by Designate whether to register or delete the user frame having the number designated by S1 2 Register delete designation MR J S1 1 3 User Register 1 Delete 3 The registration deletion result by the PUTE instruction is stored Register delete result 0 Normal System Other than 0 Abnormal a T OO code 51 2 Designate the userframeNo the user frame No 1000 to 1199 S13 Registered byt t 1 to 80 Number of bytes of the user frame to be registered 1 080 U FUSISTSQUNISSIEOMR Designate 1 to 80 as dummy when deleting i 1 For information about errors caused by incorrect data designated by the user see the description in Errors 2 The Set by column indicates the following User Data set by the user before executing the dedicated instruction System The PLC CPU stores execution results of the dedicated instruction 17 21 17 21 17 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q Functions 1 This instruction registers or deletes the user frame for the Q series C24 as designated by Un 2 When
238. cessing occurs the line disconnect processing has the priority Data communication time The data transmission reception time after line connection has been established with the partner device is the total time of the transmission time between the Q series C24 and modem TA between modem and TA and between modem TA and partner device When communicating via the MC protocol the transmission time such as TO and T3 indicated in Chapter 2 of Reference Manual must include the transmission time between the Q series C24 side modem TA and the destination device 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION 6 MELSEC Q Initial Settings The connection data used for modem functions can be registered as follows using setting procedures Set the telephone number and message within the permissible number of registration characters for modem TA 1 If registered using GX Configurator SC Comments can be set to a maximum of 256 bytes These are not used for control Telephone numbers can be set to a maximum of 64 bytes Messages can be set to a maximum of 256 bytes 2 If registered from the PLC CPU sequence program Comments cannot be set Telephone numbers can be set to a maximum of 18 bytes Messages can be set to a maximum of 30 bytes PLC CPU monitoring function See Section 2 4 for precautions when transmitting monitoring results using the modem function Remote password check a How to unlock the remote password 1 When
239. ch SWITZERLAND GTS Dar laceze Cad No 43 Kat 2 TR 80270 Okmeydani Istanbul Phone 90 0 212 320 1640 Fax 90 0 212 320 1649 e mail gts turk net TURKEY CSC Automation Ltd UKRAINE 15 M Raskova St Fl 10 Office 1010 UA 02002 Kiev Phone 380 0 44 238 83 16 Fax 380 0 44 238 83 17 e mail csc aGcsc a kiev ua Electrotechnical RUSSIA Systems Siberia Shetinkina St 33 Office 116 RU 630088 Novosibirsk Phone 7 3832 22 03 05 Fax 7 3832 22 03 05 e mail infoGeltechsystems ru Elektrostyle ul Garschina 11 RU 140070 Moscow Phone 7 095 514 9316 Fax 7 095 514 9317 e mail infoGestl ru Elektrostyle Krasnij Prospekt 220 1 Office No 312 RU 630049 Novosibirsk Phone 7 3832 1066 18 Fax 7 3832 10 66 26 e mail infoGestl ru ICOS RUSSIA Industrial Computer Systems Zao Ryazanskij Prospekt 8a Office 100 RU 109428 Moscow Phone 7 095 232 0207 Fax 7 095 232 0327 e mail mail icos ru NPP Uralelektra ul Sverdlova 11a RU 620027 Ekaterinburg Phone 7 34 32 53 27 45 Fax 7 34 32 53 27 45 e mail elektra etel ru SSMP Rosgidromontazh Ltd 23 Lesoparkovaya Str RU 344041 Rostov On Don Phone 7 8632 36 00 22 Fax 7 8632 36 00 26 e mail STC Drive Technique RUSSIA ul Bajkalskaja 239 Office 2 23 RU 664075 Irkutsk Phone 7 3952 24 38 16 Fax 7 3952 23 02 98 e mail privodGirk ru STC Drive Technique Poslannikov Per 9
240. ch 2 setting protocol CH2 Transmission setting CH2 Communication rate setting ae Not used CH2 Communication protocol Switch 4 0000H setting Q series C24 station Switch 5 Station No setting 0000H number 2 Settings via GX Configurator SC Register the following on the Transmission control and others system setting screen and the Non procedure system settings screen See Sections 8 4 5 and 8 4 7 of User s Manual Basic For items other than those noted below the default values are used Setting item Setting value Send transparent code 1002 Transparent code 02H STX designation 1st combination amp Additional code 10H DLE Switch 3 Transmission control and other Transparent code 03H ETX system settings designation 2nd combination Additional code 10H DLE Transparent code 02H STX designation 1st combination Additional code 10H DLE ee O Non procedure system settings Received data count designation 0006 12 8 12 8 12 TRANSPARENT CODES AND ADDITIONAL CODES MELSEC Q 12 4 1 Example of data reception The following shows an example of storing receive data in the data register 1 Receiving based on the receive complete code Additional code 10H DLE transparent code 02H STX complete code ODOAH CR LF Additional code series C24 deletes Head data gi p Transparent code T c For word unit D S NI 0 1 f
241. code data Transmits and receives the two s complement sum check code in the calculation range udo LES Transmits and receives the sum check code in the calculation range 2 Transmits and receives the register code FFH data 1 byte 1 For usage of the register code there are restrictions on versions of the Q series C24 Refer to the User s Manual Basic Section 2 7 for how to check the version 2 During data communication using a user frame that handles the last frame the contents of the sum check code set in the transmission setting using the GX Developer switch setting will be ignored x3 Calculation ranges for the register codes Calculation range when receiving data User frame User frame User frame specified as specified as specified as specified as first frame Arbitrary data last frame thefirstone the second the third one fourth one EN S enu S Station E Sum A pag qr um T No 5 1 02289 5 6 7 8 Ti check x X d pog X code R F x MES X i i 1 bog MEME ME 02k 0 3 41 31 12 03 32 O14 00 02 0 3 41 319 12 35 36 37 8 03 02500 i 1 je YI ERU Dare i i a 1 1 1 i i gt Di gt i Calculation range
242. combinations of user frames received MOVP KI DI Sets the reception channel to CH1 K6 D4 Sets the allowable number of reception data to 6 G INPUT U8 D1 D10 Executes reception Mi SET M100 Sets the normal completion flag MI a E M101 Sets the abnormal completion flag Q series C24 Address Buffer memory ADH User frame use control designation Sequence program AEH 1st Sets the receive user frame Firstframe F 77707 itrati 5 3 1st set regitration No See Section 11 2 4 No designation 1 4th 2 1st i Last frame 2 4th set DO Receive user frame 5 4th m D1 D2 Data receive result 258 Data reception result D3 Receive data count c 25 Receive user frame 1 th set D10 Receive data oic eu ee 600 Receive data count storage i 601 e AI ES Receive area Dn to Receive data storage 7 2020 User frame receive Sequence program to format 1st set Sets the receive user Z gt 2023H designation frame registration No 2024 Exclusive See Section 11 2 4 is format 1 45 4th set received data ____________ _ 20274 count designation 11 21 11 21 11 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING USER FRAMES MELSEC Q 11 3 2 Application example for data reception using a comb
243. communication to QCPU 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q 2 Procedure when executing data communications dl indicates processing performed by the user Line Connection Side Q Series C24 Or Q Series C24 Modem Modem External Device Line connection wait side Perform the processing up to the point where the modem TA is Perform the processing up to the point where the modem TA is initialized by the procedure in 1 initialized by the procedure in 1 Modem initialization rua Modem initialization Line connection wait state Modem initialization completion signal X10 ON Modem initialization completion signal 10 Execute line connection Line Connection See Section 3 4 6 Line connection completed Connection request signal Y11 ON normally Connection in progress ares signal X12 ON Execute data communications Line connection completed normally Connection in progress signal 12 Execute data communications Remote password unlock processing See Section 3 3 3 and the Reference Manual Section 3 18 x If communications are carried out using an external device and the MC protocol when a remote password is set in the QCPU unlock processing with respect to the remote password is executed ata communications See Section 3 4 7 AU The line is disconnected after data communications are Lin
244. complete read and write the buffer memory special applications area shown below from the PLC CPU Switch setting error mode switching error storage area address 203u Data communications initialization setting areas addresses 93H to 121H 133H to 1C1H described in Section 3 9 of User s Manual Basic 4 After checking that mode switching was completed normally inform all the connected devices that data communications are possible and restart data communications 15 9 15 9 15 SWITCHING THE MODE AFTER STARTING MELSEC Q To check the Q series C24 mode communication protocol transmission specifications after switching read the buffer memory addresses 252H to 253 262 to 263 described in Section 10 1 5 of User s Manual Basic To check the external device read the buffer memory with the MC protocol buffer memory read function 15 5 2 Mode switching sample program The following shows a PLC CPU sample sequence program that switches the CH1 interface mode from an external device The series C24 I O signals X YOO to X Y1F FROM H203 02 Reads the mode switching error contents D2 Mode switching complete Changes the setting value of the communication protocol accoding to the communication specification Mode switching complete reset 15 10 15 10 16 USING COMMUNICATION DATA MONITORING FUNCTION MELSEC Q 16 USING COMMUNICATION DATA MONITORING FUNCTION The fo
245. correct operation s to change data program or the status may result in system malfunction machine damage or an accident Disposal Precautions N CAUTION e When disposing of this product treat it as industrial waste REVISIONS The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover Oct 2000 SH NA 080007 B Add the contents of the function version B Put Windows base software products together from Mitsubishi Programmable Logic Controller MELSEC series to Mitsubishi integrated FA software MELSOFT series Standardize the name from software package GPP function to product name GX Developer Correction Entire manual change MELSECNET 10H to MELSECNET H Contents About the Manuals About the Generic Terms and Abbreviations Section 1 1 1 2 POINT Section 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 3 2 2 5 2 2 6 2 3 1 2 3 2 Section 3 1 1 3 2 3 3 2 4 3 3 1 3 3 4 3 3 5 3 3 6 3 4 entire Section 4 3 Chapter 9 entire Chapter 11 entire Section 12 2 12 3 12 4 entire 12 6 entire Section 13 3 13 4 13 6 entire Section 15 3 Section 16 2 entire to 16 7 Addition Section 2 4 9 Section 3 2 3 POINT Jun 2001 SH NA 080007 C Standardize the name from utility package QSCU to product name GX Configurator SC Correction About the Manuals The Manual s Use and Structure About the Generic Terms and Abbreviations Program example Section 9 4 1 9 4 2 9 4 3 Section 11 5 1 2 Secti
246. cte 2 6 Transmission control 7 1 Transmission data arrangement On demand data 10 3 PLC CPU monitoring 2 12 Non procedure protocol 11 33 Transmission monitoring time timer 2 6 10 Transmission procedure User frames 11 32 Transmission program user frames 11 37 Transmission specification 3 12 Transparent 12 1 Index 2 U User frame arenend 9 1 User frame setting for reception 11 15 V Variable data User frame 9 2 IW Word bytes units setting 5 1 Index 2 WARRANTY Please confirm the following product warranty details before starting use 1 Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defects hereinafter Failure found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term the product shall be repaired at no cost via the dealer or Mitsubishi Service Company Note that if repairs are required at a site overseas on a detached island or remote place expenses to dispatch an engineer shall be charged for Gratis Warranty Term The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place Note that after manufactur
247. ction 3 4 2 Switch No Setting value Switch 1 07 2 Switch 2 0006 Switch 5 0000 b Settings by the GX Configurator SC See Section 3 4 2 Perform the following settings in each setting screen Use the default settings in screens and setting items other than those shown below 1 Modem function system settings Modem function system setting screen Dow Setting value setting items Modem connection channel designation Data for initlaization designation 07D5 Data No for connection designation OBB8 2 Modem connection data registration Data for modem connection screen NU Setting value setting items Data for modem connection Telephone 1 HOBB8 No 0123456789 1 Specify the external party s telephone No 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION Status confirmation XIE XIF he qo MO X10 X12 X13 Y10 11 M40 X10 X12 4 w M50 N92 lt Modem initialization line connection processing x21 fp__ e Mi MI MO 1 SET M2 M2 P Data transmission processing non procedure protocol t PLS M52 i SET M53 E quu P51 lt Data processing non procedure protocol SET M55 ppg P52 lt Line disconnect processing gt X23 Wn 12 f_ J RF M80 M71 M70 SET MELSEC Q Access possible Modem initialization line connection possible Data communications possible Data transmission possibl
248. ction to frame to transmit on demand data to an external device by user frame 10 4 1 Data communication using the ASCII code The following shows the control procedure when performing switch settings via GX Developer and registration via GX Configurator SC 1 Switch settings via GX Developer 1 Set the Communication protocol setting to any one of the MC protocol formats 1 to 4 2 Setthe Station number to 2 Registration via GX Configurator SC Register as follows when transmitting a user frame user selected transmission data 1 or a combination of user frames 1 User frame registration screen User frame User frame No 4 code 9 OOH 00H OOH Contents of user frame registration Ou O STX to host station No data code matched to QnA compatible 3C frame format 1 3EBH 1003 QnA compatible 3C frame format 401H 1025 03H F1H 1 corresponding ETX sum check code data code 2 Transmission control and others system setting screen MC protocol system setting screen Set the Word byte units designation to word units Setthe On demand user frame designation items to the following First frame No 1st 02H First frame No 2nd 3EBH Last frame No 1st 401H Last frame No 2nd No specification 1 Use the ONDEMAND instruction to designate the transmission data to two words 1234 5678 10 4 10 4 10 ON DEMAND DATA COMMUNICATIONS
249. d Request N CS Send possible 2 CD Receive Carrier The Q series C24 Detect etect ignores the receive data 1 3 gt RD Receive Data pale Data B 1 When transmit data check the RS signal If the RS signal is OFF turn on the CD signal If the RS signal is ON wait until it is turned OFF then turn ON the CD signal 2 Transmit data after the CD signal is turned ON 3 After data transmission is complete turn off the CD signal 4 Ifthe RS signal was turned ON during data transmission terminate data transmission and turn OFF the CD signal and perform data transmission processing Simultaneous transmission generated 5 After transmission from the Q series C24 is complete retransmit all the data terminated at step 4 1 Take the following measures between the communicating devices as a countermeasure against ignoring of the receive data by the Q series C24 Transmit and receive a response message in reply to data transmission Retransmit the data due to response message time out check or generation of a time out error external device side 8 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING HALF DUPLEX COMMUNICATIONS b When Q series C24 is designated non priority External device Data A MELSEC Q Continue data transmission Data B PLC CPU SD Send Data 1 RS Send Request CS Send Possible CD Receive
250. d above is how the Q series C24 processes communication data when enabling and disabling the ASCII BIN conversion function and or transparent code designation communication function When communicating data to an external device use this information as a reference in the selection of a communication method a Receiving 1 Ifa receive transparent code is designated the additional code designation data is deleted removed from the arbitrary data section 2 The arbitrary data section is stored in the reception area of the buffer memory If the ASCII BIN conversion is designated the data section is stored in the buffer memory after it is converted to binary code data 3 When the data section of the designated data length is received a receive data read is requested of the PLC CPU If the sum check code is set to Enable in the transmission setting via GX Developer switch settings a reception data read is requested of the PLC CPU upon reception of the sum check code External device Q series C24 Transparent code designation Sum check code setting ASCII BIN conversion designation No No No Data Arbitrary data section only reception 7 Deleting Deleting transmission Calculation and check of Yes c additional code control code ENQ Yes Yes Response transmission Buffer memory ASCII BIN conversion of data length data section Reception area Adding ASCIBINcomerson le Yog
251. d check i enabled after the unlock processing to a remote password set in the QCPU Oo x x is completed normally from the external device Communication using MC protocol Communication using the GX Developer Automatic initialization for Chapter 3 odam Initializes the modem automatically when Q Series C24 starts up O O After line connection from the GX Developer access to the QCPU from the Callback GX Developer is made possible through ine reconnection from the Q senes z x T C24 callback Transmission costs after line connection from the Q Series C24 side are borne by the Q Series C24 side Addition of non reception This function allows messages to be received in the non reception protocol by monitoring time format in non time out non reception monitoring time timer 0 if the received complete x x Chapter 6 procedure protocol code and received data count have been not determined um This function allows the designation of the available capacity of the OS area Transmission control start end i e arcardesianalion that notifies the data reception failure at the time of transmission control 7 DTR DSR signal control and DC code control The following codes can be registered as changeable data for user frames for Adding changeable user frame data communicaton Oo Y Chapter 9 data Horizontal parity code Sum check code of two s complement number When specifying the first frame and executing d
252. d trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries Adobe and Acrobat are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporation Pentium and Celeron are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Co Ltd in the United States Other company names and product names used in this document are trademarks or registered trademarks of respective Owners afa MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC HEADQUARTERS EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B V German Branch Gothaer Stra e 8 D 40880 Ratingen Phone 49 0 2102 486 0 Fax 49 0 2102 486 1120 e mail megfamail meg mee com EUROPE MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FRANCE EUROPE B V French Branch 25 Boulevard des Bouvets F 92741 Nanterre Cedex Phone 33 1 55 68 55 68 Fax 33 1 55 68 56 85 e mail factory automation framee com MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC IRELAND EUROPE B V Irish Branch Westgate Business Park Ballymount IRL Dublin 24 Phone 353 0 1 419 88 00 Fax 353 0 1 419 88 90 e mail sales info meir mee com MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ITALY EUROPE B V Italian Branch Via Paracelso 12 1 20041 Agrate Brianza MI Phone 39 039 6053 1 Fax 39 039 6053 312 e mail factory automation itmee com MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC SPAIN EUROPE B V Spanish Branch Carretera de Rub 76
253. d with the destination 2 Check the cause of the abnormal completion in the modem error code storage area address 221 and remove the cause 1 Indicates the initialization request to the modem connected to the local station Modem initialization series C24 request standby ME d rccte Section 3 4 5 2 Turn on the initialization request signal after designating the initialization data to the buffer memory when it is not set with GX Configurator SC 1 Indicates the connection request dialing to enable data communication with the destination 2 Turn on the connection request signal after designating the data for connection to Y11 Connection request the buffer memory when it is not set with GX Configurator SC Section 3 4 6 3 If the modem TA connected to the local station is not initialized the Q series C24 side modem is initialized as well prior to dialing according to the initialization data designated Indicates a line disconnection request from the partner side upon completion of data s Section 3 4 8 communication 1 Indicates the notification request to the partner side 2 Turns on before completing the series C24 side modem TA initialization is complete Section 3 4 7 3 Turns off the notification issued request signal after designating the data for connection in the buffer memory when it is not set with GX Configurator SC In the descriptions hereafter I O signal numbers between QCPU and ser
254. data not required number etc X 1FDO to Initialization Data code for the initialization command for 8144 to 8182 1FF6u command registration 3 The contents of the data to be written into the designated area that corresponds to registration numbers 8001H to 801FH are the same as those for the Flash ROM 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q 4 The following shows an example of a sequence program used to write the initialization data registration Example of writing the initialization data to the area having registration number 8001H X1E Q series C24 ready signal X1F WDT error signal XIE j Turns the ready flag ON n PLS M10 Data registration for initialization instruction M10 MOV K30 po 1 Sets the number of registration data bytes Sets the user control data control number MOV D1 Sets the AT command for initialization mov ATETQ0V18C18D28H D2 1 MOV 1 amp IO amp R2 amp SOSO 1 D10 Sets the AT command for initialization to the buffer memory HO H1B00 DO K17 SET M Sets the initialization completed flag Item name Data register Address Buffer memory Area for registration No 8001 Number of registration data bytes DO 30 User control data D1 1 Data for D2 initializati Mm nitialization Initialization initialization Initialization command to Bis command command 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q
255. ddress 2024 2124 Setting for the first combination i Setting for the second combination Exclusive format 1 Setting for the third combination received data count 20274 21274 Setting for the fourth combination Write to FFFFx 11 18 11 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING USER FRAMES 11 19 3 Examples of registering a receive user frame MELSEC Q The following are examples of pre registering a receive user frame on the CH1 side with the GX Configurator SC a When the first frame is specified In the example the following three combinations are registered for the receive user frame Setting conditions User frame receive Exclusive format 1 User frame Remarks format designation received data count 1st The received First frame last combina Format 0 data count frame tion becomes valid 2nd Exclusi xclusive combina First frame only Format 1 format 1 tion 6 received data 3rd count becomes combina First frame only Format 1 fi valid ion See Section 8 4 7 of User s Manual Basic for registration using the GX Configurator SC Setting value Setting item Setting value Remarks Received data count designation 1 For Format 0 Set to No receive Receive complete code designation complete code Always specify User frame use enable disable designation Enable
256. de User Head number of the devices that store control data FN Device name System Dummy Device name Head bit device number of the local station that turns ON for one scan upon instruction completion D2 1 also turns ON if the instruction execution completes abnormally The file registers of each of the local device and the program cannot be used as the setting data Control data 1 Registering the PLC CPU monitoring Setting data Setting range Set by S2 0 type Designate 0 o Ue Stores the result of execution upon completion of an instruction Completion status 0 Normal System Other than 0 Abnormal error code Designate the request content S2 2 Request type 2 Registers PLC CPU monitoring Designate the unit of cycle time S2 3 Cycle time units 0to2 0 100 ms 1 s 2 min Designate the cycle time User 1 to FFFFH 1 to FFFFu Cycle time Designate the monitoring function S2 4 Cycle time PLC CPU monitoring function 1 Constant cycle transmission 2 Condition agreement transmission 17 5 17 5 17 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q Setting data ion Designate the transmission measure PLC CPU monitoring f gt 52 6 ME 0 Data transmission device data CPU abnormal information 0 1 transmission measure SNP 1 Notification Designate the head pointer of the table setting the user frame numbers for constant cycle transmission User frame out
257. delete the current user frame and then reregister x3 Check the registration status of the user frame number from GX Configurator SC Devices that can register read delete user frames 2 Device that can register read delete Type User frame No PLC CPU External device GX Configurator SC Delete Default registration frame 1H to 7 x aE a O Z O User frame 8001 to 801 FROM TO User frame for PLC CPU monitoring function 9 CONTENTS AND REGISTRATION OF THE USER FRAMES FOR DATA COMMUNICATION MELSEC Q Conduct registering reading and deletion of the user frame from the sequence program when data communication is not being conducted with external device 3 Buffer memory to use Address Hexadecimal Processing Name Stored value X decimal Register Read 0 No request 1 Register request 2 Read request 3 Delete request 0 No frame No Frame No direction 1000 to 1199 3E8H to 4 Register read delete frame No 0 Normal completion One or higher Abnormal completion error code 0 Delete 1 to 80 1 to Register data byte count Register read delete direction Register read delete result storage Flash ROM access Write data byte count designation See 1 User frame See 2 Data code of frame to be registered deleted Number of registered user 0 Not registered to Flash ROM 2044 516 fins eid 1 to 200 1H to C8H Number register
258. device monitoring register the monitoring condition value or status when the Q series C24 judges that the numeric value status of the monitoring device for condition agreement transmission head device of each block agrees with the condition using the registration values shown below Monitoring condition value or Type of monitoring device stotis Registration value u _ 00004 Bit device 0001H 0000H to FFFFH Example 1 When ON is the condition agreement Monitoring condition registration value 0001H Registration value for the monitoring condition value or status 0001H Example 2 When DO gt 100 signed is the condition agreement Monitoring condition registration value 000 Registration value for the monitoring condition value or status 100 64 In status monitoring for the PLC CPU the monitoring conditions and condition values for condition agreement transmission are not registered Instead it is registered as whether or not PLC CPU status monitoring will be performed Monitoring results in condition agreement transmission are sent or notified only once when an error is detected by the status information read from the PLC CPU for the first time 2 USING THE PLC CPU MONITORING FUNCTION MELSEC Q 2 2 5 Transmission methods of monitoring results and transmission data to the external device The following explain the method of transmitting the PLC CPU monitoring results and data to
259. dicated BUFRCVS instruction is used regardless of whether the communication uses the non procedure protocol or bidirectional protocol For more details on the BUFROVS instruction see Section 17 2 2 Create a program that enables disables interrupts during execution of the main program in order to start the interrupt program Use the El DI and IMASK instructions 4 4 2 Precautions when receiving data with an interrupt program The following shows the precautionary notes when receiving data with an interrupt program 1 Create an interrupt program for data reception for each interface 2 Use GX Configurator SC to set whether or not the interrupt program is started Whether or not the interrupt program is started can also be set with direct writing to the buffer memory However if it is specified during data reception the interrupt program will not start 3 Do not use the INPUT and BIDIN instructions during execution of the interrupt program Always use the BUFRCVS instruction to receive data 4 Do not turn the reception data read completion signal Y1 Y8 ON OFF during execution of the interrupt program 5 Use always ON SM400 or direct input signal DX3 DX4 as the contact signal when executing the BUFRCVS instruction See Section 4 4 4 RECEIVING DATA WITH AN INTERRUPT PROGRAM MO MELSEC Q 6 After the power supply turns from OFF to ON or the CPU module is reset data cannot be received because the
260. dshake for mode switching 15 5 I O signals with the PLC CPU modem 3 31 Improper 3 16 3 47 Information to be transmitted 2 11 Initialization commands for modem 3 58 Initialization of modem terminal adapter 3 68 Interrupt program example 4 4 Interrupt program startup timing 4 2 LUFT erp 14 1 Message time 6 13 Mode switching 15 1 Modem function 1 3 5 Modern function system setting 3 56 Monitoring 2 8 Monitoring target device 2 4 Non communication interval time designation deter etie inire eia Ln e eph 3 38 No reception monitoring time timer O 6 2 Notification 2 19 On demand data communication user frame 22i pd tne ed 10 1 On demand data 5 10 2 On demand function control procedure ASCII 10 4 On demand function control procedure binary code 10 6 Output count designation area
261. dule register Constant Others Zn Instruction code Executing Instruction format condition BUFRCVS Z BUFRCVS Un Setting data Setting data Start I O signal of the module Binary 16 i Un 00 to FE The 2 upper digits of an input output signal to WE i expressed in 3 digit User Reception channel number 1 Channel 1 CH1 side 2 Channel 2 CH2 side 7 Device name Head number of the devices that store receive data Receive data is read from the reception area of the buffer System memory The file registers of each of the local device and the program cannot be used as the setting data 17 Receive data Setting data Stores the of data read from the receive data count Receive data length 0 or more System storage area D 1 to Stores data read from the receive data count storage area in Receive data System sequence starting from the youngest address 1 According to the Word byte units designation by GX Configurator SC the number of bytes is stored when byte is designated and the number of words is stored when word is designated REMARK 1 For information about errors caused by incorrect data designated by the user see the description in Errors on the next page When reception error occurs the error code can be read from the data reception result storage area address 258 268 in the buffer memory 2 The Set by column indicates t
262. e Line disconnect possible Conversion of modem initialization line connection commands to pulses Modem initialization line connection processing to sub routine Conversion of data communications transmission commands to pulses To the data transmission processing sub routine Setting of the receive data reading request To the data reception processing rub routine Conversion of line disconnect commands to pulses Conversion of turning connected signals OFF to pulses To the line disconnect processing sub routine 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION Modem initialization line connection processing P4 M41 SET Yi RST RST pei HO H221 D101 Data transmission processing 51 M52 MOV NO1 TO N02 MOV HOAOD MOV MOV KO MOV K6 D51 SET M150 M151 INC M151 T Inc RST RST Data reception processing P52 M55 J MVP KI FMOVP KO D161 MOVP 6 INPUT UO D160 D61 SET M160 M161 ING M161 RST RST 3 90 Yi Yit M2 051 056 D150 D151 D152 M150 M92 C50 C51 M92 M53 RET D160 K2 0163 M160 M93 060 C61 M93 M55 RET MELSEC Q Set the connection request signal With the initialization completed signal ON and the connected signal ON reset the request signal With the initialization connection abnormally completed signal ON read the error code and reset
263. e Moden initialization time DR signal valid invalid designation 3 gt o e Wait time SS S s d o x 9 emaon Circuit disconnect wait time PLC CPU watch use Untts O x x s8206 0089 Remote password mismatch notification count designation O x smeo Remote password mismatch notification accumulated count designation x 8205 2000 Auto modem initialization designation oo O O Callback function designation Lo j o meow Callback denial notification accumulated count designation o 0x x o 8194 20024 8449 to 8458 x Data No for Callback designation 1 to 10 EXE X 2101910 210A Required item Setting possible X Setting not required 1 For details on how to register the data No for initialization see Section 3 4 3 For details on how to register the data No for connection see Section 3 4 4 x2 Even if the PLC CPU on series C24 loading station local station becomes STOP status under the following circumstances the line telephone with the partner devices will be left connected In order to prevent the line from being left connected when the line is not in use be sure to make the appropriate settings 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q 1 When the PLC CPU is stopped when the connected signal X12 is at the ON status This occurs because the program write after
264. e Sequence program The following explains the timings for the transmission and notification of the PLC CPU monitoring results There are two transmission methods for transmitting and notifying the monitoring results of the local station PLC CPU to the external device These include constant cycle transmission and condition agreement transmission One of these methods must be selected by the user during PLC CPU monitoring registration 1 Constant cycle transmission The monitoring results are transmitted and notified each time monitoring information is read from the PLC CPU Timing to transmit data Monitoring information One block portion One block portion i i i i END END END 22 External device END 2 USING THE PLC CPU M ONITORING FUNCTION MELSEC Q 2 Condition agreement transmission a Condition agreement transmission Cycle time Sequence program conditions matched not matched Matched For device monitoring the monitoring conditions registered by the user conditions for sending monitoring results the monitoring condition values and the monitoring information read from the PLC CPU are compared The monitoring results are sent or notified when there is a block where the monitoring conditions match For PLC CPU status monitoring the monitoring results are sent or notified only once when an error is detec
265. e 3 Both modems must support the MNP4 or V 42 protocol 2 Data compression 1 This function compresses data to be sent prior to transmission and inflates the compressed data upon reception then forwards to the terminal 2 The data compression is effective for the execution speed at a maximum of 200 for the MNP5 and 300 for the V 42bis 3 Both modems must support the MNP5 or V 42bis protocol 3 Flow control RS CS control When communication between a modem and terminal is faster than between two modems the flow control is performed in the following order 3 13 3 13 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q 1 The modem transmits data to the partner by storing the data from the terminal in the modem buffer 2 When the buffer in the modem becomes almost full the modem outputs a data transmission temporary stop request CS signal OFF to the terminal The terminal then stops data transmission to the modem when the data transmission temporary stop request CS signal OFF is received Even while the terminal pauses data transmission the modem continues to send data to the partner 3 When a free space is present in the modem buffer the modem outputs the data transmission resume request CS signal ON to the terminal The terminal then resumes data transmission to the modem when the data transmission resume request CS signal ON is received x2 Modems that turn on the CD signal simultaneously
266. e designation area changes to 2 start receiving data 4 Check if the data from the external device was received normally If the Q series C24 receives additional code data while receiving data with the non procedure protocol it does not assume that the last byte of data is the following control data Data received as user frame first frame last frame See Sections 9 1 and 9 2 Receive complete code data Therefore do not set a user frame containing data receive additional code data as a non procedure protocol receive user frame The arbitrary data area of a message received from an external device cannot include data with the same contents same code as the last frame Example User frame Arbitrary User frame first frame dat area last frame In the following cases set the data bit length of the transmission specification to 8 bits It is set in the transmission setting of switch setting by GX Developer on the Q series C24 side 1 When transmitting and receiving the sum check code of the variable data as binary data Write code FFH EEH FFH FOH FFH FAu FFH F6H 2 When transmitting and receiving a user frame containing data codes 80H to FFH 9 CONTENTS AND REGISTRATION OF THE USER FRAMES FOR DATA COMMUNICATION MELSEC Q 9 4 Register Read Delete User Frames The following explains registering reading and deleting user frames in the Q series C24 flash ROM or buffer memory When register
267. e Q series C24 side Data number for connection designation area address 35H 53 The data for connection registration number is designated 8 to 5 3000 to 3029 Data registered to the Flash ROM by the user 8001 to 801FH 32767 to 32737 Data registered to the buffer memory by the user 2 When line connecting from the external device Since the line connection processing is not necessary on the Q series C24 side connecting data registration for line connection and data number setting for connection are not needed 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q 3 I O signals used in line connection Connection request signal Y11 dial in progress signal X11 connection in progress signal X12 and initialization connection abnormal completion signal X13 are used Example1 When performing the line connection from the Q series C24 side only following the completion of initialization Buffer memory for connection 0 X 3000 Address 5 53 Normal completion Connection NUR request Y11 E Initialization Y10 ON y Dial in progress x44 A E Connection in i progress X12 iut RS 232 CD terminal H 2 Set Display a result code using the AT command in the local station side modem Result code Dial receive Abnormal completion Connection Y11 io p E request
268. e Q series C24 side by the PLC CPU is shown below When the initialization data has been registered from GX Configurator SC or from the PLC CPU X12 Connection in progress signal X1E Ready signal X1F WDT error signal MO Accessible flag M1 Data registration complete flag for initialization M30 Initialization enabled flag 1 MO Turns the ready flag ON 1 M3 X10 X12 X13 Y10 Turns the modem initialization X20 enabled flag ON PLS M31 Modem initialization command M31 M30 I 3 SET Y10 Sets the initialization request signal SET M39 Sets the initialization request flag Y10 X10 SET M3 Sets the initialization completed flag RST Y10 X13 MO HO H221 D100 K1 Reads the error code at initialization abnormal completion RST Y10 RST M39 Resets the flag with the clear command RST M3 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION 3 4 6 Line connection MELSEC Q This section explains the connection dialing with the partner devices for the purpose of data communication with external devices using the modem functions In case of notification to a pager receiver the line is connected while the notification is being processed The connection processing such as a connection request Y11 to I O signal is therefore unnecessary The data for connection indicated in this section should be set to perform the notification processing 1 Requirements for connection 2 Complete
269. e and shipment from Mitsubishi the maximum distribution period shall be six 6 months and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen 18 months The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs Gratis Warranty Range 1 The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state usage methods and usage environment etc which follow the conditions and precautions etc given in the instruction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product 2 Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged for in the following cases 1 Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling carelessness or negligence by the user Failure caused by the user s hardware or software design 2 Failure caused by unapproved modifications etc to the product by the user 3 When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user s device Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user s device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards had been provided 4 Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts battery backlight fuse etc designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced 5 Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages and Failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes lightning
270. e connection Q AGTEL C24 Data for line connection For other items settings are performed according to the access destination station When the GX Developer is connected perform the settings and operations described in Section 3 3 7 to prevent a line to the modem from disconnecting even if communication between the GX Developer and PLC is interrupted 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q 3 2 4 Precautions for system configurations The following describes the precautionary items when configuring the system to perform data communication with an external device or call a pager receiver via public line an office telephone system or digital line ISDN using the Q series C24 modem function 1 Usable Q series C24 interface 1 The modem function can be used with the RS 232 interface only 2 For QJ71QC24 N R2 the modem function can only be used with one of the two existing RS 232 interfaces 3 Itis not possible to perform data communication via two interface of Q series C24 linked operation 2 Connectable modem TA Only the modems TA indicated in Section 3 3 2 can be used for the series C24 RS 232 interface using the modem function 3 Number of connectable modems TA s Only one modem TA can be connected to the series C24 RS 232 interface that uses the modem function 4 Modem TA connection cables 1 The RS 232 cable supplied with the modem TA or the designated modem TA cable can be used f
271. e disconnect completed See Section 3 4 8 Modem disconnection request signal Y12 ON Line disconnect completed Modem disconnection completion signal X14 ON Connection in progress signal X12 OFF Modem initialization completion signal X10 OFF Line disconnect completed Connection in progress signal X12 OFF By completing the line disconnection lock processing of the remote password Line connection wait state 3 is executed automatically Modem initialization completion i signal 10 If data communications is being executed again carry out communications after line connection If data communications are executed again proceed from the modem initialization stage from the external device t Shows the value stored for the modem function sequence status Address 546 221 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q 3 If notification is made indicates processing performed by the user Pager receiver Modem Q Series C24 Line connection side 1 Perform the processing up to the point where the modem TA is initialized by the procedure in 1 Modem initialization Modem initialization completion signal X10 ON 3 Make notification Line connection Line connection be Notification issued request signal Y14 OFF g j 14 normally completed Notification Line connection normally co
272. e next command message without sending a response message NAK message to the external device During on demand data transmission the Q series C24 stores the error code to the on demand execution result storage area buffer memory addresses 256 266 for the target interface If transmission was terminated midway in either of the cases above the series C24 does not transmit the remaining data 6 CHANGING THE DATA COMMUNICATIONS MONITORING TIMES MELSEC Q 2 Data communications using non procedure protocol or bidirectional protocol While waiting for the end of transmission of a message the Q series C24 stores the error code to the data transmission result storage area buffer memory addresses 257 267 for the target interface and performs transmission processing abnormal completion If message transmission was terminated midway the Q series C24 does not transmit the remaining data If waiting for the end of transmission of a response message the series C24 stores the error code to the data receive result storage area buffer memory addresses 258 268 for the target device and turns on the reception abnormal detection signal X4 XB 7 amp 1 When the receive data read complete the Q series C24 turns off the reception abnormal detection signal X4 XB and waits to receive the next command If transmission of the response message was terminated midway the Q series C24 does not transmit the remaining data
273. e of data reception 13 5 13 4 2 Example of data transmlssiOn 3 23 1 Intt tte 13 8 13 5 Performing ASCII BIN Conversion for Data Communicated Via the Bidirectional Protocol 13 10 13 6 Example of Data Communication Using the Bidirectional 13 12 13 6 1 Example of data reception sssssssssssssssssseeeneeeneen 13 13 13 6 2 Example of data transmission sssssssssssssssssseeeeeeene tenerent nnns 13 14 14 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING EXTERNAL DEVICE AND PLC CPU M N CONFIGURATION 14 1to 14 11 14 1 Data Communications 14 1 14 2 External Devices Interlock Conditions sesseseseeeeeneeeenen enemies 14 3 14 2 1 Maximum communications time per external device station 14 3 14 2 2 Message structure when communicating data between external devices 14 4 14 3 Examples of Procedure for Data Communications with the PLC 14 6 14 3 1 Sequential data communications between external devices and the PLC CPU 14 6 14 3 2 Data communications between PLC CPU and external devices by d
274. e table designating the user frame number for condition agreement transmission for this block S2 109 CPU status 7 et 0 1 to 100 monitoring 0 No designation at constant cycle transmission and Condition notification setting k Abnormal agreement 1 to 100 Head pointer monitoring transmissio Designate the transmission output count of the user frames 44 th n in condition agreement transmission for this block 52 110 3 41th block m RU No designation at constant cycle transmission 0 1 to 100 The same arrangement as the first PLC CPU monitoring 2nd to 10 th setting item 2nd to 10th block notification 1 to 100 Transmission count Designate the data No for connecting the modem function when sending notifications in condition agreement transmission for this block 0 52 111 1 No designation at data transmission and BB8 to BD5n constant cycle transmission 8001 to 801FH 8 to BD5a Data No for connection flash ROM 8001 to 801 Data No for connection buffer memo 2 Canceling the PLC CPU monitoring Setting data Setting range Set by 1 S2 0 Execution type Designate o Ue Stores the result of execution upon completion of an instruction Completion status System 0 Normal Other than 0 Abnormal error code Designate the request content S2 2 Request type 3 Cancels the PLC CPU monitoring S2 3 to For system System S2 111 1
275. e user for the PLC CPU monitoring function 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION 3 1 Overview Th is chapter explains the overview and how to use the modem function which can be used for data communication with remote external devices and paging pager terminals The overview of the modem function is described below 1 The modem function easily performs data transmission reception to remote devices via public lines office telephone systems digital lines ISDN by connecting 3 a modem or TA terminal adapter to the Q series C24 s RS 232 interface 1 Communicating arbitrary data with an external device 2 Call pager receiver beeper to notify the PLC s system maintenance information Initialization of the modem or TA line connection dialing and line disconnection are performed using the PLC CPU Once the line is connected data communication with the external device via public line office telephone system digital line or a call to pager receiver can be made Q series C24 Modem TA 1 Modem TA 1 er a ae eo External device Pager receiver 1 TA terminal adapter 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q 3 1 1 Features The following explains the features of the modem function 1 Interface that can use the modem function 1 The modem function can be used with the Q series C24 using an RS 232 interface 2
276. eceive data are read to the PLC CPU as one byte data Boda data read X83 excluding the additional code Data length No of receive data Excluding additional code PLC CPU For word unit ON Byte count after ASCII BIN conversion 8 2 4 Completion device MO For byte unit ON Abnormal Byte count after ASCII BIN conversion 4 P 4 Status display device ki Completion at completion i The following diagram is for word unit 1 completion 4 0 2 One scan Data length 00H 044 gt D3 00H 041 BOTH 114 D10 tin 02H 6024 41n D11 Data section gt gt 603 D12 12H 34H 6044 013 Sequence program device memory Transmission instruction 8 Sets CH1 to the reception UM channel ian se 54 Sets the allowable number of receive data to 6 G BIDIN us Di DIO MO Executes reception wo M SET M100 Sets the normal completion flag 1 101 Sets the abnormal completion flag 1 When the receive transparent code designation is set to Enable and the ASCII BIN conversion is set to Enable the codes for receivable arbitrary data section and those for receive data that is stored in the buffer memory s reception area as follows Codes stored in the Receivable codes reception area Receive transparent code Additional code 01H to FFH Delete designation section Transparent code 30H to 3
277. eceived MOVP Ki DI Sets CH1 to the reception channel K6 D4 Sets the allowable number of reception data to 6 G INPUT 1 D10 MO Executes reception j SET M100 Sets the normal completion flag Mt ser M101 Sets the abnormal completion flag 11 24 11 24 11 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING USER FRAMES MELSEC Q c When receiving with user frame only reception using Format 0 Head data EM dl For reception using first frame and last frame combination Since there is no arbitrary data area 2 7 th ive dat t is 0 8 E 8 e receive data count is 0 T oci 9 el P 1 t n x Wu 5 The illustration below is for reception using External device E91 2 first frame and last frame combination i ADH User frame use control 0 BBHI 2H designation v AEn First frame No designation First frame Last frame 3E8H 1st PLC CPU Correspond to register Nos 8 and 41Bu 9 2nd 6H 3rd Reception data read X83 request 1 15 4th B2u Last frame No designation PLC CPU 41 151 Lt CASE 2nd Completion device MO e None ON S B4 pce 4 niin ES ipis device M1 Y completion g T None at completion Normal completion 5 4th E Receive transparent i 1204 YES NO code designation u z 1002H OH sean Disable ASCII BIN conversion o 121 de
278. ection data and Line connection dialing enables data communication after establishing the line connection When the modem TA is not initialized performs initialization Performs communication with an external device using the MC PE Communication method protocol non procedure protocol or bidirectional protocol EID _ _ 5 full duplex Performs communication with the partner Q series C24 installed Der Satie y communication Data communication station by modem TA connection using non procedure protocol or tu Synchronization bidirectional protocol Station to station communication mS method start stop Enables the communication between GX Developer and PLC via Q j synchronous system series C24 asynchronous Flash ROM reading writing registration and deletion Reads writes registers and deletes the initialization data AT command and data for connection from to the Flash in the Q series C24 according to the request from PLC CPU Allows the Q series C24 to execute the remote password check set in the QCPU when there is Remote password check communication from the external device to the Q series C24 using MC protocol or the PLC is accessed using the GX Developer After line connection from the GX Developer access to the QCPU from the GX Developer is made possible through line reconnection from the Q Series C24 callback Transmission costs after line connection from the Q Series C24 side are borne b
279. ection in x12 7 Em progress Yi i Disconnection Y12 F request h E t Disconnection X14 completion Station connection reception side Initialization completion Connection in progress Disconnection request Disconnection completion RS 232 CD terminal E X10 Y12 X14 RS 232 CD terminal 3 i i i i i i i i i i i T 1 i i i i i i i i i i i i i 1 i i i 1 i i i 1 i vy i i i i i i i i i i i i i 1 i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i 1 i i i It is possible to disconnect line from Station B as well 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q b When notifying to pager receiver 1 Initial setting by GX Configurator SC Register the data number registration area for connection below in the Modem function system setting screen BB8u to 5 3000 to 3029 Data registered to the Flash ROM by the user 8001 to 801FH 32767 to 32737 Data registered to the buffer memory by the user 2 W O signal Use notification issued request signal Y14 notification normal complete signal X15 notification abnormal complete signal X16 Example 1 When normal completion Buffer memory for Q series C24 initial setting __ MEME designation area Address 2 47 Buffer memory for notificati
280. ed data 8 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING HALF DUPLEX COMMUNICATIONS MELSEC Q 2 Timing when data is transmitted from the Q series C24 The Q series C24 RS signal is controlled and data is transmitted according to the simultaneous transmission priority non priority value registered in Transmission control and others system setting screen of the GX Configurator SC See Section 8 4 5 of User s Manual Basic a When Q series C24 is designated priority Terminate data transmission Retransmission External decvice Data C 1 Data C PLC CPU Since the Q series C24 has prioriry it continues to transmit even if the CD signal is turned Store thie data at the ON J external device SD Send data RS Send Request CS Send Possible CD Receive Carrier Detect RD Receive Data Data C1 C The Q series C24 ignores The Q series C24 the receive 2 stores the receive data 1 When transmitting data check the Q series C24 CD signal If the CD signal is OFF turn on the Q series C24 RS signal If the CD signal is ON wait until it is turned OFF then turn ON the RS signal 2 After the RS signal is turned ON transmit the data 3 After data transmission is complete turn off the RS signal 4 If the CD signal is turned ON during data transmission the series C24 continues to transmit da
281. ed description of user frame Contents of send data ASCII mode Binary mode Codes registered from 00x to Transmit the data of the code registered in the Q series C24 FEH No conversion Combination of codes registered in FFu and 00 to FFH User frame Transmits data code First frame 2nd Converts the data code registered in the Q series Codes registered from 00 to Last frame FE registered in the Q series C24 C24 Other than last frame i to ASCII data and transmits For 10 data transmits 10 10 Transmits the data of the User frame First frame 1st Last frame Last frame Transmit the data according to the user designated contents code and byte count Converts data of Combination of codes contents code and byte contents code and byte registered in FF and 00h to t count designated by the user count designated by the user FFu For 10d data transmits 10H to ASCII data and transmits 10 H Transmits the designated Send data Converts the designated data unchanged See Section 3 11 3 of send data to ASCII data and No conversion Reference Manual for details transmits For 10 data transmits 10H 10 10 3 10 3 10 ON DEMAND DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING USER FRAMES MELSEC Q 10 4 On Demand Function Control Procedure During User Frame Use The following uses examples to explain the control procedure when using the on demand fun
282. ed to Flash ROM 205 517 User frame registration status to storage See 3 21DH 541 For registration No check 0 Given range not registered One or higher Registration status Register data byte count 1 00 6912 at designation Registration No i 8001H User frame storage 40 words 1B28u 6952 Register data byte count designation Register data byte count 1829 6953 See 1 80 1 8 1B2Au 6954 Registration No 8002 User frame storage Register data byte count User frame storage See 2 1 51 6993 EE Register frame data code 1852 6994 to 1 8141 Register data byte count 8143 Registration No lh 80F1H User frame storage 40 words 1FF6H 8182 1B01H 6913 Register area for 31 frames Read write from PLC CPU O Always performed A Performed as required X Unnecessary 9 CONTENTS AND REGISTRATION OF THE USER FRAMES FOR DATA COMMUNICATION MELSEC Q 1 Registration data byte count designation area Addresses 5 1B00H 1 29 TFCEH Indicates the total number of bytes of register data of the user frame to be registered read Flash ROM access During the register operation the user registers the total number of bytes of register data During the read operation the total number of bytes of registered data is stored Buffer memory access During the register operation the user regist
283. edicated received data count reception using Format 1 Receive data count Word units Receive byte count excluding frame and additional code 2 2 1 Byte units Receive byte count excluding frame and additional code 2 User frame use control 2 designation AEH First frame No designation PLC CPU 4 Arbitrary data area f 8 1st First ffame Correspond to 9 2nd register No 15u 1 Reception data read X83 1 request i s zu 15H 4th B2u Last frame No designation PLC CPU i 41BH 1st B3 None is 2nd Completion device MO 9 None ON i 1 da NE CES fae dep Sete as ened 5 Normal completion 1 S 4th Receive transparent 120 YES NO code designation 1002H 1 scan 124 Disable ASCII BIN conversion Ou designation 2 25 iren user frame to DO i D 600 Receive data count 3 to D3 00H 02H 4 0022 Receive data gt to D10 TEES gt 601H 00 22H arbitrary data area User frame receive 2020H Qu format designation 1st Format 0 2021 2nd Format 0 2022 1 3rd Format 1 2023 1 4th Format 1 Exclusive format 1 2024 Qu received data count 1st 20254 2026 2027 Ath Buffer memory Reception data read request X83 FR
284. ee Section 4 7 of User s Manual Basic After inidividual station testing turn off the power supply to the Q series C24 loading station Connecting the series C24 and modem TA After setting the modem TA switch connect to modem TA E using the included RS 232 cable or any designated cables Suppling power to the modem TA Supplying power to series C24 loading Supply power from the modem TA station Setting and registration with GX Developer Parameter setting Switch setting of Q series C24 Other than operation setting OFF should be set accordingly with the modem TA of the series C24 4 to QCPU Stasion number setting set to 0 to 31 Registration to QCPU Write to PLC See Section 4 5 of User s Manual Basic Initial setting of Q series C24 See Section 3 4 2 for setting the modem functions 9 See Section 8 4 4 of User s Manual Basic egaet Transmission setting Initial setting Registration of the data for initialization See Sections 3 4 3 8 4 2 of User s Manual Basic of Q series C24 l Setting with Registration of data for connection See Sections 3 4 4 8 4 3 of User s Manual Basic GX Configuration SC J Initialization of the modem TA See Sections 3 4 5 8 4 4 of User s Manual Basic modem function system setting 2 In case of data 3 In case of notification 4 Access from GX Developer
285. eivable codes reception area Receive transparent code Additional code 01H to FFH Delete designation section Transparent code QOH to FFH 00H to FFH Arbitrary data section including complete code QOH to FFH OOH to FFH 12 9 12 9 12 TRANSPARENT CODES AND ADDITIONAL CODES MELSEC Q 2 Receiving based on the completed data count Additional code 10H DLE transparent code 02H STX Completed data count Six words or 12 bytes Additional code Q series C24 deletes Head data Transparent code For word unit Received byte count excluding additional code 12 2 6 For byte unit Received byte count excluding additional code 12 C L Y i External device side TRES 12344 304 31 132 33 10 02 00 41 4200348 1290 1 1 1 L L L 1 L 1 1 j PLC CPU side Reception data read request X83 Received data count is stored PLC CPU The following diagram is for word unit Completion device MO 4 Abnormal Status display device M1 ig ampletion r at completion i Normal 600 00x 064 zc 004 1 LII completion 1 0 0 0 i 5 60th P O 30n ne scan odii 3 2 Bi 3 2 33H 32H 33H 324 NULL STX NULL STX 6034 004 02h 2 00x 024 B A B 42u 41n 12344 12344 809 124 344 LF CR LF CR COD oa
286. eive error is detected the Q series C24 stores arbitrary data of the reception data received immediately before the error in the reception area of the buffer memor then turns the reception error detection signal X4 ON 11 11 11 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING USER FRAMES MELSEC Q Combination with the first frame Timing patterns for reception start and receive complete read For data reception with format 0 Pattern No 1 A 1 Pattern No 1 A 2 Y Y vy External device Arbitrary data side Last frame First frame Last frame Arbitrary data 1 First frame Equaling the Equaling the received data received data count count PLC CPU side Pattern No 1 B Y v External device side S E iL Last frame PLC CPU side Pattern No 1 C 1 Pattern No 1 C 2 Y Y wv wv 5 E External device Arbitrary data Arbitrary data side D iL iL gt lt 5 PLC CPU side Equaling the Equaling the Equaling the received data received data received data count count count For data reception with format 1 Pattern No 1 D Y v Y v S S External device Arbitrary data Reception data Arbitrary data side rm mm PLC CPU side Equaling exclusive format 1 Equaling exclusive format 1 received data count Ignored received data count Pattern N
287. eived data count initially set in the Q series C24 is transmitted from the external device together with the first frame The data length for the arbitrary data in the reception message that can be handled by the PLC CPU side 7 1 can be specified for each data reception frame combination up to four combinations Any reception data prior to the first frame will be ignored The Q series C24 will begin reception processing when data of the same arrangement as the first frame is received When arbitrary data equaling the exclusive format 1 received data count is received the arbitrary data is stored in the reception area of the buffer memory and a read request is performed to the PLC CPU Exclusive format 1 received data count initially set in the Q series C24 should be a data count for arbitrary data to be received The received data count initially set in the Q series C24 is not used Reception processing via the receive complete code initially set in the Q series C24 will not be performed The reception data for the receive complete code will be treated as arbitrary data Example 1 By specifying a user frame in which only ACK 06x is registered as the first frame and also exclusive format 1 received data count for arbitrary data as 0 bytes a read request will be performed to the PLC CPU upon the reception of a 1 byte ACK 11 6 11 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING USER FRAMES 11 7 MELSEC Q Example 2 By specifying
288. elect stop to stop monitoring when a timer 0 error occurs Enter a value to change the monitor buffer address Monitor buffer head address 0400 to 1AFDu 2600 to 3FFDH Default address 26004 3300u Enter a value the monitor buffer size Monitor buffer size 0003 to 1A00H Default 0000 16 USING COMMUNICATION DATA MONITORING FUNCTION MELSEC Q 2 Buffer memory for communication data monitoring function Buffer memory address Buffer memory address 16 5 a Communication data monitoring specification area Address 2018 2118 Set start stop of the communication data monitoring See Section 16 1 2 for communication data monitoring setting operation b15 to bO 2018 2118 Default 0000 Set the monitor start stop 0000 No monitor Monitor stop 00014 Monitor start 0002 Monitoring Set by Q series C24 1002u Monitor stop Set by Q series C24 100F Monitor setting error Set by series C24 b Monitor option specification area Address 2019 2119 Specify the options of the communication data monitoring function b15 to b3 b2 b1 bO 2019 2119 0 1 0 0 1 0 Default 0000 Action for buffer full OFF 1 ON Stop by timer error OFF 1 ON 1 Action for buffer full bit O When action for buffer full is OFF When the monitoring data exceeds the capacity of the monitor data area monitoring continues by writing the new data over
289. ellular Phone Cellular phone connection adapter The public lines indicated in 1 to 3 above are compatible with the office telephone system as well n the system configurations shown in 1 and 2 above the digital line ISDN can replace the public line When connecting via a digital line a TA terminal adapter and a DSU digital service module are used instead of a modem 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q 3 2 2 System configuration when using the notification function The following describes the system configuration example when calling the pager receiver by the notification function Q25HCPU QJTTC24 RZ ec jen Public line Modem cable The public line indicated above is compatible with the office telephone system as well 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q 3 2 3 System configuration when connecting GX Developer The following describes the system configuration when GX Developer performs data communication with a remote station PLC via Q series C24 GX Developer Public line The above public lines is compatible with the office telephone system as well The following settings are performed in the items below when setting the connection destination using the GX Developer See the GX Developer manual for details Personal computer side interface Serial PLC side interface C24 Telephone lin
290. eloper is limited to 10 modules 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q 4 Ifthe callback destination GX Developer is limited to a maximum of 10 modules specify the connection data registration No that specify the callback destination telephone No for a maximum of 10 modules The external line dialing line types and telephone number in callback data No 1 become valid The telephone No only becomes valid in callback data No 2 to 10 The external line dialing and line types in the connection data for callback data No 1 are used for these 5 If Op is specified in this specification the callback data No after that become unspecified Example If callback data No 4 is specified as the callback data No 4 to 10 registrations become invalid d Callback permit accumulated count storage area Address 8944 22F0h The accumulated count value when the Q Series C24 executed callback is stored here e Callback denial accumulated count storage area Address 8945 22F1h The accumulated count value for callbacks which the Q Series C24 did not executed due to callback error detection is stored here f Auto callback connection permit accumulated count storage area Address 8946 22F2H The accumulated count value for normal line connections from the GX Developer by the connection system shown below is stored here 1 Auto callback during fixed 2 Auto callback during designated number g Aut
291. em When using the subscriber s telephone When using a manual line Remarks Connectiontine See Section 3 2 4 di Telephone line A line compatible with NTT communication protocol 99 n i regarding the restrictions Communication standard NNNM Error correction Class 4 and 10 compliant 1 Data compression rn ANS ORG mode swith Mode switching required Q series C24 side connector 9 female D sub See Section 3 2 of User s RS 232 Em DR signal control Only the DR DSR signal must be able to turn on See Chapter 3 T 3 3 1 of User s Manual Basic Modem to modem communication specification Q series C24 to modem communication specification Compatible with the Q series C24 specification 1 The following are the functions of the modem itself that become available by issuing the AT commands to the modem See the modem manual for details 1 Error correction 1 When a noise occurs on the line scrambled data may appear due to interrupted communication data The error correction function is intended to suppress effects from such noises 2 If an error such as scrambled data is detected by the error correction the modem retries the transmission When the number of retries has exceeded the modem s limit the modem determines that communication cannot be performed in that environment and disconnects the lin
292. em initialization normal completion flag is set The modem initialization request signal is reset Error code is read if the modem initialization completes abnormally The modem initialization ERR occurrence flag is set The modem initialization request signal is reset The unlock processing accumulated count is cleared The modem initialization processing normal completion flag is set An instruction from the user resets the flag 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q 3 4 Start up of the Modem Function This section explains the start up procedures processing methods and programming when the modem function of the Q series C24 is to be used 3 4 1 Start up procedures when communicating data with external devices This section shows the procedure for starting the modem function and up to the point when data communications is started 1 Procedure up to initialization of the Q Series C24 s modem TA This initializes the modem TA connected to the Q Series C24 in order to use the modem function It becomes possible to carry out all kinds of communications when the modem TA is initialized Start D gt E __ Determine the configuration of the system See Section 3 2 and 3 3 Verify the Q series C24 specification See Chapters 2 3 of User s Manual Basic Y Installation to the base unit Suppling power to the Q series C24 loading station Individual testing ofthe Q series C24 S
293. ent to external devices mainly printers in the serial communication modules as an user frame in advance and sends the registered data for multiple user frames using the non procedure protocol sent by an instruction from the PLC CPU Multidrop connection A name of the connection when multiple external devices or other serial communication modules are connected in a 1 n or m n mode using the serial communication module s RS 422 485 interface Non procedure protocol An user s communication procedure and one of the data communication functions for communicating any data between the PLC CPU and an external device Details are explained in Chapter 6 QnA compatible 2C frame Formats 1 to 4 One of the message formats for the serial communication modules for performing communication using the MC protocol and ASCII code data This is the same message format as the communication frame using the protocol for the QnA series serial communication modules QnA compatible 2C frame Formats 1 to 4 QnA simplified frame Formats 1 to 4 Details are explained in Chapter 4 of the Reference Manual QnA compatible 3C frame Formats 1 to 4 QnA compatible 4C frame Formats 1 to 4 One of the message formats for the serial communication modules for performing communication using the MC protocol and ASCII code data This is the same message format as the communication frame using the protocol for the QnA series serial communicati
294. er memory Data registration complete flag for connection set Modem initialization processing subroutine Set the initialization request signal Initialization request execution flag is set When the initialization complete signal ON the initialization complete flag is set and the request signal is reset When the initialization connection abnormal complete signal ON the error code is read and the request signal is reset 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION M41 M40 P4 SET SET M101 x12 E M4 X13 s i H2201 DIO K Y11 X12 Yt RST Yul X13 RST M42 RET P51 M0V TO N02 051 MOV HOAOD 056 MOV 0150 MOV 0151 MOV K6 D152 SET M92 M92 MO pl GP OUTPUT 0150 051 M150 SET M102 M150 M151 M155 M156 M156 M155 M92 M53 RET D160 K2 D163 M91 G INPUT uo D160 D61 M160 SET M103 MELSEC Q Line connection processing subroutine Connection request signal is set Connection requestr execution flag is set When the connection in progress signal ON the connection complete flag is set and the request signal is reset When the initialization connection abnormal complete signal ON the error code is read and request signalis is reset Data communication processing subroutine Non procedure protocol transmission Set the transmission data Sets the transmission channel to CH1
295. eries C24 send data 1 The data of the user frame and the data of the transmission area designated from the PLC CPU are transmitted in the contents and order set in the buffer memory send user frame designation area For the user frame section and arbitrary data section the data can be sent as ASCII code using the ASCII BIN conversion For more details on the ASCII BIN conversion see Chapter 13 If send transparent code is designated the additional code data is added in front of the transparent code additional code in the data of the designated area during transmission and transmitted 11 31 11 31 11 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING USER FRAMES MELSEC Q 11 4 2 Transmission procedure The following describes the transmission procedure when transmitting a message containing user frames to the external device Procedure External device Arbitrary PLC CPU User frame __ User frame data area User frame __ User frame 1 1st nth Transmissiion mth th area data PLC CPU Completion device Abnormal Status display device i completion at completion Normal completion x1 Designates the data of the user frame number to send 2 PLC CPU processing Before issuing a send request to the Q series C24 designate write the following data Transmission user frame designation area User frame No transmission method and transmission order registered in the Q series C24 Transmis
296. ern function a b c d Notification abnormal Modem connection channel designation area address 46 2EH The interface on the Q series C24 side to which a modem TA is connected is designated Notification execution designation area address 47 2 Whether or not to perform notification message transmission to the pager receiver during the fall of the notification issued request signal Y14 is designated Number of connection retries designation area address 48 30H 1 Designates the number of retries for the notification connection request when the connection could not be made to the partner device by the notification request connection request 2 The default value is recommended to use for the number of connection retries Connection retry interval designation area address 49 31 1 Designates the interval time of the retry processing for the notification connection request when the connection could not be made to the partner device by the notification request connection request 2 The default value is recommended to use for the connection retry interval Initialization connection timeout time designation area address 50 32 1 The following wait times are designated Wait time until the modem TA initialization is complete Wait time per wait when the connection could not be made to the destination by the notification connection request 2 The default value is recommended to use f
297. ers the total number of bytes of register data 2 User frame storage area Addresses to 20 1 01 to 1B28H 1 2 to 1B51H 1FCFH to 1FF6H During the register operation the user sequentially stores the register data of the user frame to be registered in L H order beginning from the head area of the given area range During the read operation the register data of the registered user frame is stored with the same contents as when registering Example Contents stored to user frame storage area when a user frame to transmit and receive ETX sum check code CR and LF register codes 03H FFH F1H ODH is registered to the Flash ROM Buffer memory Address H L Head data 6n FF amp to0344 7 to 1 Last data 8 0 to OA Part corresponding to write frame above Data contents transmitted and received User frame Arbitarary data User frame first frame last frame User frame register gt 02H 01 13Bu 03 1 0 0 1 0 1 e S Sum cil ransmission 1 pa 1 1 check reception data x Station 1 209 x code RIF 1 corresponding to No register code 1 hy i TNT i m Transmission gt 02 004 3 41 31 12 03 32 01 0 0 1 1 fees reception data code Sum check code X series C24 calculates calculation range the PLC
298. esignating a master station and slave stations sssssssssseeeeeeeeeneneeee nee 14 9 15 SWITCHING THE MODE AFTER STARTING 15 1to 15 10 15 1 Mode Switching Operation and Contents that can be Changed 15 2 15 1 1 Settings that can be changed with mode switching 15 2 15 1 2 Operation for mode switching essen nennen rennen nennen 15 2 15 2 Mode Switching Precautions 15 3 15 3 I O Signals for Handshake with PLC CPU and Buffer Memory 15 5 15 4 Switching the Mode from the PLC CPU nemen ens 15 7 49 4 1 Mode switcliing 2 5 etit eite tie edite tt du bu ree tt ee iurat 15 7 15 4 2 Mode switching sample nennen nnns 15 8 15 5 Switching the Mode from an External Device sssesssseeeeneeenenen nennen 15 9 15 5 1 Mode switching nnnm rnnt nnne enne 15 9 15 5 2 Mode switching sample program sess 15 10 16 1 Communication Data Monitoring Function 16 1 oo e uaa enum neus 16 1 A 9 A 9 16 1 2 Communication data monitoring operation esessesseeeeenenem emm 16 2 16 2 Communication Data Monitoring Function Settings
299. ettin Stop bit 1 bit 07 2 b5 ON Sum check code Yes b6 ON Write during RUN Allowed b7 ON Setting modification Enable b8 to b15 CH1 communication rate setting 19200 bps Switch 2 CH1 communication protocol setting 5 0005 Switch 5 Station number setting Oth station 0000 2 Initial settings by GX Configurator SC set in the setting screen for modem function system a Perform initial settings on the interface side that use the modem function as described in Section 3 3 6 The following table shows the default settings in the Modem function System setting screen and whether setting is possible or impossible in each type of communications Data communications Modem function system setting screen setting item MC non procedure Notification GX Developer Buffer memory address bidirectional Modem connection channel designation e e e 46 2 Notification execution designation 470 Number of connection retries oO sa Connection retry interval designation unit s 49 31 Oo o s Number of initialization retries designation o o o se Data No forinatzatondesnaion 56 Daa No forconneton 9 IGXDeveopercomeciondesgnaion ox x j soe No ommuricatonitonaltine 9 9 RS CS control yesmo designation o S o seg
300. ew This manual explains special functions of the MELSEC Q series C24 This chapter provides an overview of these special functions The primary special functions of the Q series C24 and a functional overview are indicated below 1 Monitoring the PLC CPU detailed explanation in Chapter 2 a The local station PLC CPU can be monitored at time intervals set by the user without a sequence program 1 The following information can be registered as items to be monitored Monitoring a device for the local station PLC CPU A numeric value stored in a word device The ON OFF status of a bit device Monitoring the status of the local station PLC CPU Monitoring the status of the local station CPU module 2 For the results of the PLC CPU monitoring the following monitored information can be transmitted notified Transmission of information on the device to be monitored and status of the PLC CPU Monitoring information obtained through combined use of the modem function can also be transmitted Notification of notification messages character string data registered for connecting the modem function when using with the modem function together 3 The user can select one of the following as transmission timing for the PLC CPU monitoring results to the external device Transmission notification each time the PLC CPU is monitored Constant cycle transmission Transmission notification when the information read from the PLC CP
301. external device to the Q series C24 unless so directed by the Q series C24 8 1 Half duplex Communications The following describes the differences between full duplex communications and half duplex communications Since the Q series C24 uses the communications method designated by the user to control PLC CPU communications control by sequence program is unnecessary 1 Full duplex communications This communication method uses telephone conversation format image to communicate data with the external device The Q series C24 can receive data while transmitting data to the external device It can also transmit data while receiving data from the external device External device Data A 1 Data A 2 PLC CPU Data B 1 Data B 2 2 Half duplex communications This communications method uses transceiver conversation format image to communicate data with the external device If the Q series C24 receives data from the external device while transmitting data to the external device it controls data transmission and reception according to Simultaneous transmission priority non priority designation The Q series C24 does not transmit data while it is receiving data from the external device External device Data A 1 Data A 2 PLC CPU Data B 1 Data B 2 8 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING HALF DUPLEX COMMUNICATIONS MELSEC Q 8 2 Data Transmission and Reception Timing Half duplex communications uses the Q series C24 RS 232 interface CD
302. f a receive transparent code is designated the additional code designation data is deleted removed from the arbitrary data section If a sum check code is designated in a user frame last frame the sum check code is calculated The arbitrary data section is stored in the reception area of the buffer memory If the ASCII BIN conversion is designated the data section is stored in the buffer memory after it is converted to binary code data During reception of an arbitrary data section if the reception complete code or the entire count of received data has been stored or when a user frame last frame has been received a receive data read is requested of the PLC CPU 2 Sending The transmission data designated by a user frame or the PLC CPU arbitrary data section of the transmission message is sent in the order designated by the user If the ASCII BIN conversion is designated the applicable range of data is sent after data is converted to ASCII code data Also if a send transparent code is designated the applicable range of data is sent after adding additional code data before the transparent code additional code data External 7 device Q series C24 Transparent code designation Sum check code designation ASCII BIN conversion designation No No No Calculating sum ASCIFBIN Yes check code using Yes conversion of v transmission user frames data Buffer memory Data b s Data designated transmission
303. f an input output signal expressed in 3 digit PST bits User Head number of the devices that store control data Device name System Head bit device number of the local station that turns ON for one scan upon instruction completion System D 1 also turns on if the execution completes abnormally The file registers of each of the local device and the program cannot be used as setting data Control data Setting data Setting range Set by Designate the transmission channel Transmission channel 1 Channel 1 CH1 side 1 2 User The transmission completion result by the PRR instruction is doxes stored Transmission result 0 Normal System Other than 0 Abnormal error code Designate whether or not to add CR LF to the transmission data CR LF addition designation 0 Do not add CR LF 0 1 User 1 Add CRILF which the frame number data may be transmitted S94 Output count Designate the number of user frames to be transmitted 1 to 100 1 For information about errors caused by incorrect data designated by the user see the description in Errors on the next page 2 The Set by column indicates the following User Data set by the user before executing the dedicated instruction System The PLC CPU stores execution results of the dedicated instruction 17 18 17 18 17 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Functions Errors 17 19 MELSEC Q 1 This instruction transmits the user frame data u
304. fer head address setting Default 2601 3301 The number of monitor data stored in the monitor data area is stored to monitor buffer size specification Default 0000 2 Number of monitor data 16 6 16 USING COMMUNICATION DATA MONITORING FUNCTION MELSEC Q g The monitor data area Default addresses 2602H to 32FFH 3302H to 3FFFH The monitor data are stored in one word units as shown in the configuration below See Section 16 3 for an example of the communication data monitoring b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b bO Received data Transmitted data 0 RS 0 OVR 1 0 Data classification Signal condition b8 to b11 x1 FE Framing error b12 to b15 System area OVR Overrun error 0 When receiving data 1 When transmitting data 2 When the RS DTR signal is changed 3 When reception error occurs 4 When detecting a CD to DSR signal change 16 7 PE Parity error When receiving data When transmitting data When the RS DTR signal is changed When a reception error occurs When detecting a CD to DSR signal change 16 7 16 USING COMMUNICATION DATA MONITORING FUNCTION MELSEC Q 16 3 Communication Data Monitoring Example The following is an example of the data monitoring of nonprocedural protocol communication 1 System configuration The system configuration
305. fference is that notification is performed with Y14 OFF when using the modem whereas for notification using PLC CPU monitoring notification is performed for whenever the PLC CPU error is detected or the designated device status is matched with the monitoring conditions see Section 2 2 4 c During constant cycle transmission a notification message for one connection data registered for notifying constant cycle transmission is sent d During condition agreement transmission a notification message for connection data registered in the block where the monitoring conditions match is sent in block units When there are multiple blocks where the monitoring conditions match notification is performed at the Wait time of notification interval notification interval set by the user for use with the modem function The PLC CPU monitoring stops until notification has been performed to all blocks where the monitoring conditions match 1 When performing message notification using the PLC CPU monitoring function set the corresponding interface side as the target of the modem function 2 When setting data for the PLC CPU monitoring function with GX Configurator SC PLC CPU monitoring begins immediately when the Q series C24 starts up 2 USING THE PLC CPU MONITORING FUNCTION MELSEC Q 2 2 6 Execution sequence for using the PLC CPU monitoring function The following explains the execution sequence for using the PLC CPU monitoring
306. for the GX Developer Callback data No 1 Telephone No 1 to access the QCPU Callback data No 2 Telephone No 233 Processing by the callback function Callback data No 3 Telephone No 3 Not used to to Callback data No 10 Telephone No 10 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q 3 If it is being made possible to change the callback destination GX Developer Setting 2 Bu or Setting 5 3 Select the callback destination telephone No if it is being specified at the time when line connections are being made from the initial GX Developer side The Q Series C24 calls back the GX Developer with the callback destination telephone No received from the GX Developer side At this time the external line dialing line types and the connection data set in the following callback data No 1 are used If the callback destination is not specified when line connections are made from the initial GX Developer side the connection data set in the following callback data No 1 are used to call back the GX Developer side At this time the external line dialing line types and telephone number in the connection data become valid Set callback data No 1 in the Modem function system setting Screen Example If line connections are being made with Callback connection during designated number as the connection system Input the telephone No 1 for the callback destination telephone No and make line
307. frame designation 0001 Output head pointer designation Transmission user frame designation 0005 Output count designation Output frame No designation 1st 2 Output frame No designation 2nd Output frame No designation 3rd setting screen Output frame No designation 4th 8000 Output frame No designation 5th 441 Transmission control and others system setting E 8 ASCII BIN conversion designation Enable Screen Transmission user frame No designation system 13 4 13 4 13 COMMUNICATING WITH ASCII CODE ASCII BIN CONVERSION MELSEC Q 13 4 1 Example of data reception The following shows an example of data reception 1 Reception using the receive complete code Complete code 9H the code after ASCII BIN conversion Head data 71 Data corresponding Number of bytes after Two bytes of receive data is read to at tt ot code ASCII BIN conversion the PLC CPU as one byte data B word Send data from the external device so 2 314 51 Bic 9 Unis are MSec that the converted complete code data is 1 i 6 when byte arranged with data having an even 1 1 units are used i i 1 byte number T 0 1 External device side 0 31 32 33 84 35 41 42 43 44 9 _ 5 Set to even byte PLC CPU Reception data read request x83 Store data received count PLC CPU T
308. fter line connection for the modem function it can access the local station QCPU 2 When accessing the PLC of other station via the Ethernet module of a relay station or access station the following settings determine whether access is allowed prohibited To prohibit access to other station from an external device using the MELSECNET H or MELSECNET 10 relay communication function of the Ethernet module place a check mark at the following setting items in the remote password setting for the relay station or access station GX Developer communication port UDP IP dedicated commands MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 relay communication port Seton the GX Developer remote password setting screen If a check mark is not placed at the above setting items access to other station will be allowed 3 See the user s manual basic for the Ethernet module for stations that can be accessed when accessing other station PLCs via the Ethernet module When reading the manual substitute the Q series C24 with the station connected to the external device 3 Data communication procedure This section explains the procedure when the external device performs data communication via the Q series C24 in which the remote password check is performed 1 Initialization of the modem of the Q series C24 side and external device side is performed at each device sides 2 The line is connected from the external device 3 The external device perf
309. function 1 When transmitting the monitoring results through data transmission notification messages using the modem function perform the following settings in order to use the modem function Setting item Explanation section using the GX Configurator SC Section 3 4 2 Registration of data No for initialization and data No for connection Sections 3 4 3 and 3 4 4 Initialization of the series C 24 modem TA Section 3 4 5 2 Register PLC CPU monitoring for the Q series C24 using one of the methods described in Section 2 2 1 3 By registering PLC CPU monitoring the Q series C24 monitors the local station s PLC CPU regardless of the RUN STOP status and sends the monitoring information to the external device 4 When reregistering PLC CPU monitoring in order to change the registration data for the PLC CPU monitoring reregister after canceling the PLC CPU monitoring 1 When registering with communication using the MC protocol detailed explanation found in Section 3 17 of Reference Manual 2 When registering with the PLC CPU s CSET instruction detailed explanation found in Chapter 17 of User s Manual Application To cancel when using GX Configurator SC change the PLC CPU to the STOP status redo the settings and then restart the QCPU 2 USING THE PLC CPU MONITORING FUNCTION MELSEC Q 2 3 Settings for Using the PLC CPU Monitoring Function This section describes system settings required for constant cycle
310. g error 100FH Monitor option X21 is ON X21 M21 H5 68217 M21 UO 1 1 H 68216 H1002 M21 During monitor stop 1002 lt Monitor stop X22 is gt X22 M21 Uo i o Ho 68216 SET M22 Monitor stop being instructed M22 UO Tm 08216 HO RST N22 RST M21 Monitor stop 0000 16 9 16 9 16 USING COMMUNICATION DATA MONITORING FUNCTION MELSEC Q 3 Confirming monitor data by GX Developer The monitor data area for CH1 Address 2602 to 32FFH is monitored on the buffer memory batch monitoring screen of the GX Developer See Section 16 2 2 g for the data configuration of the monitor data area Example The following data are sent from CH1 using non procedure protocol Transmitted data ABCDEFGH ODOAu five word imi Buffer memory batch monitor 1 Iof x Module start address 00 Hex Buffer memory address 2600 DEC HEX Monitor format Bit amp word Display 16bit integer Value C DEC C B Cc E Bit 32bit integer C Word C Real number C ASCII character address F EDC mags 7654 432 10 Option setup 2600 o0oo0o0 0000 0000 c n n o o o o o o o o o o m m Device test Close o o o o
311. g in progress X6 XD 400 2 ERR communication error series C24 ready Mode switching area address 90 to 91 130 to 1314 Switch setting error mode switching error storage area address 2034 Buffer memory special applications area Data communications initialization setting areas described in User s Manual Basic Section 3 9 Addresses 93u to 121 133 to 1 1 Data communications possible Default value change Performed only when necessary 3 Data communications possible Data communications impossible x1 Inform in advance all the connected device that data communications by mode switching cannot be performed x2 When XE and were turned on check the error contents as described in Sections 10 1 2 of User s Manual Basic and take the corresponding action Checking of mode switching designation contents for buffer memory mode switching area and writing of mode switching designation contents within the range that can be designated Re execution of mode switching 3 After checking that mode switching was completed normally inform all the connected devices that data communications are possible and restart data communications To check the Q series C24 mode communication protocol transmission specifications after switching read the buffer memories addresses 252 to 253H 262H to 263 described in Section 10 1 5
312. g the user frames registered in the Q series C24 designate the frame numbers of the user frames you wish to use in the combination and order of priority as described in 1 b15 to bO Default All Buffer memory address 14 First frame 1st to to to First 1 151 First frame 4th combination 2 152 Last frame 1st Fourth to to to combination B5u 155u Last frame 4th Write to 801 0 No designation 1H to 3E7H 1 to 999 Designate the default registration frame for OS ROM registration 3E8H to 4 1000 to 1199 Designate the user frame for flash ROM registration 8001 to 801FH 32767 to 32737 Designate the user frame for buffer memory registration 11 16 11 16 11 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING USER FRAMES MELSEC Q How to specify the first frame No and the last frame No Set the frame numbers using the following setting method 1 11 17 For the receive user frames the first frame and last frame are set as a pair regardless of whether the external device transmits these frames If the external device does not transmit either one of the frames the unsent frame No is set to 0 no setting A maximum of four combinations of first and last frames can be set for the non procedure protocol See Section 11 2 1 Of the maximum four combinations to be set if there is a combination that specifies the first frame specify the first frame f
313. ge bytes 2 Designate 0 Binary 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q 4 An example of a sequence program used for writing registering of data for connection is shown below Example of writing data for connection to the registration number 8002 area X1E ready signal X1F WDT error signal Turns the ready flag ON Connection data registration command Set the number of registration data bytes Clear the data storage device for connection Set the pager receiver designation Notification is not executed Set the telephone number to be connected Set the external line dialing number 0 Sets the line type to tone Writes the connection data in the buffer memory SET M2 Sets the connection data registration completion flag Item name Data register Address Buffer memory Area for registration No 8002 Number of registration DO 80 data bytes D1 t Connection Connection 9 data data D22 Data for connection D23 to Data for Data for notification notification D40 3 3 4 NO COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q 5 Initialization of modem terminal adapter This section explains the initialization of the modem TA connected to the Q series C24 used for communicating data with the external device performing notifications to pager receivers and accessing from GX Developer using the modem function 1 Requirements for initialization Perform
314. ge for connection data to be Connection data not required registered and connection data 80 Number of registration data bytes x Registration data 1 8142 byte number 0 When deleting X designation 80 Number of registration data bytes Read 801 Notifica n processing da 8143 to 8182 Connection data ub ind M acd n pL not required x 1FF6u registered and connection data 3 The following shows the data arrangement of the connection area data area corresponding to registration numbers 8001 to 801 in the buffer memory that is used for the register read and delete operations of the connection data as well as the designated values and stored values Data for connection Registration m Message area for notification 36 bytes Connection data area 44 bytes A Open 20 Wait time for Message transmission 2 m receiver designation 2 Telephone number 18 2 External line dialing 2 Line types 2 Message 30 Message length 2 Open 2 Data name number of bytes 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q Data for connection area 44 bytes Designated stored value and contents Number of bytes Data type Whether or not notification is performed and the notification target module are designated Pager receiver 0 No notification
315. gnal X1 Abnormal transmission completion signal X3 Reception data read request signal X4 Abnormal reception detection signal Transmission request signal X10 Initialization complete signal Y1 Reception data read complete signal X12 Connection signal MO Accessible flag X1E Ready signal M50 Data communication enable flag X1F WDT error signal M70 Line disconnection enable flag Registration of data for initialization See Section 3 4 3 Registration of data for connection i See Section 3 4 4 e Modem TA initialization See Section 3 4 5 Line connection See Section 3 4 6 Data communication See Section 3 4 7 ere A REIS NOU iP Gg Se kpc GR OLI JOE CIT E OEC REN SOC DUREE MU COM BETA d XIE XIF r a HO Ready flag is ON MO X10 X12 A pm QN0 Data communication enable flag is ON M50 XO X3 X4 Yo Yi Y12 tt 0 The line disconnection enable flag is ON X23 9 n s M71 Line disconnection command RST 1 disconnection request signal is set SET M79 When the modem disconnection b gil du 1a FROMP H221 D105 Kl completion signal is ON the error code is read z Line disconnection completion flag 8 0105 is set upon normal completion Performs error handling w
316. he GX Developer connection system See the GX Developer Operating Manual for details about line connection from the GX Developer 1 Auto 6 Callbak request during fixed 2 Auto callback during fixed 7 Callbak request during designated number 3 Auto callback during designated 8 Callback reception waiting number 9 Manual 4 Callback connection during fixed 5 Callback connection during designated number 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q 3 3 5 I O signals with the PLC CPU The I O signals with the PLC CPU for the modem function are described See Section 3 8 of User s Manual Basic for the I O signals not related to the modem function 1 I O signal list Device Device number Signal description Signal description CH1 Transmission normal completion Normal completion YO CH1 Transmission request ON Requesting transmission x1 CH1 Transmission abnormal completion ON Abnormal completion CH1 Reception data read completion ON Data read completed zz CH1 Mode switching request ON Requesting switch CH1 Transmission processing ON Transmission in progress Y2 CH1 Reception data read request ON Requesting read X4 CH1 Reception abnormal detection ON Abnormal detection Y4 Use prohibited Eor systemi T CH2 Transmission normal completion ON Normal completion _ Y7 _ CH2Transmissonrequest ON Reques ngiransmission xo CH2 Transmission processing
317. he buffer memory used with the on demand function Ou Use the current setting value 400 to 1AFFu 2600 to 3FFFH Head address Designate the size word number of the buffer memory used with the on demand function Ou Use the current setting value 1H to 1 00 Size Designate the head address of the transmission area used with the non procedure bidirectional protocol Ou Use the current setting value 400 to 1AFFu 2600x to 3FFFH Head address Designate the size word number of the transmission area used with the non procedure bidirectional protocol Ou Use the current setting value 1 to 1 00 Size The head transmission area 1 word is used as a transmission data count designation area Designate the head address of the reception area used with the non procedure bidirectional protocol Ou Use the current setting value 400 to 1AFFu 2600 to 3FFFx Head address Designate the size word number of the reception area used with the non procedure bidirectional protocol Ou Use the current setting value 1 to 1 00 Size 52 5 On demand function buffer memory size S296 Transmission area head address S2 7 Transmission area size S2 8 area head address Reception area size The head reception area 1 word is used as a reception data count storage area 52 10 to For system 52 111 400 to 1 2600 to 1 to 1A00H 400
318. he connection processing with the partner device in order to perform data communication notification The number of registrations is the number of data for connection registered to the Flash ROM by the user The registration of data for connection is described in Section 3 4 4 Data registration status for connection storage area address 548 to 549 224 to 225 1 2 Buffer memory address 548 2244 Stores in Flash ROM registration status of data for connection used by the Q series C24 in the connection processing with the partner device in order to perform data communication notification The registration status of each data for connection with registration numbers of No BB8H to 5 3000 to 3029 is indicated in the corresponding bit in the range shown in the figure below b15 614 b13 b12 to b2 bi 00 549 225 O 0 po 0 OFF No registration 1 ON Registration exists p Number of data registrations for initialization storage area address 550 Registration status of the data for initialization number 9 4 2500 Registration status of the data for initialization number 903 2515 Registration status of the data for initialization number 9 1 2529 Registration status of the data for connection number 904 2516 22 1 6H Stores in Flash ROM the number of data registrations for initialization sent to the modem on the Q series C
319. he diagram below is for when Completion device MO word units are used puce cp Abnormal completion t Status display device at M1 completion Normal completion 2 i i 6001 902 03H gt __ tai One scan 6014 234 D10 3 6024 ABH 45H D11 ABu 45H 6034 E94 CDH D 2 Eo Buffer memory Sequence program device memory Reception data read request X83 i 1 wove Do J Sets CH1 to the reception channel vove D3 J Sets the allowable number of receive data to 6 8 INPUT U8 D0 D10 Executes reception Mo P 6 4 M100 Sets the normal completion flag Mt T ser M101 Sets the abnormal completion flag POINT 1 When ASCII BIN conversion is enabled the codes of receivable data and the codes of receive data that is stored in the reception area of the buffer memory are as follows NER EN Receivable codes Codes stored in the reception area Arbitrary data section 30H to 39H 41H to 46H to 9 to including complete code section f data codes other than 30H to 39H and 41H to 46H are received for an arbitrary data section an error occurs after ASCII BIN conversion processing by the Q series C24 2 To perform ASCII BIN conversion the complete code after conversion should be used 13 5 13 5 13 COMMUNICATING WITH ASCII CODE ASC
320. he following User Data set by the user before executing the dedicated instruction System The PLC CPU stores execution results of the dedicated instruction 17 2 17 2 17 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Functions Errors 17 3 MELSEC Q 1 This instruction stores data received from an external device to a designated device 2 This instruction can identify the address of the reception area in the buffer memory and read relevant receive data 3 When this instruction is executed reception is completed and the reception data read request signal X3 XA or the reception abnormal detection signal X4 XB is turned off automatically It is not necessary to turn on the reception data read completion signal Y1 Y8 when receive data is read by this instruction 4 The BUFRCVS instruction is used by an interrupt program and its processing is completed in one scan Operation when the BUFRCVS instruction is being executed Ie Scan _ Sequence program 1 1 processing Instruction execution Receive data storage BUFROVS instruction Data reception 1 When the dedicated instruction is completed abnormally the error flag SMO turns on and the error code is stored in SDO See the following manuals regarding the error code and check the errors and take corrective actions Error codes A4FFFH or less QCPU Q Mode User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Ins
321. he message 2 Data communications using user frames When designating the last frame an arbitrary part of data in the area starting from the start of the reception of the current message until time out is read into the Q series C24 and the data in the last frame area is ignored deleted Stores the error code to the data receive result storage area buffer memory addresses 258 2684 for the target interface and turns on the reception abnormal detection signal X4 XB and waits to receive the next data 6 CHANGING THE DATA COMMUNICATIONS MONITORING TIMES MELSEC Q c Data communication using non procedure protocol Format 1 The reception monitoring format 1 of the no reception monitoring time timer 0 is used for receiving a message for which the receive complete code and receive data count has not been preset This occurs when the no reception monitoring time timer 0 runs out on the non procedure protocol Data is received by the Q series C24 until the time is out the receive data read request signal X3 XA turns ON and the following data reception waiting condition occurs Example When receiving using the receive data count Receive data count 4 bytes After 3 bytes of data is received the 3 byte data is stored in the received data storage area of the buffer memory by the time out timer 0 and the receive data read request signal to the PLC CPU turns ON f Timer 0 Set time External device Ee B
322. he module fixing tabs into the mounting holes of the base unit while pressing the installation lever located a t the bottom of the module downward Securely fix the module with screws if it is subject to vibration during use Tighten the screws within the range of specified torque If the screws are loose it may cause the module to fallout short circuits or malfunction If the screws are tightened too much it may cause damage to the screw and or the module resulting in fallout short circuits or malfunction Switch all phases of the external power supply off when mounting or removing the module Not doing so may cause damage to the module Do not directly touch the conductive area or electronic components of the module Doing so may cause malfunction or failure in the module Wiring Precautions N CAUTION e When turning on the power and operating the module after installation and wiring are completed always attach the terminal cover that comes with the product There is a risk of electric shock if the terminal cover is not attached e Perform correct pressure displacement crimp contact or soldering for external wire connections using the tools specified by the manufactures Incorrect connection may cause short circuits fire or malfunction e Attach connectors to the module securely Be sure to fix communication cables or power supply cables leading from the module by placing them in the duct or clamping them
323. he non procedure protocol according to the nx Section 17 6 contents defined in the transmission user frame designation area For setting the units of Nh Sets the units word byte of transmission reception communication data Section 17 4 data count Registers cancels PLC CPU monitoring in order to Section 17 3 function use the PLC CPU monitoring functions For registration reading PUTE Registers a user frame Section 17 7 of user frames to Flash 1 The user should not change data control data request data etc designated by a dedicated instruction until the execution of that instruction is completed 2 Dedicated instructions for the Q series C24 are executed based on the current setting values stored in the buffer memory when the module is started When it is necessary to change any of the setting values change the desired setting value using GX Configurator SC before starting up the respective module Alternatively setting values can be changed using a sequence program before starting up the PLC CPU Area of the buffer memory assigned for applicable functions of dedicated instructions Setting values for data communication Word byte unit setting Receive complete code Received data count etc 17 1 17 1 17 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q 17 2 BUFRCVS Instruction Applicable device MELSECNET H Special Ind Setting data Internal device MELSECNET 10 os File register Direct JOO mo
324. he system be sure to remove the film to provide adequate heat ventilation Starting and Maintenance Precautions N CAUTION Do not disassemble or modify each module Doing so could cause failure malfunction injury or fire Switch all phases of the external power supply off when mounting or removing the module Not doing so may cause failure or malfunction of the module Do not touch the connector while the power is on Doing so may cause malfunction Switch all phases of the external power supply off when cleaning or retightening terminal screws and module installing screws Not doing so may cause failure or malfunction of the module If the screws are loose it may cause the module to fallout short circuits or malfunction If the screws are tightened too much it may cause damages to the screws and or the module resulting in the module falling out short circuits or malfunction e Always make sure to touch the grounded metal to discharge the electricity charged in the body etc before touching the module Failure to do so may cause a failure or malfunctions of the module Operation Precautions N CAUTION e When performing the control of the PLC in operation especially changing data program and operation status status control by connecting a personal computer etc to the intelligent function module read this manual carefully and confirm if the overall safety is maintained Failure to perform
325. hen D105 is SET M72 other than 0 error code Modem disconnection request signal RST Y12 is reset X14 RST 7 RST M72 RST M79 X12 Line disconnection processing M PLF M76 Line disconnection from external device M76 Y12 RST Y10 Various request signals are reset RST x10 When any connection signal or SET 2 completion signal is ON the modem X14 disconnection request signal is set SET M77 M77 Y12 X10 X12 X14 When the modem disconnection E Y12 completion signal is ON the request signal is reset Y12 X10 xt X12 X13 X14 M M M ME 14 M RST m When the modem disconnection completion signal is OFF the line disconnection request signal is reset 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q 3 5 Sample Programs This section shows sample programs to test the connection with the remote station s PLC CPU to which Q series C24 is installed Each program contains a minimum set of processing necessary for performing a exchange test Modify the data for initialization and data for connection to match each system environment When adding error handling procedures add them separately by seeing the explanation in this chapter The uses of major devices that are used in these sample programs are listed below Application of device comment list Device Application Device Application Device Application Reception data read request Line connection completion M100 Initialization
326. ialization See section 3 4 5 Dial H Dial E Dial Dial Retry In case of three times Connection channel and retry operation are performed using the buffer memory setting 3 74 3 74 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION Buffer memory for MELSEC Q Example When initiating the line connection from the partner device after the completion of initialization connection 0 Address 5 53 Connection OFF request Y11 Initialization ON completion Y10 ON Dial in progress 41 OFF Normal connection Connection in progress x12 Normal connection RS 232 CD terminal i Unlock processing for Reception Result code the remote password receive 4 venturi Password Remote Set Display a result code Response emote 1 Response using the AT command in for system password P the local station side modem Y giur os oS Communication only when connected with GX Developer POINT 1 The connection channel the series C24 side is set in the modem function system setting screen of GX Configurator SC 2 Abnormal processing when the partner device initiate the line connection is left entirely to the partner device There is no method on the Q series C24 side to check a line connection error occurrence at the partner device 3 When a remote password check is performed for the QCPU normal co
327. ic This manual explains an overview of the module and describes the applicable system configuration the specifications the procedures prior to operations the basic methods of communicating with the external device maintenance and inspection and the troubleshooting of the Q series serial communication module Sold separately Q Corresponding MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual This manual explains information on how the external device reads data from and writes data to the PLC CPU through communication using the MC protocol by utilizing the Q series C24 Q series E71 Sold separately GX Configurator SC Version 2 Operating Manual Protocol FB support function This manual explains the function and usage of the protocol FB support function that supports the creation of the data communication program of the module and set up of each parameter Sold separately Manual number Model code SH 080006 13JL86 SH 080008 13JF89 SH 080393E 13JU46 The Manual s Use and Structure How to use this manual This manual describes the use of special functions for the Q series C24 QJ71C24N QJ71C24N R2 QU71C24N R4 QJ71C24 QJ71C24 R2 with each chapter covering a specific function Please read this manual and use the contents below as a reference 1 2 To read an overview of special functions An overview of the major special functions is describes in Chapter 1 To use the function that monitors e
328. ies C24 are indicated assuming that the Q series C24 is installed to slot 0 of the basic base unit 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q 3 3 6 Buffer memory The buffer memory area shown with that can be used with modem function is described See Section 3 9 for the buffer memory not related to the modem function The writing and reading of setting values to and from the buffer memory are performed using the special utility package GX Configurator SC of the Q series C24 Perform settings and monitoring according to Chapter 8 of the User s Manual Basic This section provides supplementary explanations on setting values used to perform settings and monitoring with GX Configurator SC 1 Buffer memory list tion Address Dec Hex Default Correspondence protocol Applica Name For LED and Communication error clear request for CH1 and to turn LED off communication error clear Communication error clear request for CH2 and to turn LED off 2 2 Register read delete directions 3 3 2 ORGeh Frame No direction 4 4 Hos Register read delete result storage access 5 5 Number of data bytes registration designation 610 45 1 2D Modem connection channel directions 0 None 1 CH1 2 CH2 Notification execution designation 0 Does not execute 1 Execute 46 2 Number of connection retries designation 1 to 5 Number of retries 90 to 300 Connection retry
329. ies C24 interface The Q series C24 uses the transmission control function set by the user to control data communications with external devices Set the transmission control function to match the specifications of the external device The table below shows the Q series C24 transmission control functions Interface that can be Protocol that can be controlled Transmission control controlled of control m function Non Bidirec 232 422 485 MC procedure tional Cannot be used control DTR DSR signal simultaneously with DC control 1 Ignored control DSR control One is selected The cable wiring depends on whether or CD signal control 2 not control is used With half duplex communications control is necessary 7 Possible transmission control used DC1 DC3 trans mission control DC1 DC3 reception DC code control 1 control DC2 DC4 trans mission control DC2 DC4 reception control Invalid 1 When using full duplex communications with bidirectional protocol data communications see Section 7 3 of User s Manual Basic 2 See Section 3 2 1 1 of User s Manual Basic and check Q series C24 operation according to the RS and CS signal control contents and CD terminal check designation When the Q series C24 is started DTR DSR signal control and RS CS signal control are enabled 7 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING DC CODE TRANSMISSION CONTROL MELSEC Q 7 1 Control
330. ies the user defined conditions and an error is detected in the PLC CPU 2 Simplifying the device monitoring procedure When device monitoring is performed by communication using the MC protocol the external device must repeatedly perform monitor request transmission and monitor data reception processing after it executes monitor registration By designating the constant cycle transmission for the PLC CPU monitoring function the device data can be monitored without performing the monitor request reception processing 2 USING THE PLC CPU MONITORING FUNCTION 3 Notification of an error in the PLC CPU MELSEC Q In the condition agreement transmission and notification error information can be sent to the external device without a sequence program whenever a PLC CPU error occurs MELSEC Q25HCPU QJ71C24 Monitoring device information Move feH Jor RUNE ERRO UsEREI eat CPU error information ma EN PULL E LA RS 232 we MITSUBISHI uci 1 Error occurrence External device M Abnormal detection 2 USING THE PLC CPU MONITORING FUNCTION MELSEC Q 2 2 About the PLC CPU Monitoring Function This section explains the PLC CPU monitoring function 2 2 1 Data registration for using the PLC CPU monitoring function The following explains the data registration by the user to use the PLC CPU monitori
331. ification sss enne 3 78 3 4 8 Line diScoNNeCtON nint rearen nnne 3 84 3 5 Sample Programs ERU e ERU dee e RD dede e Rede dace e Ree dh T E Rees 3 87 3 5 1 Sample program for data 1 1 3 88 3 5 2 Sample program for data 2 3 94 3 5 3 Sample program for 3 103 4 RECEIVING DATA WITH AN INTERRUPT PROGRAM 4 1to4 6 4 1 Settings for Receiving Data Using an Interrupt Program 4 2 4 2 Interrupt Program Startup Timing sessssseeseeeeeeeeeenenenneeneee nennen enne nnne nnne nennen nennen 4 2 4 3 Reception Control Method Using an Interrupt Program essen 4 3 4 4 Programiilig 5 orit itr nope oie or E eS 4 4 4 41 Program example 4 m ace Re D A i ep a e o a Le LE c LA LO LE e d oe n D es 4 4 4 4 2 Precautions when receiving data with an interrupt program ssnn 4 5 5 CHANGING SEND AND RECEIVE DATA LENGTH UNITS TO BYTE UNITS WORD BYTES UNITS SETTING 5 1t05 2 6 1 No Reception Monitoring Time timer 0 Setting 6 2 6 2 Response Monitoring Time timer 1
332. ination that specifies the first frame In the description of this program example conditions for data reception using a user frame are as follows 1 The series C24 I O signal The series C24 is installed at QCPU I O signal addresses X Y80 to X Y9F 2 Q series C24 interface used in data communications with the external device The Q series C24 CH1 side RS 232 interface is used Data to be registered on the GX Configurator SC Transmission control and other System settings screen and Non procedure system settings screen used for data communication using a user frame Change default values for the items listed in the table below Use default values for other items Buffer memory address to Explanation Set contents Remarks store registration value section Set to eith ding to th Word byte units designation Word byte 96H example Receive transparent code when Section 8 459 i Yes No 120H Additional code 104 DLE User s Manual designation Transparent code 02 STX Basic Select Do not rt in th ASCII BIN conversion designation Do not convert 121H er van esate a example Received data count 6 to 511 A4H Set according to the example Receive complete code None 5 User frame use control designation Use ADH First frame No designation seat BS Section 8 4 7 of Y Last frame No designation 1 9s B i DONE User s M
333. ine Connection Auto callback during designated number Selection of the connection system and line connections Setting of callback function 2 Tem line disconnection designation settings by the 4 M Peace tenner ewes GX Configurator SC 3 Line on xction GX Developer ZA telephone No 1 Registration in the Q Series C24 Callback data No 1 Telephone No 1 Callback data No 2 Telephone No 2 Callback data No 3 Telephone No 3 Processing for the GX Developer 2 to access the QCPU Callback data No 10 Telephone No 0 7 Processing by the callback function 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q If the GX Configurator SC s Callback function designation setting is performed in the Q Series C24 line connections to the GX Developer are possible by the connection system shown below The correspondence between the GX Configurator SC Callback function designation setting items and the GX Developer connection system setting items is shown GX Developer connection system 1 Q Series C24 Side Callback function specification Lm 2 Auto Callback connection during designated number tting 3 Auto Callback connection during max designated number is 10 Seng 4 Callback connection during fixed mei E hamber e O designated number is 10 Connection possible 1 This shows t
334. ing reading and deleting the user frames in the flash ROM try to register them using the utility package GX Configurator SC of the Q series C24 Registering reading and deleting operations from GX Configurator SC are explained in Section 8 4 1 of the User s Manual Basic This section explains how to register read or delete user frames from the PLC CPU 1 Type of user frames Registration destination Default registration 1 to 3E7H ROM for series C24 OS Read enabled frames 1 to 999 Dat MP 3E8 to 4AFu communication series as eo 100 to 1199 3 function User frame Register read delete enabled 8001 to 801 Q series C24 buffer memory 32767 to 32737 1 Addresses 1 00 to 1FF6x User frame for the PLC CPU monitoring B001H to BOOAn B0611 ROM for the Q series C24 OS Register read delete disabled function B080n to 082 1 Data contained in user frames used for registering and reading is arranged in the same way as data in user frames used for registering in or reading to the flash ROM Use the arrangement described in this section as a reference and register and read user frames User frames can also be registered in the buffer memory but the user frame for the fixed format section should be registered in the flash ROM whenever possible 2 A user frame cannot be overwritten for registration To reregister a user frame having the same number first
335. ing conditions match are transmitted in batch mode When the monitoring conditions of two or more block match the device information and PLC CPU status information are transmitted for each block When there is an ASCII BIN conversion of communication data using non procedure protocol all of the device monitoring head device number will be converted to hexadecimal ASCII data and sent The same conversion is performed during either constant cycle transmission or condition agreement transmission d The user frame numbers that can be designated for data transmission of PLC CPU monitoring results are listed below 1H to 7 Default registration frame numbers to 4 Frame numbers registered by the user in the flash ROM 8001H to 801FH Frame numbers registered by the user in the buffer memory 001 to 1 Dedicated frame numbers for this function listed in e below For details on how to designate user frame numbers see Transmission using user frames in Chapter 11 e For instructing to transmit the device information and PLC CPU status information when sending monitoring results as data use the following dedicated user frame numbers function Frame number Information to be transmitted Constant cycle Condition agreement Number 4 Device information for the block registered in Oo transmission transmission B008H Number 8 B00AH Number 10
336. ion 1 SET M100 Sets the normal completion flag M H set M101 Sets the abnormal completion flag POINT 1 When the receive transparent code designation is set to Enable and ASCII BIN conversion is set to Disable the codes for receivable arbitrary data sections and those for receive data that is stored in the buffer memory s reception area are as follows Codes stored in the Receivable codes reception area Receive transparent code code 01H to FFH Delete designation section Transparent code code 00H to FFH 00H to FFH Data length data section 2 When the data length used is in byte units and the data length is an odd byte 00H will be stored in the upper byte of the last data storage position in the reception area 12 17 12 17 12 TRANSPARENT CODES AND ADDITIONAL CODES MELSEC Q 2 When the receive transparent code designation is set to Enable and the ASCII BIN conversion is set to Enable Additional code 10H DLE transparent code 02H STX T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T b T Data length Data section Sum 00044 External device side Q code bud X6 m neum s 0 4 0 0 0 2 1 1 4 1 4 2 3 4 1 2 0 DIO A 05430434u30430430432u314314u34431434432433434431403243004443044 14024044 1 L 1 L 1 1 1 1 1 L 1 L 1 L n 1 i 1 1 PLC CPU side Exclude the additional code and set to an even byte C K Two bytes of r
337. ion User frames registered by the user are frames that contain arbitrary data that matches the specifications of the external device The data contents are selected by the user 2 User frame registering a Up to 231 user frames can be registered read and deleted at the Q series C24 1 series C24 Flash ROM number that can be registered Maximum 200 frame No 3E8H to 4AFH 2 Q series C24 buffer memory number that can be registered Maximum 31 frame No 8001H to 801FH b Up to 80 bytes 80 en characters of data can be registered as 1 user frame 9 CONTENTS AND REGISTRATION OF THE USER FRAMES FOR DATA COMMUNICATION MELSEC Q c User frames can include data for handling the variable data sum check code Q series C24 station No etc shown in 4 as a part of user frames d User frames can be overwritten to the series C24 buffer memory The old contents are destroyed e The registration destination for the user frame can be divided into the following usage After data communication has started register the user frames without changes to buffer memory and use Frame No to 4AFH After data communication has started register the user frames with changes to buffer memory and use Frame No 8001 to 801 Data that can be registered as user frame Up to 80 bytes of data can be registered by combining 1 byte of register code 01H to FEH data and 2 bytes of register code FFH 00H to FFH FFH dat
338. ion is in progress 2 The line disconnection processing disconnects the line connection with the external device as well as the connection with the Q series C24 modem Even when an error occurs during the line disconnection the disconnection processing will be forced If data communication is to be resumed after line disconnection either one of the following processing will be initiated depending on the initialization complete signal X10 1 If the initialization complete signal is OFF Start from the initialization of the modem TA 2 Ifthe initialization complete signal is ON Start from the line connection with the external device There is no buffer memory for line disconnection processing 2 Precautions during the line disconnection 1 Prior to data communication with external devices determine when and which station will perform the line connection dialing and line disconnection processing to the external device 2 Ifthe line is disconnected during data transmission transmission processing will be performed depending on the signal status of the Q series C24 RS 232C interface 3 Ifthe line is disconnected during data reception data reception will be disabled This may cause an error occurrence such as a reception time out 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q 3 Program example for line disconnection A program example for line disconnection is shown below X0 Normal transmission completion si
339. ion methods of monitoring results and transmission data to the external device 2 9 2 2 6 Execution sequence for using the PLC CPU monitoring function eeeess 2 20 2 3 Settings for Using the PLC CPU Monitoring Function 2 21 2 3 1 System setting items for the PLC CPU monitoring function sesenne 2 21 2 3 2 How to register and cancel the PLC CPU monitoring function eee 2 26 2 4 Precautionary Notes for Using the PLC CPU Monitoring Function eseennn 2 28 gt cue cete e tt ee ETE LO E ced ee e tu ed e tete re eoe 3 1 31 1 Features it de sted ed ees oe ed det dt eee 3 2 3 12 Funictiom list pte o apt 3 5 3 1 3 Comparisons with related 3 6 3 2 System Configuration 5 3 n Ai eae aie ieee eee ie eee onde iced 3 7 3 2 1 System configuration when performing data communication with an external device 3 7 3 2 2 System configuration when using the notification function eene 3 8 3 2 3 System configuration when connecting GX Developer 3 9 3 2 4 Precautions for system configurations ssssssssseseeeeeeeeneneenenee nemen 3 10 S ROMS oeil EET 3 12 3 3 1 Trans
340. ions are executed on the GX Configurator SC s Data for modem connection screen 2 Display and operate the screen according to Section 8 4 3 of the User s Manual Basic Set the required items with the table below Data communication Data for modem connection screen setting item Notification GX Developer MC non procedure bidirections Pager receiver designation pouce Telephone number ee e External line dialing 0 for catback Data for modem Line types 0 for catback connection 1 to 30 Wait time for message transmission unit s Message x o J p Comment 0 Oo Jj Required item Setting possible Setting not required Registration example Setting example to perform data communication Data for modem connection cf x Module information Module model name QJ71C24 Start 1 0 No 0000 Module type Serial Communications Module Setting item Setting value Data for modem connection 1 H bb8 No notification Pager receiver designation h Telephone number 0123456789 External line dialing No external line dialing Y Line types Pulse Y Wait time for message transmission units sec Message Comment Data for modem connection 2 HObb3 No notification Pager receiver designation Telephone number External line dialing Line types diuo No externalline dialing Flash ROM setting
341. iple external devices using a multi x x Chapter 14 drop connection m n connection Changing the interface mode after starting data communication Changes to communication protocol and transmission Chapter 15 specifications Available X Not available 1 OVERVIEW 1 2 Functions Added Changed by Function Version B Of the special functions for the Q series C24 described in this manual functions MELSEC Q added changed in the Q series C24 of the function version B and communication functions that can use those functions are listed below See Section 2 7 for the function version serial NO and software version of products CPU module GX Developer GX Configurator SC related to the Q Series C24 which can use added changed functions See Appendix 1 1 concerning a comparison of functions in the different Q Series 24 function versions Non Explana ON Bidirec Function Description of function MC proce tional tion dure chapter Transmission of PLC CPU itoring i i In the PLC CPU itoring function PLC CPU itoring inf tion i information through In the monitoring une ion monitoring information is Chapter 2 combined use of the modem transmitted to the external device via a modem function When accessing the QCPU from a remote location for the following data communication using the Q series C24 modem function data communication Remote passwor
342. isconnected from the GX Developer within the specified time in this area the Q Series C24 forcibly disconnects the line terminating callback processing 2 Callback delay time Setting range 1 to 999 s Default 20 s This specifies the time from the temporary line disconnect on the GX Developer side until the Q Series C24 reconnects callback See the troubleshooting section of the User s Manual Basic for the symptoms of trouble that may occur during access from the GX Developer to the QCPU using the callback function the causes and remedies 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q 4 Setting and monitoring by the GX Configurator SC for use of the callback function a Setting monitoring test items Carry out setting monitoring and testing of the callback function using the following GX Configurator SC screen 1 Setting items through the modem function system setting screen This shows the callback function setting items See Section 3 3 6 for the modem function setting items including the following items Modem function system setting xl Module information Module model QJ71C24 Start 1 0 No 0000 Module type Serial Communications Module Selling item Setting value a Callback function designation Auto In the case of no callback Auto Es In the case of callback Settingl Setting amp In the case of callback Settingl Auto Callback connection during fixed Setting2 Aut
343. it time of notification Notification interval time Unit s 8203 200Bx Use prohibited System area H Remote password mismatch notification count designation No designation 1 to FFFFu Count for notification 8202 200 For remote password function Remote password mismatch notification accumulated count designation 8205 2000 No designation 1 to FFFFH Accumulated count for notification For modem 8206 200 function designation 3 Circuit disconnect wait time PLC CPU watch use 0000 to FFFu Wait time Unit s 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q Address Dec Hex rere Default Correspondence protocol ication ame value MC Non 8207 200 Use prohibited System area 8449 to 8458 For callback Data No for callback designation 1 to 10 RW 21014 to 210 Function BB8 4 to 801 Data number for callback Callback permit accumulated count 0 or more Accumulated count 8944 22 0 8945 22F tu Callback denial accumulated count 0 or more Accumulated count 8946 22F2x For esl sse Auto callback connection permit accumulated count function 0 or more Accumulated count Auto callback connection denial accumulated count 0 or more Accumulated count Accumulated count of callback receive procedure cancel 0 or more Accumulated count 8947 22F3x 8978 22 4 8949 to 8954 22F5 22FA
344. ither case Write the data number for connection in the initial setting for GX Configurator SC When the notification issued request signal Y14 is turned OFF from ON before initialization of the Q series C24 modem TA the processing will end abnormally When the notification issued request signal Y14 is turned OFF from ON during initialization of the Q series C24 modem TA notification processing will be conducted after the completion of the modem TA initialization Notification processing is completed in the order of line connection message transmission and line disconnection from Q series C24 for the transmission station of the radio wave to the notification destination Therefore even if the power to the notification destination equipment is off the notification processing will end normally as long as the above processing is completed When the notification issued request signal Y142ON is turned ON before notification processing is complete some messages may not be sent POINT Turn on the notification issued request signal Y14 before the initialization processing of the Q series C24 modem TA is completed and turn it off after the initialization complete signal X10 is turned ON notification request 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q 4 Program for notification example An example of program for notification is shown below When the initialization and connection data have been registered fr
345. itialization processing automatically in accordance with the following 1 Ifthe auto modem initialization is specified Modem TA initialization processing is executed in the initialization connection timeout time interval while the DSR signal is OFF without relation to the ON OFF status of the modem initialization request signal Y10 2 Ifthe auto modem initialization is not specified The modem TA initialization processing is executed when the DSR signal restarts without relation to the ON OFF status of the modem initialization request signal Y10 If modem TA initialization is executed automatically Set by the GX Configurator SC By having the GX Configurator SC perform the settings for automatic modem initialization modem initialization is executed automatically when the Q Series C24 starts up The modem initialization completion signal X10 goes On a Settings for auto initialization of the modem TA Select auto initialize for the auto modem initialization designation in the GX Configurator SC s Modem function system setting screen b Cautions when initializing the modem TA automatically 1 If the modem s initialization processing is completed abnormally the Q Series C24 executes the following processing The initialization connection abnormal completion signal X13 does not go ON An error code is stored in the buffer memory s modem function error code storage area Address 545 221 Modem initialization
346. ive area Word units Receive data count Number of bytes stored to receive area 2 Fractions are truncated Byte units Receive data count Number of bytes stored to receive area OOH is stored to the upper byte of the last data storage location of the receive area 2 When ASCII BIN conversion enabled make the arbitrary data area of the receive data an even number of bytes excluding the additional code 11 4 11 4 11 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING USER FRAMES 11 5 MELSEC Q 1 Reception with the first frame combination 1 A to C reception using Format 0 a Reception of combination 1 A 1 In this method any data section of the reception message that can be handled by the PLC CPU side is enclosed by the first frame and the last frame and transmitted from the external device 2 Any reception data prior to the first frame will be ignored 3 The Q series C24 will begin reception processing when data of the same arrangement as the first frame is received When data of the same arrangement as the last frame is received arbitrary data is stored in the reception area of the buffer memory and a read request is performed to the PLC CPU 4 The received data count initially set in the Q series C24 should be a data count that exceeds the size of the arbitrary data to be received 5 Reception processing via the receive complete code initially set in the Q series C24 will not be performed The reception data for the receive c
347. ks the callback destination telephone No received from the GX Developer side and it is a telephone No that is registered in the Q Series C24 callback is executed If a telephone No that is not registered in the Q Series C24 is received from the GX Developer side the Q Series C24 disconnects the line and does not execute callback Data for checking the callback destination telephone No by the Q Series C24 are registered in callback Data No 1 to 10 Set the data registered in callback data No 1 to 10 in the Modem function system setting screen Example If line connections are being made with Callback connection during designated number as the connection system Input the telephone No 1 for the callback destination telephone No and make line connections Line Connection Callback connection during designated number GX Developer telephone No 1 Callback Input the telephone No 2 Line Connection for the callback destination Callback connection telephone No and make line during designated number connections GX Developer 7 8 telephone No 2 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q 5 If line connections from the GX Developer are made with Auto Callback during fixed Callback during designated number as the connection system Setting 1 9H to Setting 3 When accessing the QCPU from the GX Developer select whether to use the
348. ld select the command that requests communications code Transmission destination station No Massage wait Sum check Transmission destination station No Transmission Source station No Permission granted permission not granted OX Massage of 2 External device that obtained the line usage right After 6 External device Station 1 External device Station No 1Du External device Station No 1Cu Station No 15u 3 5 C24 Q series C24 QC24 N UC24 After communicating data with the PLC CPU within the maximum data communications time from among the external devices the slave station that received the permission granted response goes to step 5 The master station that transmitted the permission granted response and the slave stations that did not obtain line usage right check the line usage time of the slave station that obtained the line usage right and ignore receive data other than that addressed to their local station If the line usage time exceeds the maximum communications time the external devices perform the processing of step 7 After data communications are complete the slave station that exchanged data with the PLC CPU transmits a communications complete report to the master station A message structure example is shown in 6 Slave stations that do not communicate data with the PLC CPU check if a communications comp
349. le When initializing the modem connected to CH1 of the Q series C24 using two set of data for initialization registration numbers 8001 and 80024 that are registered in the buffer memory Designated Address Buffer memory value Frame number being transmitted 0 B8 Output head pointer hel Out of the output frame numbers from which one the transmission H _ designation will be initiated is designated 9 Number of outputs 2 Out of the output frame numbers the number of units to be 4st unit 9C4u transmitted is designated Output Srdunit 80014 Data for initialization registration number is designated frame 4th unit 8002u BE sthunit 6th unit 9D1H 1 Must be designated prior to the modem initialization request Initialization request Y10 c4 2 4 Initialization completion X10 Eu Normal completion 1 D Initialization connection abnormal 7 Abnormal completion completion X13 d n After the designated number of initialization retries have been executed Initialization data Registration No 8002 Q series C24 EX Initialization data Registration No 8001u Modem i 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q b Modem TA initialization program example An example of the modem TA initialization program on th
350. lete report was transmitted and do not communicate data with the master station during that time 14 10 14 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING EXTERNAL DEVICE AND PLC CPU M N CONFIGURATION 6 External device of slave station to perform the communications complete report 1 MELSEC Q The master station that received the communications complete report transmits a response to the slave station that transmitted the communications complete report Example Massage of 5 x 1 Command ZY is a communications complete report command for description purpose The user should select the communications complete report command Transmission destination station No Transmission Source station No Command Massage wait Sum check code 1B 1 ZY 3B 31 42 31 434 5A 59 32 43 43 S Master station external device 1 7 Transmission destination station No Transmission source station No B 1 3A4 31 424 31 43 Massage of 6 After completion of 6 above or when the line usage time of the slave station that obtained the line usage right exceeds the maximum data communications time The master station waits for a communications request from a slave station When the master station receives a communication request it performs processing from step 2 b The slave stations do not communicate d
351. lization command ATEIQ0V1 amp C1 amp D28H1 amp 08R 28505 2 HO9c5 User control data nitialization command 3 HO3c6 User control data nitialization command 4 H Sc7 User control data nitialization command 5 09 8 User control data nitialization command 6 09 9 User control data hitialization command Flash ROM setting Details wines File save Hexadecimal input Read from pineal Setting range 0000 FFFF module Make test file Execute test Close Use code to specify a field to register if GX Configurator SC is used for data for modem initialization Example To register the Q2 of data Q2 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q b Forthe buffer memory of the Q series C24 1 The initialization data write registration and read operations are performed by designating an applicable area that corresponds to registration numbers 8001 to 801 for the user frame registration area addresses 1 00 to 1 When deleting the initialization data write to the number of registration data bytes designation area 2 The table below shows an overview of the buffer memory used in the write read and delete operations of the initialization data as well as the designated values for each area For more details see Chapter 9 Use the table by replacing the user frame with the initialization data Address Specification required
352. llowing describes the QJ71C24N R2 R4 communication data monitoring function 16 1 Communication Data Monitoring Function 16 1 1 Overview Communication data monitoring function is a function to monitor communication data between the QJ71C24N R2 R4 and an external device on communication lines The system startup time can be reduced by analyzing the communication data on the communication lines when debugging the system The following two methods are for the communication data monitoring 1 Communication data monitoring by the PLC program Explained in this section Monitoring is performed by the monitor start instruction written in the communication data monitoring specification area of the buffer memory 2 Communication data monitoring by GX Configurator SC The debugging support function of the GX Configurator SC protocol FB support in used for monitoring circuit trace See the Operating Manual Protocol FB support function for the debugging support function of the GX Configurator SC protocol FB support F Circuit trace TraceFile15 QJ71C24N nl xl Object module Sendpacke HE Mill 01 30 31 31 30 31 30 31 30 30 30 31 30 30 31 45 s U ASCI 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 H Receive packet HEX s ale 4 ASCI 0 2 so RS signal ER signal DR signal CS signal CD signal Reception error Zz m i Error Dis
353. lowing manuals regarding the error code and check the errors and take corrective actions Error codes 4FFFH or less QCPU Mode User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 7000nu or higher Section 10 2 of the User s Manual Basic 17 23 17 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Program example MELSEC Q A program that registers the user frame having registration number 3E8u When the input output signals of the Q series C24 are X Y80 to X Y9F X50 M Ls M5 0 Jp yt MOV H3E8 H3846 H3030 030 H3030 H8 H2000 IL amp PUTE 8 00 D4 0 wi Wi n 17 24 M50 D2 M100 M101 Registration request Sets the registration request Sets the frame number to be registered Sets the number of registration data bytes Sets the registration data for the frame to be registered in D4 to D8 Sets the flash ROM write allow Executes user frame registration Normal completion Abnormal completion 17 24 17 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q MEMO oe 17 25 INDEX A Additional codes 12 1 ASCII BIN conversion 13 1 B Buffer memory for modem 3 33 for on demand data transmission 10 2 for user 9 14 BUFROVS
354. me first n frames Send data designation area data User frame last m frames Data name User frame 5 User frame Combination first n frames Arbitrary data area last m frames mE 1 2 O Total 99 frames Designated data exists 2 When ASCII BIN conversion disabled i Codes that Codes wh Note 0 to Added by series C24 00 to Transmission area data When ASCII BIN conversion enabled Codes that can Codes when be designated transmitting Note Added by the Q series C24 30H to 39 The codes shown at the left to 9H AH to FH d 41 to 46H are 4 bit codes Transmission area data 30 to 39H The codes shown at the left at 41H to 46H are 4 bit codes to 9 to FH 1 Four bits of OH to FH data are converted to 30H to 39H and 41H to 46H ASCII data and transmitted as the data codes of the data to be transmitted including the transparent code data 2 Send data arbitrary data area 1 When the send data count designated by the PLC CPU during transmission in byte units is an odd number of bytes the data of the lower byte of the last send data storage location of the send data storage area are transmitted 2 When ASCII BIN conversion is enabled the data to be transmitted is transmitted as 2 characters byte 11 30 11 30 11 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING USER FRAMES MELSEC Q Handling of the Q s
355. mission nnne nennen 3 12 3 3 2 Specification of connectable modems terminal adapters 3 13 3 3 3 Compatibility with the QCPU remote password function sssssssssssseeeene 3 16 A 6 A 6 3 3 4 Compatibility with the callback function sseneneenennenenenem nnns 3 22 3 3 5 I O signals with the PLC CPU nnne nnne ntn a nnns 3 31 3 39 06 Buffer MENO in cette tee gg ted P d P d ate 3 33 3 3 7 Precautions when using the modem function ssssseeeneeeneneeneennnn 3 46 3 4 Start up of the Modem nennen nente nemen nter terrens 3 52 3 4 1 Start up procedures when communicating data with external 3 52 3 4 2 Initial settings of the serial communication module sse 3 55 3 4 3 Register read delete of the initialization data seeene 3 58 3 4 4 Register read delete of the data for connection ssssssssseeeeeeeeneenenns 3 63 3 4 5 Initialization of modem terminal adapter sse 3 68 3 4 6 Line connection nett senten 3 72 3 4 7 Data communication and not
356. mission monitoring time timer 2 Maximum external device processing delay time transmission time byte t X transmit byte count ids 100 ms units truncated Under the following conditions the transmission monitoring time timer 2 is set to 300 ms Transmission rate 9600 bps Number of transmit bits byte 11 start bit 1 data bits 8 stop bits 2 Maximum processing delay time 200 ms Transmit byte count 3 bytes 6 CHANGING THE DATA COMMUNICATIONS MONITORING TIMES MELSEC Q 6 4 Message Wait Time Setting The message wait time is used during data communications using a MC protocol It is the time for an external device that cannot receive the data immediately after it has been transmitted When the Q series C24 transmits a response message in reply to a command message received from the external device transmission of the response message is delayed by the message wait time or longer The following explains the message wait time operation for data communications using QnA compatible 2C 3C AC frame For A compatible 1C frames the message wait time is designated in the command message External device Response PLC CPU i Message wait time 1 Q series C24 operation by message wait time 1 When message wait time is 0 ms If a response message can be transmitted the Q series C24 immediately transmits the response message A transmission wait time is not set 2 When the message wait time is 10 ms
357. monitoring time timer O Monitors the receive interval in byte units and returns the elapsed time to 0 each time one byte is received At time out the Q series C24 performs the following processing a Data communication using MC protocol Stores the error code to the MC protocol transmission error code storage area buffer memory addresses 25 26 for the target interface Transmits a NAK message to the external device and enters the command message receive wait state 6 CHANGING THE DATA COMMUNICATIONS MONITORING TIMES MELSEC Q b Data communications using non procedure protocol Format 0 1 Data communications not using user frames Passes the receive data up to time out to the Q series C24 Stores the error code to the data receive result storage area buffer memory addresses 258 268 for the target interface and turns on the reception abnormal detection signal X4 XB and waits to receive the next data Example Receiving according to the received complete code Received complete code CR LF 000 When the LF is not received within the set time for timer 0 after reception of the CR the abnormal reception detection signal to the PLC CPU turns ON and the received data at the CR is stored in the received data storage area of the buffer memory Timer 0 Set time i External device Q series C24 Abnormal reception detection signal X4 XB 1 CR is treated as 1 byte of data included in t
358. mory Transmission instruction X50 T K1 DO Sets CH1 to the transmission channel K4 02 j Sets transmission data count to 4 H1102 D10 Sets the transmission data in D10 to D13 H4241 D11 1 012 1 HOAOD D13 1 GP BI DOUT D10 Executes transmission MO M1 SET M100 Sets the normal completion flag Mt sET M101 Sets the abnormal completion flag 12 19 12 19 12 TRANSPARENT CODES AND ADDITIONAL CODES MELSEC Q 2 When the send transparent code designation is set to Enabled and the ASCII BIN conversion is set to Enabled Additional code 10H DLE transparent code 02H STX 1st group Additional cede 10H DLE transparent code 03H ETX 2nd group External device side Data section Data length 00044 PLC CPU side L HY 0 4 0 02 i 11 4 5 34 30 30 30 32 31 31 34 3 1 1 1 L 1 L 1 ras Fi Transmission command X50 Data length No of transmission data Excluding additional code PLC CPU BIDOUT For word unit Byte count before ASCII BIN conversion 8 2 4 For byte unit Completion device MO 9r PIS unt Byte count before ASCII BIN conversion 8 ON Abnormal completion v Status display device M1 at completion Normal The following diagram is for word unit completion i Address One scan 03 4 4004 04y 010 401 11u 024
359. mpleted See Section 3 4 7 Connection in progress signal X12 ON Notification data je reception Line disconnect completed s Line disconnect Line disconnect completed Notification issued request Y 14 ON Modem initialization completion signal X10 ON Shows the value stored for the modem function sequence status address 546 221 4 If accessing the QCPU from the GX Developer indicates processing performed by the user Q Series C24 Modem Modem GX Developer Line connection side E IN MEE on the Initialize the personal initialized by the procedure in 1 i computer side modem Modem initialization e Registration of the modem connected to the personal computer Line connection wait state DET i Registration complete Modem initialization completion 1 Execute line connection signal X10 ON Connect to the line after setting the necessary items in the line connection screen Line connection normal response i i Line connection normal response Connection in progress signal X12 ON la Password check for the system aC c e NEA Normal response Remote password check See Section 3 3 3 When setting the remote password in eR QCPU the remote password input Nec pipet iN IE dialog box is displayed reese ule NN Access to the QCPU Execute li
360. mpletion of the unlock processing allows access to data communication PLC thereafter Communication using MC protocol When connecting to the GX Developer 4 Precautions during the line connection 1 Prior to data communication with external devices determine when and which station will perform the line connection dialing and line disconnection processing to the external device 2 Use the following method to perform the unlock processing for the QCPU remote password from the opposite device During communication using MC protocol transmit the dedicated command to the Q series C24 side When accessing the PLC using the GX Developer perform the unlock processing on the GX Developer screen when access begins See Section 3 3 7 8 for what to do when the unlock processing is completed abnormally 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q 3 When reconnecting the line after disconnection allow several seconds for the modem before turning on the Connection request Y11 If it Y11 is turned on immediately after line disconnection the modem may not accept the first connection request resulting in connection failure and the user may be forced to wait for the retry time to elapse 5 Line connection program example An example of a line connection program is shown below Example of initiating line connection from the Q series C24 side following the initialization completion When the data for c
361. munications complete report In the following descriptions the external device with the lowest station No 1 is assumed to be the master station and the other external devices are assumed to be slave stations External device that obtained the line usage right M v m 1 after 2 External device Station No 1Ex External device Station No 1Du External device Station No 1Cx 1 Station No 14 Station 2 C24 0 Station 15 24 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 JL C24 Q series C24 QC24 N UC24 14 9 14 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING EXTERNAL DEVICE AND PLC CPU M N CONFIGURATION External device of slave station that wants to obtain the line usage right 1 MELSEC Q 1 A slave station that wants to communicate data with the PLC CPU sends a Master station external device 1 Mater station Before 6 External device Station No 1Bu Station No 0u CPU C24 E 14 10 communications request to the master station to obtain the line usage right A message structure example is shown in 2 2 The master station transmits a permission granted response to the slave station that issued the communications request 1 Command ZX is a communications request command for description purpose The user shou
362. n 3 Cautions during data communications a Setthe GX Developer side modem which the Q Series C24 is to reconnect to callback on with Auto Reception With Auto Reception This setting enables line connection from the external device b When a request is issued for a line connection from another GX Developer during a temporary line disconnection from the GX Developer side by callback processing the Q Series C24 executes a callback operation for the latter connection request The Q Series C24 terminates callback processing to the GX Developer that it received a connection request from earlier c If you are making a line connection to the GX Developer by the following connection system select callback reception waiting as the connection system for the GX Developer that the Q Series C24 is reconnecting to callback and make the connection Callback request during fixed during designated number Example In the case of line connections with Callback request during designated number as the connection system GX Configurator SC input the telephone No 2 and make the line connection Callback request during designated number GX Developer Telephone No 1 Modem 3 E Setting of callback function designation settings by the m Callback request during designation number ib Reaistration in the Q Seri er Select Callback reception waiting egistr
363. n 1 In using the Mitsubishi MELSEC programmable logic controller the usage conditions shall be that the application will not lead to a major accident even if any problem or fault should occur in the programmable logic controller device and that backup and fail safe functions are systematically provided outside of the device for any problem or fault 2 The Mitsubishi general purpose programmable logic controller has been designed and manufactured for applications in general industries etc Thus applications in which the public could be affected such as in nuclear power plants and other power plants operated by respective power companies and applications in which a special quality assurance system is required such as for Railway companies or National Defense purposes shall be excluded from the programmable logic controller applications Note that even with these applications if the user approves that the application is to be limited and a special quality is not required application shall be possible When considering use in aircraft medical applications railways incineration and fuel devices manned transport devices equipment for recreation and amusement and safety devices in which human life or assets could be greatly affected and for which a particularly high reliability is required in terms of safety and control system please consult with Mitsubishi and discuss the required specifications Microsoft Windows Windows NT are registere
364. n and notification a When communicating data with external devices Perform the appropriate processing up to line connection or modem TA initialization depending on whether or not the line connection is initiated from the Q series C24 side After line connection data communication can be performed using an MC protocol non procedure protocol bidirectional protocol in full duplex communication 1 When line connecting from the Q series C24 side Processing up to line connection as shown in Section 3 4 6 2 When line connecting from the external device Processing up to the initialization of the modem TA as shown in Section 3 4 5 b When notifying to pager receivers Perform processing up to the initialization of the modem TA as shown in Section 3 4 5 In notification to pager receiver since the line connection is performed during notification processing line connection processing is unnecessary However be sure to register data for connection 2 Buffer memory used and I O signals a When communicating data with the external device Only buffer memory and I O signals the user uses for data communication MC protocol non procedure protocol bidirectional protocol Communicate data using the connection in progress signal X12 ON as the interlock signal There is no I O signal or buffer memory for modem functions used in data communication Initialization request Initialization completion Connection
365. n number 1 The registration numbers shown in the table below are used by the memory of the registration destination 2 The registration number of the data for connection is determined by the area of registration Registration data Registration destination Registration number Decimal hexadecimal Number of registrations Flash ROM 3000 to 3029 BB8H to BD5H 30 Data for connection All are set by user 4 Precautions during the registration of data for connection 1 The maximum size of data that can be registered as one data for connection is 80 bytes Do not deviate from the following data sizes for the following items Message area for notification 36 bytes data for connection area 44 bytes 2 Designate the messages for notification accordingly with the display designation of the partner devices 3 The registration status of the data for initialization stored in the Flash ROM can be checked in data registration for modem connection screen for GX Configurator SC or the buffer memory address 223H to 225 547 to 549 When newly registering register by designating an unregistered number When designating a number which is already registered delete the registered data for that number first then perform the registration 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q 5 Procedures for register read delete of the data for connection a For the flash ROM in the Q series C24 1 Register read delete operat
366. n numbers or a message structure different from the Q series C24 control procedure format 14 5 14 5 14 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING EXTERNAL DEVICE AND PLC CPU M N CONFIGURATION MELSEC Q 14 3 Examples of Procedure for Data Communications with the PLC CPU The following uses examples to describe the procedure when communicating data with a PLC CPU by interlocking the external devices 14 3 1 Sequential data communications between external devices and the PLC CPU The external devices sequentially obtain the line usage right and communicate data with the PLC CPU based on their station No Example Time gt Station No 1 A 1 4 external device Transmission to transfer the line usage right Response Station No 1Cu external device Data with the PLC CPU Station No m 1 external device T The following uses an example to describe the procedure when external devices communicate data with the PLC CPU External device that obtained the line usage right Fae e __ 3 __ 3 __ 3 External device When communicating External device External device External device Station 1 data with the station Station No 1C4 Station No 1Du Station No 1Ex No 1H PLC C
367. n with the external device To use the function for simplifying the data communication program with the registration data when preregistering the fixed format section of the communication message Chapters 9 to 11 describe the data transmission reception function with user frames in which the fixed format section of the communication message has been preregistered 8 To use the function that performs the data communication in ASCII code with the external device Chapter 13 describes the handling of binary code on the PLC CPU and ASCII BIN conversion function for communicating ASCII code data for an external device 9 To use dedicated instructions Chapter 17 describes the dedicated instructions that are used to execute the functions explained in this manual Structure of this manual This manual describes how to use the utility package for the Q series C24 GX Configurator SC in order to perform the initial settings used to execute special functions For details on the screens used for entering setting values see Chapter 8 of User s Manual Basic About the Generic Terms and Abbreviations This manual uses the following generic terms and abbreviations to describe the Q series C24 unless otherwise specified 1 Generic terms and abbreviations In this manual the following generic terms and abbreviations are used to indicate the PLC CPU and the Q series C24 used for the data communication functions of the serial communi
368. nal code 10H DLE transparent code 04H EOT A K External device side E Datalength Data section L H PLC CPU side 5 30 34 30 30 31 32 33 34 35 41 42 43 44 45 46 30 30 44 30 41 0 4 Transmission instruction X50 PLC CPU ON Data length Number of data received Excluding additional code Number of bytes after ASCII BIN conversion 8 2 4 y when word units are used Completion device 8 when byte units are used Heu een 3 Abnormal Status display device M f completion at completion This diagram is for when word Normal completion units are used i RETR One scan D3 4 400K 401 g 34H 12H H 12 S 1 2 i BCH 5An 9 40 pc 2 E 2 FOH DEH 4034 DEH D 404 Transmission data OAH ODH ODH Sequence program Buffer memory device memory Transmission instruction X50 MOVP KI 00 Sets CH1 to the transmission channel 4 02 Sets the number of data sent to 4 MOVP 412 010 Sets the arbitrary transmission data to D10 to 013 MOVP HOBC5A 011 MOVP HOFODE D12 MOVP HOAOD D13 GP BIDOUT U8 00 010 MO Executes transmission MO M1 SET M100 Sets normal completion flag Mt stET M101 Sets abnormal completion flag Data for one address one word in the buffer memory s transmission area is converted into four byte ASCII code data O to 9 and A to
369. nal device according to the specifications of the external device to the Q series C24 as user frames For the illustration above the Q series C24 transmits the on demand data as described below User frame sum check code Calculates the sum check code according to the contents registered in advance by the user and transmits the result as ASCII code or binary code data Other than user frame sum check code Transmits data of the code registered in advance by the user No conversion Send data character area B This is the data that the sequence program requested for a transmission with on demand instruction The same contents and list as when transmitted without using a user frame 10 described in Section 3 11 3 of Reference Manual by communication protocol by GX Developer switch setting and word byte designation 10 1 10 1 10 ON DEMAND DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING USER FRAMES MELSEC Q 10 2 User Frame Types and Registration Data communications using user frames can be performed by registering the user frames to the Q series C24 from an external device and the PLC CPU Chapter 9 explains the types of user frames and the data that can be used To register a user frame from the PLC CPU see Chapter 9 To register a user frame from an external device first see Chapter 9 and check the precautions etc then register the user frame using the function described in Section 3 9 of Reference Manual 10 3 User Frame On Demand Data Transmis
370. nd the arbitrary data is read to the PLC CPU When the CH1 side interface of the Q series C24 receives data Reception data with the user frame 1 User frame Arbitary User frame Extemal device first frame data area last frame PLC CPU 2 Reception data read request signal X3 PLC CPU Completion device Abnormal ON completion Status display device at completion Normal completion 1 scan i i See Sections 11 2 1 and 11 2 2 regarding the reading of reception data using a user frame and the timing of reception data reading to the PLC CPU Sets the receive user frame registration No etc in the non procedure system setting screen for GX Configurator SC During debugging the initial setting value for data reception shall be set prior to data receiving but after debugging is completed it shall be set when the Q series C24 starts up See Section 11 2 4 Reading 1 below for checking which user frame was received by the Q series C24 from the PLC CPU and reading of the receive data 2 below 1 Reads which of the user frames set in the receiver user frame designation area was received from the receive user frame storage area address 25 2 Reads the arbitrary data area of the receive message from the receive area default addresses 600 to 7FFH 11 14 11 14 11 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING USER FRAMES MELSEC Q 11 2 4 Use
371. ne disconnect Line disconnect processing by the line disconnect screen Line disconnect response Line Disconnect Line disconnect response Connection in progress signal X12 OFF Line connection wait state Modem initialization completion signal X10 ON Shows the value stored for the modem function sequence status address 546 2214 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q 3 4 2 Initial settings of the serial communication module This section explains the initial settings of the Q series C24 when data communicating with external device remotely notifying a pager receiver and accessing from GX Developer using the modem function 1 Switch settings by GX Developer Data ke te GX Developer Switch setting by GX Developer VEM Notification Remarks communication access Communication protocol setting 1007 1to7 8 Operation setting OFF Independent operation Set both CH1 and CH2 OFF Data bit setting ON OFF 7bits ON 8 bits ON Parity non parity setting Set according to modem OFF Non parity ON Parity Even odd parity setting TA on local station OFF Odd ON Even Transmission Stop bit setting OFF 1 bit ON 2 bits specification Sum check enable disable n ded OFF ON ON OFF Disabled ON Enabled communication setting Set according rate setting Write during RUN to system OFF ON ON OFF Disabled ON Enabled enable disa
372. nection by callback from the Series C24 side are borne by the Q Series C24 side 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q 6 Remote password check If the remote password check has been set for the Q series C24 installed in the QCPU the Q series C24 executes a remote password check when the PLC is accessed from an external device using the Q series C24 modem function The following is an overview of the QCPU remote password function See Section 3 3 3 for more details a Remote password function The remote password function allows prohibits access to the QCPU from an external device via the following modules Series C24 Ethernet module n the case of the Ethernet module the remote password function can be used for data communications connections with an external device For details see the User s Manual Basic for the Ethernet module b Station where the remote password and remote password check are set 1 In the case of a PLC system with one QCPU station GX Developer parameter setting Remote password External device Module subject to the remote QCPU Q series C24 access source password check 3 Public line Remote Modem password i check Communication executing the remote password check Communication using MC protocol Communication using the GX Developer 1 4 Lise 4 2 Inthe case of a PLC system consisted of multiple
373. ng function 1 PLC CPU monitor registration for the Q series C24 that is required to use the PLC CPU monitoring function is described in the following sections The registration can be performed using one of the following methods 1 Registration using the Q series C24 dedicated utility package GX Configurator SC Detailed explanation is found in Chapter 8 of the User s Manual Basic 2 Registration using the PLC CPU monitoring registration command 0630 for communication with the MC protocol Detailed explanation is found in Section 3 17 of the Reference Manual 3 Registration using the PLC CPU CSET instruction Detailed explanation found in Chapter 17 of the User s Manual Application 2 When this function is used with the modem function and data is transmitted or a notification message is notified as a PLC CPU monitoring result register the connection data for the modem function on the PLC CPU monitoring system setting screen of the GX Configurator SC 3 By registering the data for using the above PLC CPU monitoring function the Q series C24 begins monitoring the PLC CPU 2 2 2 PLC CPU monitoring information This section explains the monitoring target information used to execute the PLC CPU monitoring function 1 The following information can be registered as the target of the PLC CPU monitoring function 1 Device monitoring for the local station s PLC CPU Monitoring of the numeric values stored in the word
374. ng such as I O signal disconnection request Y12 is unnecessary 1 I O signal used Uses modem disconnection request signal Y12 and modem disconnection complete signal Y14 1 Host station Communication Disconnection Initialization completion X10 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 Connection in 4 x12 Ta 1 Modem Y12 bo 1 disconnection request i Es Modem disconnection completion X14 Li p i RS 232 CD terminal um _ O O OO 1 1 External station Q series C24 M LR Initialization completion x14 1 1 D MES ON 2 completion X10 E 1 EN 1 1 D P 1 Connection in mE 4 V 1 x12 ue X I X RPS SE RE 7 Modem Y12 E OFF E Ls disconnection request A IEEE 1 1 1 1 i D 2 i d 1 ETE E 1 Modem disconnection X i 1 i i 1 RS 232 CD terminal x ES This is the procedure to take in order to turn off the initialization complete signal X10 In the case of Q series C24 when the line is disconnected from the external device the initialization complete signal X10 at the local station is not turned OFF 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q 1 Line disconnection processing can be conducted from either device as long as the connect
375. nicate data with the PLC CPU Conditions for priority use obtaining line ownership of the line from the start to the end of data communications with the PLC CPU 14 2 1 Maximum communications time per external device station This condition determines the maximum time each external device can communicate with the PLC CPU after obtaining line ownership Time the illustration below This is selected to prevent loss of data communications between other external devices and the PLC CPU by shutdown of the external device that obtained line ownership Example E Indicates the range within which External device 1 the target device cannot obtain line ownership m Indicates the range within which the target device can obtain line ownership and can have data communication with the PLC CPU External device 2 to External device 5 1 Make the maximum data communications time per external device station the maximum time of the external device that requires the most time to communicate data with the PLC CPU 2 After system starting complete data communications from the external device that obtained line ownership and the PLC CPU within the maximum communications time If data communications cannot be completed within this time initialize the Q series C24 transmission sequence by transmitting the EOT CL code to the objective PLC CPU within the maximum communications time See Contents of data designati
376. nications Precautions The following describes the precautions to be observed when using half duplex communications 1 Half duplex communications system configuration and functions Half duplex communications is possible only with a system that connects the PLC CPU and external device in a 1 1 configuration Half duplex communications Half duplex communications can be dedignated cannot be designated External device RS 232 QC24 2 Agreement and confirmation between external device and PLC CPU Agree and confirm the following items between the external device and the PLC CPU 1 Whether or not half duplex communications can be performed by Q series C24 RS signal and CD signal 2 Qseries C24 RS signal and CD signal ON OFF timing 3 series C24 and external device data transmission timing 4 RS 232 cable connection method 3 Transmission control When the transmission control functions described in Chapter 7 are used DC code control DC1 DC3 transmission control and DC 1 DC3 reception control cannot be used with half duplex communications Therefore do not designate them 9 CONTENTS AND REGISTRATION OF THE USER FRAMES FOR DATA COMMUNICATION MELSEC Q 9 CONTENTS AND REGISTRATION OF THE USER FRAMES FOR DATA COMMUNICATION User frames are used to register some or all of the messages exchanged between an external device and the Q series C24 in advance and use them to check the send data or receive data
377. nnection Section 3 4 4 FEM XS ofthis section Head device No 3 g of this section Read point Condition agreement transmission Monitoring condition 3 h of this section 3 h Monitoring condition value 3 i of this section Transmission pointer 4 of this section Output count Section 11 4 2 2 Section 2 2 5 3 Data No for connection Section 3 4 4 PLC CPU abnormal monitoring designation i 2 A ED 4 of this section Condition agreement transmission Transmission pointer x Section 11 4 2 2 Output count Section 2 2 5 3 Data No for connection Section 3 4 4 Setting required X Setting not required While using the notification function the device information and the CPU status information cannot be transmitted 2 USING THE PLC CPU MONITORING FUNCTION MELSEC Q 2 Setting items and requirement when performing communication using the non procedure protocol Condition agreement transmission Setting item Reference section Data Data TA BM Notification NUM Notification transmission transmission yde meunts P 9 ofthissectin Cycle time 3 b of this section Constant yole varsmisson Transmissonponsr ox Section 11 4 2 2 Output count Constant cycle transmission Data No for connection Section 2 2 5 3 Section 3 4 4 m of registered bit blocks PLC CPU abnormal monitoring 3 f of this secti
378. nter 150 CH2 side interrupt pointer 151 Intelligent module side Start I O No 0 Start SI No 0 fixed Interrupt program start enable disable setting with GX Configurator SC CH1 side Issues interrupt performs communication via the non procedure protocol CH2 side Does not issue interrupt When the input output signals of the Q series C24 are X YOO to X Y1F gt In case of CH1 side lt Interrupt program enabled Normal reception SET M100 Sets the checking flag for normal lt Abnormal reception B reception abnormal reception via the 0 4 SET M101 Me 7 Resets on the main program side Reception interrupt program execution D200 Receives data and stores in D200 and later IRET D200 Receive data count D201 and later Receive data 17 4 17 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q 17 3 CSET Instruction PLC CPU Monitoring Register Cancel Applicable device MELSECNET H Special Index module register Constant Others uO cO Zn Setting data Internal device MELSECNET 10 File register Direct JAO Instruction code Executing Instruction format condition CSET f ZP CSET Un 51 S2 D1 D2 Setting data Setting data Start I O signal of the module 00 to FE The 2 upper digits of an input output signal expressed in 3 digit Channel No for sending the monitoring result User T 16 51 1 Channel 1 CH1 side 2 Channel 2 CH2 si
379. nts of the data designation items of each frame in the reference manual Station No of access source Designation unnecessary external device 1 No Local station No item Communications using A compatible 1C frame Station No of access source Designation unnecessary external device 1 No Local station No item 1 A station No with in the 0 to 31 OOH to 1FH range not set in series C24 at the PLC CPU is used as the external device No in the Station No and Local station No items in the message Select and designate the No of each external device The designation method is described in Contents of the data designation items of each frame in the reference manual Station No vst Designates the No of the transmit destination external device e Local station No Designates the No of the transmit source external device Does not have to be designated when A compatible 1C frame is used 14 2 14 2 14 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING EXTERNAL DEVICE AND PLC CPU M N CONFIGURATION MELSEC Q 14 2 External Devices Interlock Conditions When using a multidrop line to communicate data between external devices and the PLC CPU in an m n configuration the external devices must be interlocked so that multiple external devices cannot communicate data with the PLC CPU at the same time This section describes the conditions for interlocking the external devices so that all of the external devices can commu
380. nuals of each data link for the operating status of each station when there is a communication error in the data link There is the risk of an accident occurring due to output error or malfunctioning e When using the notification function the pager receiver may not be contacted due to the frequency transmission status from the system setup environment and error on the receiver side To ensure the safety of the PLC system install a call circuit with a lamp display or buzzer sound e When performing the control of the PLC in operation changing data by connecting a peripheral devices to the CPU module or personal computer etc to the intelligent device module configure an interlock circuit in a sequence program so the safety of the overall system is always maintained Also when performing other controls of the PLC in operation changing program and operation status status control read this manual carefully and confirm if the overall safety is maintained Especially when this control is performed to a remote PLC from an external device troubles that have occurred on the PLC side may not be able to immediately be handled if there is a data communication error Define a troubleshooting agreement between external devices and the PLC CPU for data communication error occurrences as well as construct an interlock circuit in the sequence program Do not write data into the system area of the buffer memory of intelligent function modules Also
381. numbers decimal hexadecimal 27 1 28 1 31 1 device device External device 0 00x 3 03x 26 1 PU C24 C24 24 24 C24 series C24 QC24 N UC24 2 Compatible 3C frame format 1 Qn identification Station No Network No T Local station No L B 42 H AA 14 4 14 4 14 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING EXTERNAL DEVICE AND PLC CPU M N CONFIGURATION MELSEC Q 2 When message structure different from that of control procedure format frames can be used 1 Change the head data of each message to other arbitrary data When selecting ASCII code format 1 format 2 or format 4 change ENQ 05u 2 Arbitrarily list the data following the head data of each message according to the user specifications Example Head data Arbitrary contents N destination station No Source station No Sum check code External device 1 station No 1 c o Q E D c E Transmission Message wait Source 4 station No station No destination External device 2 station No 1 Transmission Transmission 9 1B 7 Arbitrary contents Head data Correspond the message structure for general reporting to all the other external devices except PLC CPU stations using unused statio
382. nversion then adds it to the transmission message At reception The Q series C24 calculates a sum check code using the received data length and data section prior to ASCII BIN conversion then checks the received head of the sum check code using the code as a lower byte When word units are used Message x1 T T T T T T T T T 1 T T E Data length Data section Sum N 1 check Q 0002 code Lot aot i LiH 0 210 0 1 2 3 415 AiB C 05 30 32 30 30 31 32 33 34 35 4141420 43H 8741024 t t ASCII BIN conversion 1 Calculation of sum check code Buffer memory H L Transmission data count Receive data count Transmission data receive data 30H 32H 30H 30H 1 32H 33H 34H 35H 41 424 43 02874 H L 2 Section 12 5 explains how Q series C24 processes data communicated when ASCII BIN conversion and transparent code designation are both enabled Example External device Head data Data Arbitrary data section communication P T T T 7 T T T T T T T T 1 3 E Data length Data section Sum Send 5 N O heck i x checl lt i code 2 L H 1 9 2510 075 d 2 50 12108 AU BS G Receive 05 30H 32 130 30 31 32 30 32 33 41H142H 43 80H 02H Error code 13 11 Starting data Communication of response massage Send Recei
383. o 1 E v v v v External device Reception data Reception start timing side E E Y Receive complete timing read timing PLC CPU side When exclusive format 1 Ignored received data count is 0 When data is received using Format 1 the Q series C24 checks again whether the first frame has been received after receiving data equaling the exclusive format 1 received data count Reception data during that time is ignored 11 12 11 12 11 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING USER FRAMES MELSEC Q Combination without the first frame Timing patterns for reception start and receive complete read Pattern No 2 A 1 Pattern No 2 A 2 wv wv v 5 S External device Arbitrary data Arbitrary data side 4 gt PLC CPU side Equaling the received data count Pattern No 2 A 3 Pattern No 2 A 4 wv v wv wv v o o o o Vo 9 o 5 External device Arbitrary data E 2 Arbitrary data EO side S o 6 E o o 4 PLC CPU side Arbitrary data Equaling the received Em data data count Pattern No 2 B g v Reception start timing Bil ais Receive complete timing aide z read timing PLC CPU side 11 13 11 13 11 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING USER FRAMES MELSEC Q 11 2 3 Receive procedure The following shows the receive procedure when a message including data with the same arrangement as the specified user frame is received a
384. o callback connection denial accumulated count storage area Address 8947 22F3n The accumulated count value for line connections from the GX Developer by the connection system shown below that were not connected normally is stored here 1 Auto callback during fixed 2 Auto callback during designated number h Accumulated count of callback receive procedure cancel storage area Address 8948 22F4n The accumulated count value for the number of callback procedures that were terminated from the initial GX Developer by the Q Series C24 when a line connection request by another GX Developer was executed during temporary line disconnect from the GX Developer side through callback specification is stored here The Series C24 performs the callback operation with respect to the latest connection request Each of the accumulated count values stored in d to h above are further explained below 1 The user can clear the values using either of the following Set the accumulated count to 0 using the GX Configurator SC modem function monitor test screen Write O to the applicable area of the buffer memory 2 The accumulated count will be stored as gt 1H gt 2H gt FFFFH gt 1H Fe 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q 3 3 7 Precautions when using the modem function Precautions when using the modem function to perform data communication with an external device via public line or call
385. o Callback connection during designated number Setting3 Auto Callback connection during max designated number is 10 Setting4 Callback connection during fixed Setting5 Callback connection during designated number Setting amp Callback connection during max designated number is 10 Callback denial notification accumulated its Flash ROM setting Details Wile to File save module Read from is eps Select input module Make text file Execute test Close Setting Setting Item Setting value possible Description impossible B ify t wh i GX Developer connection designation Connect ood y OE pee pee the callback function Callback function designation Settings 1 to 6 See b e Select according to the callback operation Callback denial notification 0 to 65535 Specify the accumulated count value accumulated count designation informed to the user 7 Specify the connection data No See Data No for Callback d tion 1 t id disc ages eine See oe 9 BB8 4 to 801 Section 3 4 4 for setting values Must be set Set as necessary 2 Monitoring Testing through the modem function monitor test screen This shows the callback function monitoring and testing See Section 3 3 6 for monitoring and testing of the modem function including the following items Buffer memory address Callback permit accumulated count 8944 22 0 Callback denial accumulated count 8945
386. o D10 or after 4th Format 1 33H_ 32H Exclusive Format 1 6034 A STX 2024 0H received data count 02H 1st aus 2025 434 42 2 42 1234 2026 k are 6054 424 LF CR 606 2027 ci 4th ore Buffe Reception data read request Buffer memory x83 FROMP H8 258 Do Ki Reads combinations of user frames received MOVP KI 01 Sets CH1 to the reception channel K6 04 Sets the allowable number of reception data to 6 G INPUT U8 01 010 MO Executes reception M0 M1 SET M100 Sets the normal completion flag Mi E seT M101 Sets the abnormal completion flag 11 29 Receive data count Word units Receive byte count excluding frame and additional code 12 2 6 Byte units Receive byte count excluding frame and additional code 12 11 29 11 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING USER FRAMES MELSEC Q 11 4 Data Transmission This section explains the arrangement of the transmission data and transmission procedure when transmitting data using a user frame 11 4 1 Send data The following describes the data list codes and handling of the Q series C24 send data during user frame data transmission 1 Send data list Only the data list combinations shown below are allowed during user frame data transmission Arbitrary data area User fra
387. ollows pp DENN Receivable codes Codes stored in the reception area Arbitrary data section 30H to 39H 41H to 46 to 9 to f data codes other than 30H to 39H and 41H to 46H are received for an arbitrary data section an error occurs after ASCII BIN conversion by the Q series C24 13 6 13 6 13 COMMUNICATING WITH ASCII CODE ASCII BIN CONVERSION MELSEC Q 3 Example of reception using user frames Number of receive data Number of bytes after ASCII BIN conversion of receive data excluding frames and additional codes LAXE ILI WAGE GE NENEWEENM E Tq SO T 38 0 1 2 F 5 A B C D E F 9 T g8 6 2 3 When word units are used Xx c os E i 0 Xd s 6 When byte units are used External device 128 661 i oe Zn D o 1 1 1 1 1 10 o 1 X ro i 1 i The diagram below is for when word units are used 024514 0 OAH 0 2 46 35 41 42 43 44 45 46 DEH ADH nx User frame enable j First frame Arbitrary data section Last frame 2H disable designation PLC CPU side corresponds to register corresponds to First frame No number 8 i register number 41 AEH 8 designation 1st Ua ee EUER nsi AF 2nd Reception data read X83 SUR SN Gra i No designation poou aN es em Last frame No 2 designation 41 159 Completion device MO S on 5 acu i m i A 7 A
388. om the GX Configurator SC or from the PLC CPU X10 Initialization complete signal X1E Ready signal X1F WDT error signal MO Accessible flag M2 Data registration complete flag for connection See Section 3 4 4 M3 Initialization complete flag M40 Notification enable flag M S M o Turns the ready flag ON _F Fre kK ST ito Turns the notification enable flag ON See Section 3 4 3 See Section 3 4 4 Data for initialization registration Data for connection registration He cer Y14 Sets the notification issued request signal Modem TA initialization See Section 3 4 5 1 1 n a E M61 Notification command RST Y14 Resets the notification issued request signal notification issued SET M69 Sets the notification issued request flag SET M6 Sets the flag at notification normal completion SET Y14 4 221 0102 Ki Reads the error code at notification completion SET Y14 RST M6 Resets the flag with the clear command RST M69 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q 3 4 8 Line disconnection This section explains the line disconnection upon communication completion when communicating data with the external device using the modem functions In case of notification to pager receivers since the line will be disconnected at the end of the notification processing the disconnection processi
389. omplete code will be treated as arbitrary data Example When data transmitted from a bar code reader is received STX will be registered in the first frame and ETX registered in the last frame according to the message format of the bar code reader Data format transmitted from the bar code reader First frame STX Reception Last frame ETX data a 2 Reception start timing Receive complete timing Ignored Stored in the reception area read timing b Reception of combination 1 B 1 In this method messages to be received by the PLC CPU side are all transmitted from the external device as fixed format data 2 Any reception data prior to the first frame will be ignored 3 The Q series C24 will begin reception processing when data of the same arrangement as the first frame is received When data of the same arrangement as the last frame is received a read request is performed to the PLC CPU 4 Since there is no arbitrary data the reception data count will be 0 when a read request is performed to the PLC CPU 5 The received data count initially set in the Q series C24 uses the default value Reception First frame ACK data Last frame CR LF v Reception start timing Receive complete timing Ignored Stored in the reception area read timing The received data count is 11 5 11 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING USER FRAMES 11 6 MELSEC Q c Reception of combinati
390. on 1 C 1 2 In this method start of data transmission from the external device to the PLC CPU side is notified by the first frame after which arbitrary data of a fixed length is repeatedly transmitted from the external device Any reception data prior to the first frame will be ignored After the first frame is received all later reception data is treated as arbitrary data The Q series C24 will begin reception processing when data of the same arrangement as the first frame is received A read request will be repeatedly performed to the PLC CPU when arbitrary data equaling the received data count initially set in the Q series C24 is received The received data count initially set in the Q series C24 should be a data count for arbitrary data fixed length transmitted from the external device Reception processing via the receive complete code initially set in the Q series C24 will not be performed The reception data for the receive complete code will be treated as arbitrary data vv Reception E data First frame Arbitrary data i Ignored 4 gt gt Equaling the received Equaling the received data count data count Reception start timing Receive complete timing Stored in the Stored in the read timing reception area reception area 2 Reception with the first frame combination 1 D 1 E reception using Format 1 1 In this method arbitrary data of exclusive format 1 rec
391. on Data number for 0 d 3000 connection designation area Address 35x 53 Modem function error code storage area 0 Address 221 545 Notification execution data i storage area 0 Xa 3000 Address 22 554 i Initialization X10 ON completion i Connectionin 49 1 i4 progress 7 ma Notification X15 7 y fo normal completion ificati X16 Notification OFF abnormal completion Notification issued request YU RS 232 CD terminal OFF 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q Example 2 When abnormal completion Buffer memory for Q series C24 initial setting Notification execution designation area 0 X Address 2 47 Buffer memory for notification Data number designation area for connection 0 N 3000 Address 5 53 Modem function error code storage area 0 Xe Error code Address 221 545 Notification execution data i storage area Address 22 554 Initialization X10 ON completion Connection in X12 OFF l i progress Notification X15 2 OFF normal completion Notification X16 abnormal completion d EM DE Notification S i MIT Y14 S issued request RS 232 CD terminal OFF Dial Dial Dial Dial Dialing Retry In the case of three times Retry processing is conducted
392. on No n block monitoring device Monitoring device 3 9 of this section Condition agreement transmission Monitoring condition 3 h of this section Monitoring condition value 3 i of this section 4 of this section Output count Section 11 4 2 2 l Section 2 2 5 3 Data No for connection o Section 3 4 4 PLC CPU abnormal monitoring designation R 4 of this section Condition agreement transmission Transmission pointer x Section 11 4 2 2 Output count Section 2 2 5 3 Data No for connection Section 3 4 4 Setting required X Setting not required POINT While using the notification function the device information and the CPU status information cannot be transmitted 2 USING THE PLC CPU MONITORING FUNCTION MELSEC Q 3 Contents of setting items The data items to be set by the GX Configurator SC in order to use the PLC CPU monitoring function and the setting contents are explained below a e Cycle time units Designates the unit for b cycle time below for reading information from the PLC CPU using the PLC CPU monitoring function The cycle time units and the cycle time designated using this unit can also be used as the transmission time interval for constant cycle communication Cycle time Designates the time for one cycle when reading information from the PLC CPU in order to perform PLC CPU
393. on 16 5 16 6 16 7 Section 1 1 2 diagram 1 2 Chapter 3 entire Section 4 1 2 Section 9 1 1 4 5 Section 11 3 2 3 11 3 3 3 Section 13 6 1 diagram Addition Section 3 3 4 3 3 6 4 3 4 5 4 Additional model QJ71C24N QJ71C24N R2 QU71C24N R4 Correction SAFETY PRECAUTIONS About the Manuals The Manual s Use and Structure About the Generic Terms and Abbreviations Section 1 2 Section 2 2 4 2 c Section 3 3 1 3 3 5 3 3 6 3 4 2 3 4 3 3 4 7 3 4 8 3 3 5 Section 6 1 Section 7 1 7 2 Section 9 1 1 4 Section 10 4 1 2 1 Section 11 2 4 2 11 4 3 a 11 5 Section 15 1 15 2 15 3 15 4 2 Section 17 1 17 3 17 4 Addition Section 4 4 2 6 Chapter 16 entire Dec 2003 SH NA 080007 E Correction About the Generic Terms and Abbreviations Section 3 4 6 4 Section 6 1 6 3 1 b Section 9 1 1 4 Section 11 2 4 2 Japanese Manual Version SH 080002 H Jan 2003 SH NA 080007 D This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 1999 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION INTRODUCTION Thank you for purchasing the MELSEC Q series PLC Before using the eq
394. on are shown below See 2 for setting details Transmission control and other system setting screen CH1 Transmission control and others system setting Tx Module information Module model name QJ71C24N Start 170 No 0000 Module type Serial Communications Module Setting item Setting value Send Recv data monitoring designation No monitor Monitor stop Action for buffer full Continue m Stop by Timer 0 error Continue Monitor buffer head address 2600 Monitor butfer size 0000 The following items are effective for non procedure bidirectional protocol Transmission buffer memory head address designation 0400 Buffer memory length designation 0200 Receive buffer memory head address designation 0600 Buffer memory length designation 0200 Transmission transparent code designation 1st 0000 H0000 No transparent code Others 0 7 Transparent code value HOO Hff b8 bf Additional code value H01 Hff X Flash ROM setting Details Wile to File save Read from eae Select input module Make text file Execute test Close Setting items Setting items Setting values Item details Send Receive data No monitoring Monitor stop ner DAS Select monitor start for constant monitoring monitoring designation Monitor start Action for buffer full Continue Stop Select stop to stop monitoring when the monitor data area is full Stop by Timer 0 error Continue Stop S
395. on item of each frame in the reference manual 3 While an external device and the PLC CPU are communicating data have the other external devices check the time so that they do not transmit data during this time 14 3 14 3 14 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING EXTERNAL DEVICE AND PLC CPU M N CONFIGURATION MELSEC Q 14 2 2 Message structure when communicating data between external devices The message structure when communicating data between external devices is determined by any of the following This condition is determined to interlock the external devices so that they can exchange data with the PLC CPU in a 1 1 configuration 1 When making the message structure the same as that of each control procedure format frame 1 Use a number within the 0 to 31 00H to 1FH range not set Q series C24 of the PLC CPU as the external device No in the Station No and Local station No items in the message 2 Select and designate the external device numbers The designation method is described in Contents of data designation item of each frame in the reference manual Station No cen Designates the number of the transmission destination external device e Local station No 7 Designates the number of the transmission Source external device Does not have to be designated when A compatible frame 1C is used Example When m n configuration is 5 27 The values in are the external device and Q series C24 station
396. on modules QnA compatible 3C frame Formats 1 to 4 QnA frame Formats 1 to 4 QnA compatible 4C frame Formats 1 to 4 QnA extension frame Formats 1 to 4 Details are explained in Chapter 3 of the Reference Manual compatible 4 frame Format 5 Description One of the message formats for the serial communication modules for performing communication using the MC protocol and binary code data This is the same message format as the communication frame using the protocol for the QnA series serial communication modules QnA compatible 4C frame Format 5 QnA extension frame Format 5 Details are explained in Chapter 3 of the Reference Manual Data name when the fixed format portion of messages to be sent or received between a serial communication module and an external device is registered in the module and used for sending and receiving data with the functions listed below The contents of a user frame data should conform to the specifications of the external device The data array of the head and tail sections of a message transmission control code C24 station number sum check fixed data etc to be sent and received is registered in the serial communication module before use MC protocol on demand function Data communication function using the non procedure protocol Details are explained in Chapter 9 of the User s Manual Applications 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 1 OVERVIEW 1 1 Overvi
397. on only UT No No Example The following example shows the data arrangement when data is sent and received The communication section of the response message is omitted When the ASCII BIN conversion is not performed External device Q series C24 Head data Buffer memory transmission area reception area Arbitrary data section ai Transmission data DES count Receive data S9 count 5 i epa Transmission data 5 receive data E BCH 054 10 024 OOH 12 10u 02 01 Receive i E 3 e The data count is in word units code For 104 Transparent code For 024 When the ASCII BIN conversion is performed External device Q series C24 Hed Buffer memory transmission area reception area Arbitrary data section P dup H L BO Transmission data Data lengt i S 00024 count Receive data O04 02 count guo od 02124 st ae 8 k lt o 024 12 _ Transmission data 2 0 0 1 o BU BC3An receive data 95 5 BC o 5 lt The data count is in word units Transparent code Additional code For 414 For 104 12 15 12 15 12 TRANSPARENT CODES AND ADDITIONAL CODES MELSEC Q 12 6 Example of Data Communication Using the Bidirectional Protocol Thi
398. onnection has been registered from GX Configurator SC or from the PLC CPU Data for initialization registration Data for connection registration Modem TA initialization PLS M1 L 3 SET SET Yi X12 SET RST X13 NO H221 0101 RST X27 RST RST M41 Yu M49 Yu 11 M49 M4 X10 Initialization complete signal X1E Ready signal X1F WDT error signal MO Accessible flag M2 Data registration complete flag for connection See Section 3 4 4 M3 Initialization complete flag M40 Connectable flag Turns the ready flag ON Turns the line connectable flag ON See Section 3 4 3 See Section 3 4 4 See Section 3 4 5 Line connection command Sets connection request signals When the connection in progress signal ON normal completion sets the connection complete flag Reads the error code at connection abnormal completion Resets the flag with the clear command 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q Example of simultaneous execution of initialization and line connection from the Q series C24 side When the initialization and connection data have been registered from the GX Configurator SC or from the PLC CPU Data for initialization registration Data for connection registration X21 PLS M1 M40 F 3 SET SET Yi X12 SET SET RST X13 WO _ 221 0101 R
399. ooL IL Designate received complete code Always specify User frame use enable disable designation Enable Enable 1st Receive user frame designation 2nd OH No designation First frame No designation 3rd 4th 1st 410 OH No designation 1H or higher There is Receive user frame designation 2nd 41 designation Last frame No designation 3rd 1 In this setting only three combinations 4th 0 become valid 1st Format 0 Everything is set to User frame receive format 2nd Format 0 Format 0 since the first designation 3rd Format 0 frame is not 4th Format 0 designated 1st Ou Setting value for Format 1 Exclusive format 1 received data 2nd 0 This setting is not count designation 3rd required since everything is set to 4th 0 Format 0 11 20 11 20 11 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING USER FRAMES MELSEC Q 11 3 Receive Program This section shows examples of the sequence program to read the reception data stored in the Q series C24 buffer memory to the PLC CPU when data including the use frame is received 11 3 1 Sequence program example The following example shows a sequence program that stores the received user frame setting number combination number in DO and the received data in addresses beginning with D10 For details on the INPUT instruction see Section 9 4 of the User s Manual Basic Reception data read request X83 FROMP H8 H25B Do K1 Reads
400. or all other combinations In addition set in the following order starting from the first buffer memory AEH to 5 14 to 155 When specifying the first frame i Each frame No for combinations that specify the first frame and the last frame ii Each frame No for combinations that specify the first frame but not the last frame Ofthe maximum four combinations to be set if there is a combination that specifies the last frame only without specifying the first frame the first frame cannot be specified in any of the combinations Set the number of the last frame to be used in order starting from the first area of the buffer memory AEH to 5 14 to 155 When setting more than one combination the first frame having the registered data in the same arrangement or the same frame number cannot be designated However the last frame can be designated Use the user frame numbers of the following user frames to set the receive user frames See Section 9 1 1 Default registration frame numbers 1H to 3E7H 2 User frame numbers registered in the Q series C24 flash 3E8H to 4AFH 3 User frame numbers registered in the Q series C24 buffer memory 8001H to 801FH Do not specify set the frame No of a user frame that includes the receive transparent code designation additional code data shown in Chapter 12 as a user frame for data reception using non procedure protocol 11 17 11 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING USER
401. or connection between the Q series C24 and modem TA 2 RS 232 interface connector of the Q series C24 has D sub 9 pins female For the Q series C24 side of the connection cable use the connector shell indicated in Section 3 2 1 3 of the User s Manual Basic 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q 5 Modem TA installation 6 1 Install the modem TA according to the modem TA manual When installed in an area in which a lot of noises exists malfunctions may occur In order to prevent the effects of noise and power surges do not connect near or tie the cable together with a main circuit line high voltage line or load line other than for the PLC with the modem TA connection cable Connectable lines 1 5 The connections can be made with the following lines Perform connection tests beforehand and confirm that connection is possible Public line or office telephone system of analog two line method Digital line ISDN It is not possible to connect to call waiting lines in order to avoid data errors or automatic line disconnection due to the call waiting interrupt tone Avoid connections with party line telephones to avoid interrupted calls during communication If an alert sound is sent at fixed intervals from the communication machine to prevent long term calls data may experience errors It is recommended to check the normality abnormality of data reception between devices and perform transmis
402. or the initialization connection retry timeout Shown below is the relationship of the number of connection retries designation connection retry interval designation and the time for initialization connection timeout time designation used for the notification connection request to the partner device Number of connection retries 3 times Connection retry interval 180s Initialization connection retry timeout 60 s 1st retry 2nd retry 3rd retry Notification Notification Notification Notification le s gt it Pit gt 60s 180 s 60 s 180 s 605 1805 60s completion signal X16 Notification issued request signal X14 Q series C24 ready X1E signal zm A Number of initialization retries designation area address 51 33H The number of retries when the initialization per the initialization request to the modem on to the Q series C24 side has failed 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q g Data number for initialization designation area address 52 34H 1 The registration number for the initialization data transmitted with the initialization request to the modem on the series C24 side is designated The registration number for the Q series C24 is used 2 For details on the designation using GX Configurator SC see Section 8 4 4 of the User s Manual Basic An example of designations using
403. or the time up to the start of transmission of a response message to the external device but waits infinitely After transmitting a message the Q series C24 does not monitor the time up to the start of reception of the response message from the external device but waits infinitely b When response monitoring time timer 1 is set to 100 ms or longer After receiving a message the Q series C24 monitors the time up to the start of transmission of a response message to the external device and returns the elapsed time to 0 at the start of transmission After transmitting a message the Q series C24 monitors the time up to the start of reception of the response message from the external device and returns the elapsed time to O at the start of reception At time out the Q series C24 performs the following processing 1 Data communications using a MC protocol Stores the error code to the MC protocol transmit error code storage area buffer memory addresses 25AH 26AH for the target interface Transmits a response message NAK message to the external device and waits to receive the next command message 6 CHANGING THE DATA COMMUNICATIONS MONITORING TIMES MELSEC Q 2 Data communications using bidirectional protocol Stores the error code to the data transmission result storage area buffer memory addresses 257 267 for the target interface and performs transmission processing abnormal completion While waiting to transmit a res
404. ormed The DC1 to DC4 codes used can be arbitrarily changed 2 Transmission control function usage conditions 1 DTR DSR control and DC code control cannot be used at the same time Select one of them using the GX Configurator SC registration 2 When using DTR DSR control connect the Q series C24 DTR and DSR signals to the external device 3 Transmission control function setting Set a transmission control function that can control the target interface If a function that cannot control the target interface is set the set contents are invalid 4 Setting of transmission control function during linked operation When the two Q series C24 interfaces are linked see Section 4 4 2 of User s Manual Basic set the transmission control function of only the interface that must be controlled Set the other interface to Do not use transmission control function set value when directly set to the buffer memory 00014 5 DC code control 1 DC1 DC3 transmission control and DC1 DC3 reception control are possible when full duplex communications is used to communicate data between the Q series C24 and external devices Do not use DC1 DC3 control with half duplex communications 2 The same data as the DC1 to DC4 codes cannot be included in the user data To handle the same data as a DC code as user data do the following Use DTR DSR control Change the DC code Do not use the transmission control functions 7 DATA COMMUNICATIONS
405. orms the remote password unlock release 4 processing for the QCPU of the station where the Q series C24 is installed using dedicated commands for MC protocol communication The unlock processing cannot be performed for the QCPU of other station See Section 3 3 7 8 for what to do when the remote password unlock processing is completed abnormally Data communication is performed from the external device using MC protocol 5 When data communication using MC protocol is completed a line for the modem is disconnected from the external device When line disconnection is completed the remote password lock processing is performed automatically 1 See Section 3 18 of Reference Manual for the unlock processing for the remote password 2 When accessing the PLC from the GX Developer connected to the Q series C24 the remote password unlock processing is performed when on line operation begins 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q 4 How to set the remote password On the screen below for setting parameters remote password using the GX Developer set the remote password in the QCPU and specify the Q series C24 that performs the check Set the remote password as the following instructions Start procedure GX Developer gt Remote password setting screen Setting screen Remote password settings Password settings Password Password active module settings Model name QJ71C24 CMO
406. ose noted below the default values are used Setting item Setting value Send transparent code designation Receive transparent code designation 1004 ASCII BIN conversion designation Convert 13 12 13 12 13 COMMUNICATING WITH ASCII CODE ASCII BIN CONVERSION MELSEC Q 13 6 1 Example of data reception The following shows an example of data reception when ASCII BIN conversion is enabled When the receive transparent code designation is set to Enable and ASCII BIN conversion is set to Enable Additional code 10H DLE transparent code 04 EOT Data length E N 00044 Data section Sum check 1 i i i L H 0 4 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 A B 0 0 DIO A 5H 30 34 30 30 31 32 33 34 35 41 42 43 44 45 46 30 30 44 30 41 HBDHO4H 19 2 External device side Set to even byte except for additional code PLC CPU side Two bytes of reception data is read to the PLC CPU Reception data read as one byte data excluding additional code request x83 PLC CPU Data length Number of data received Excluding additional code Number of bytes after ASCII BIN conversion 8 2 4 MO when word units are used Completion device ON 8 when byte units are used 4 Abnormal Status display device M1 completion at completion i Normal
407. ously if the Q series C24 stops and then restarts transmitting designate whether the stopped message will be transmitted from the beginning resend or whether transmission will continue after the stopped message not resend RS 232 CD terminal check designation When using half duplex communication set the CD terminal check designation to on 8 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING HALF DUPLEX COMMUNICATIONS MELSEC Q 8 4 Connector Connections for Half duplex Communications The following explains the functions of the connector that connects the Q series C24 and external device when half duplex communications is used Connect the Q series C24 and external device based on 1 and 2 below 1 Connect the Q series C24 RS signal to one of the external device half duplex communications signals CS DSR or CD signal 2 Connect the Q series C24 CD signal to one of the external device half duplex communications signals RS or DTR signal 3 The half duplex communications described in this section cannot be performed when an RS 232 and RS 422 converter is used Connection example Q series C24 Cable connection and External device Signal name Pin No Signal direction Signal name SG RD RXD RD RXD SD TXD SD TXD som TRIER SG DSR DR DSR DR RS RTS RS RTS CS CTS CS CTS RI Cl EL 8 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING HALF DUPLEX COMMUNICATIONS MELSEC Q 8 5 Half duplex Commu
408. parent Transparent code 1st group Head SER t code 1st group 015 N iDiE For word unit 0 112 S L T UTA U Received byte count excluding additional code 12 2 6 1 Li EX LiRiF For byte unit FLC GPU sie i t ci bu 5 Received byte count excluding additional code 12 PE E TE 03H OOHODHOA iN 0 31Hi32H 33u10H02u 00 41 42 10 1 1 1 1 1 2 X50 Transmission command PLC CPU OUTPUT Transmission data count Completion device Abnormal ate i completion Status display device M1 The following diagram is for word unit at completion Normal completion j One scan 03 400 1 0 1 0 p19 31H 30H 40th 31H 30H 3 2 3 2 E DIT 394 324 4029 394 2 NULL STX 5 NULL STX E gt D 2 024 4034 024 t B A B A D13 404 2 424 41 42H 4n NULL ETX NULL ETX D14 405 00H 03H E 03H LF CR LF CR D 5 406 Transmission instruction Sequence program device memory Buffer memory X50 DMOVP 33323130 D10 Sets transmission data in D10 to D15 DMOVP 42410002 D12 HOAODOO003 D14 Di Sets CH1 to the transmission channel D3 Sets the number of transmitting data to 6 01 010 MO Executes transmission MO Mi SET M
409. pection 7000 or higher Section 10 2 of the User s Manual Basic 17 3 17 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q Precaution when using the BUFRCVS instruction Program example 17 4 1 Use the BUFRCVS instruction when receiving data via an interrupt program 2 If reading of data received is to be done for the same interface data cannot be received by the main program when the receiving of data is done by an interrupt program Thus the BUFRCVS instruction cannot be used together with the following instructions INPUT instruction instruction for receiving data using the non procedure protocol via the main program BIDIN instruction instruction for receiving data using the bidirectional protocol via the main program Data cannot be received using the FROM instruction and input output signals 3 The CSET and BUFRCVS instructions cannot be executed at the same time 4 The device storing data received via the BUFRCVS instruction must have an area that is large enough to store the maximum size of data received from the external device If an area large enough to store the maximum size of data received from the external device is not secured the data following the storage device will be overwritten An interrupt program that reads receive data Setting Interrupt pointer setting with GX Developer CPU side Interrupt pointer Start No 50 Interrupt pointer No of units 2 fixed CH1 side interrupt poi
410. play SSmi The project name for matching 22m Parity error zg Bl Framing error Transmission receive packet details display Transmission receive packet list display This section describes the communication data monitoring by the PLC program 16 1 16 1 16 USING COMMUNICATION DATA MONITORING FUNCTION MELSEC Q 16 1 2 Communication data monitoring operation The following describes the communication data monitoring operation 1 When using the communication data monitoring function the total transmission speed of the two interfaces should not exceed 115200 bps 2 The communication data monitoring function is effective when the communication protocol is assigned to to 1 Monitor start a Monitor start instruction 000 1H is written in the communication data monitoring specification area Address 2018 2118 Set by user b By the monitor start instruction the monitor data pointer monitor data size area are cleared to 0 and 0002 is written in the communication data monitoring specification area which starts monitoring 1 Q series C24 is set c When a monitor setting error occurs 100FH is written in the communication data monitoring specification area Q series C24 is set Check the monitor buffer head address and the monitor buffer size setting range and perform monitoring again x1 Monitor data area Default address 2602 to 32FFH 3302H to 3FFFH is not cleared to 0
411. plete code Data to be stored arbitrary data and received in the reception area section data count Delete additional code 12 5 12 5 12 TRANSPARENT CODES AND ADDITIONAL CODES External device MELSEC Q Example When ASCII BIN conversion is not performed Communicating in an arbitrary format Head data 1024 Receive Q series C24 External device xum Transparent code For 024 Additional code For 10x Delete Additional code Addition Buffer memory transmission area reception area 0 Transmission data _ _ count Receive data count Transmission data receive data The data count is in word units Example When ASCII BIN conversion is performed Communicating in an arbitrary format Head data Send Arbitrary data section Q series C24 Buffer memory transmission area reception area 1 Transmission data _ _ count Receive data count code oz Transmission data receive data L 1 210 2 3 E A BiC 314 324 304 32413341041 41n 42u 43n Receive Transparent code Additional code For 10 12 6 Delete Additional Addition 12 6 12 TRANSPARENT CODES AND ADDITIONAL CODES MELSEC Q b Communication using user frames 1 Receiving Reception check of user frames first frame last frame is performed I
412. ponse message the Q series C24 does not check the response monitoring time 2 Changing the response monitoring time timer 1 The response monitoring time timer 1 is registered on the GX Configurator SC s Transmission control and others system setting screen For data communication using the MC protocol set the response monitoring time so that it is longer than the message wait time 7 1 For details on the registration method of the response monitoring time see Section 8 4 5 of the User s Manual Basic 1 The message wait time is designated at the following locations A compatible 1C frame Designate in a command message QnA compatible 2C 3C AC frame GX Configurator SC MC protocol system setting screen POINT When changing the response monitoring time timer 1 default value 5 s observe the following precautions 1 Data communications using an MC protocol In any of the following cases make the default value the message wait time described in Section 6 4 or longer a When designating the monitor conditions with the following functions set the maximum time matched to system operation Word units random read See Section 3 3 8 of Reference Manual Device memory monitor See Section 3 3 9 of Reference Manual b Access other than a above 1 When accessing a station connected including multidrop link to an external device set the following value or longer Response monitoring time Maximum n
413. ps until the transmission of monitoring data completes 2 When transmission resumes reading of monitoring data from the PLC CPU resumes and monitoring data and information are transmitted b When the setting for the transmission monitoring time designation timer 2 is other than an infinite wait 1 Atransmission timeout error occurs monitoring information read from the PLC CPU and transmission of monitoring information resumes 2 The error code is stored in the PLC CPU monitoring function error code storage area address 2205 When device data for the PLC CPU cannot be read because of a PLC CPU error hardware failure etc the error code is stored in the PLC CPU monitoring function error code storage area and the Q series C24 performs the monitoring processing based on previously read data 2 USING THE PLC CPU MONITORING FUNCTION MELSEC Q 9 When transmitting the monitoring information as data using the modem function modem connection error will occur if a modem connection is requested for the following reasons A connection request by Y11 A notification issued request by Y 14 If possible provide a dedicated Q series C24 for using the PLC CPU monitoring function When using both the PLC CPU monitoring function and data communication function with a single Q series C24 and one of the above modem connection errors occurs re execute a connection request in consideration of the transmission timing set by th
414. put N S2 7 0 No designation at condition agreement 0 1 to 100 head pointer transmission and notification 1 to 100 Head pointer Designate the user frame transmission output counts for fee ee constant cycle transmission S2 8 CR Sun 0 No designation at condition agreement 0 1 to 100 cycle transmission count Me 1 u transmission and notification dicus 1 to 100 Transmission count Designate the data No for connecting the modem function when sending notifications in constant cycle transmission 0 Modem connection 0 No designation at data transmission and PES data No condition agreement transmission 8001 to 801 8 to BD5a Data No for connection flash ROM 8001 to 801Fu Data No for connection buffer memory PLC CPU abnormal monitorin Designate whether or not to execute abnormal monitoring for itori S2 12 n d the PLC CPU 0 1 PLC CPU status monitoring 0 Do not monitor 1 Monitor Designate the code of a device to be monitored See Section 52 13 Device code 0 Do not monitor device Other than 0 Device code 2 2 2 4 52 14 Monitoring head Designate the head number of the monitoring device in this 0 or more User S2 15 device block Designate the registration points read points for this block 0 Do not monitor device 1 more Registration points Fora bit device designate the points in word units Designate the monitoring condition fo
415. put head pointer designation 8 158 184 340 1 to 100 See 1 Output count designation 9 159 185 341 Unused 1 to 100 See 2 BAW15A 186 342 Output trame BBW ISB 187 343 dorados Aie econ H LODH Data for initialization registration number designation 1 Hundredth 110 1 0 285 445 x1 The data for initialization registration number to be used is designated 7DOH to 7DDH 2000 to 2013 Data registered by the OS 9C4H to 9E1H 2500 to 2529 Data registered in the Flash ROM by the user 8001 to 801FH 32767 to 32737 Data registered in the buffer memory by the user 1 Output head pointer designation area address 184 344 8 158 Designate the location of the head position n th unit in the output frame number designation area to which the registration number of the data for initialization to be sent is written 1 Transmitted form the first unit to 100 Transmitted from the 100th unit 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q 2 Output count designation area address 185 345 9 159 The number of data for initialization units to be transmitted starting from the location set by the output head pointer designation area is designated here 1 1 data will be transmitted to 100 100 data will be transmitted Precautions during modem TA initialization If the DSR signal from the modem TA goes OFF when modem TA initialization is completed X10 goes ON the Q Series C24 executes in
416. r access from an external device The company cannot assume any responsibility for any problems that may arise from system troubles caused by improper access An example of a safeguard on the PLC CPU with respect to improper access One example is shown in Section 3 3 6 in which the PLC CPU disconnects a line to the external device when the number of times a remote password mismatch is detected exceeds the number set by the user with regard to the Q series C 24 remote password check explained in this section 1 Data communication during remote password setting This section explains the use and setting of the QCPU remote password function and data communication between the external device and the QCPU when a remote password has been set a Allowing prohibiting access to the PLC from the external device 1 Access allow processing unlock processing To access the specified QCPU the external device performs the remote password unlock processing with respect to the Q series C24 of the directly connected station local station after line connection for the modem function If the unlock processing has not been performed the remote password check performed by the series C24 that has received a communication request prohibits access to the specified station See 2 All data communication before the unlock processing is performed will be processed as an error The series C24 of the QCPU station for which a remote p
417. r each start up of the Q series C24 4 Itis recommended to store the data for initialization to the Flash ROM after completing the debug process By registering it to the Flash ROM the registration process of the data for initialization will be unnecessary thereafter 2 Types of data for initialization 1 There are data for initialization that are registered in the Flash ROM of the Q series C24 upon shipping and data for initialization that are set by the user 2 The number of times registered number of possible registrations are shown in the chart below 3 Data for initialization registration number 1 The registration numbers shown in the table below are used from the memory of the registration destination 2 The registration number of the data for initialization is determined by the area of registration Registration data Registration destination Registration number Decimal hexadecimal Number of registrations Data registered by OS 2000 to 2013 700 to 7DDH Data for initialization Data registered by the user 2500 to 2529 9C4u to 9E1H All are set by the user 32767 to 32737 80014 to 801 4 Precautions during the registration of data for initialization 1 The maximum size of the initialization commands that may be registered as one data for initialization is 78 bytes 2 Do not include CR LF data code ODu OAn in the data for initialization to be registered to the Q series C24 The
418. r frame setting for reception 1 About user frame setting for reception This setting is to receive data from the opposite device using non procedure protocol through the use of a user frame Everything is set on the GX Configurator SC Non procedure system setting screen The setting items are listed below See Section 8 4 7 of User s Manual Basic Setting screen Non procedure system setting screen Received data count designation Receive complete code designation Not designated receive complete code H d a CR LF HO000 HO0ffReceive complete code Receive user frame designation User frame use enable disable designation Input following eight items within the following range O Not designated H0001 H03e7 Default frame H03 amp 8 H04af Flash ROM user frame H8001 H801f Buffer memory user frame Receive user frame designation Firstframe No designation 1st Firstframe No designation 2nd Firstframe No designation 3rd Firstframe No designation 4th Last frame No designation 1st Last frame No designation 2nd Lastframe No designation 3rd Last frame No designation 4th Following user frame receive format designation is valid above function version B User frame receive format designation 1st Format Userframe receive format designation 2nd Format User frame receive format designation 3rd Format 1 User frame receive format designation 4th Format User frame
419. r this block 0 No designation at constant cycle transmission 1or more Monitoring condition See Section 2 2 2 2 52 16 Registration points 0 10r more 52 17 52 18 0 or more Monitoring condition PLC CPU Designate 0 for constant cycle transmission monitoring Designate the head pointer of the table designating the user frame setting number for condition agreement transmission for this block 52 19 1st 0 No designation at constant cycle transmission 0 1 to 100 first notification i 1 to 100 Head pointer Designate the user frame transmission output count in Vet condition agreement transmission for this block S2 20 0 No designation at constant cycle transmission 0 1 to 100 issi notification 1 to 100 Transmission count 52 Designate the data No for connecting the modem function when sending notification in condition agreement transmission for this block 0 52 21 0 No designation at data transmission and BB84u to BD5u constant cycle transmission 8001 to 801FH 8 to 5 Data No for connection flash 80014 to 801Fu Data No for connection buffer memo 17 6 17 6 17 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q Setting data PLC CPU monitoring setting 52 22 to 52 102 i Designate the fixed value when the CPU status monitoring is 52 106 performed 1 Designate the head pointer of th
420. ransmission results are stored MOV HO D13 Sets to no CR LF output MOV H1 D14 Sets the output head pointer mov H5 D15 Sets the output counter 6 PRR U8 D11 MO Executes user frame transmission MO Mi 1 SET M100 Sets normal completion flag Mi M101 Sets abnormal completion flag Normal end Abnormal end DO Send data count Send data count 00044 5 tSend data Send data 599 pee D5 Output frame No Output frame No 03 2 D6 D7 80014 D8 80004 D9 041 D10 00004 D11 Interface No Interface No 00014 D12 Transmission result Transmission result other than 00001 D13 CR LF output CR LF output 00004 D14 Output head pointer Output head pointer 00011 D15 Output counter Output counter 00054 17 20 17 20 17 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q 17 7 PUTE Instruction Applicable device MELSECNET H Special Index Setting data Internal device MELSECNET 10 File register Others module register Constant Direct JAO uO cO Zn Instruction code Executing condition Command PUTE m ePurE un 1 Command B L 4 Pue Un 51 _ a data Setingdaa data Description Start I O signal of the module U Binary 16 00 to FE The 2 upper digits of an input output signal expressed in 3 digit Ser bits User S1 Head number of the devices that store control data System Device name S2 Head number of the devi
421. ransmission specifications The transmission specifications on the Q series C24 side for use of the modem function are as shown below The transmission specifications between Q series C24 and a modem TA local station Q series C24 that are not provided in this table are shown in User s Manual Basic QJ71C24N QJ71C24N R2 Item QJ71C24N R4 QJ71C24 QJ71C24 R2 Modem function Available Not available Interface that can use the modem function RS 232 Linked operation between CH1 and CH2 of the Q Not available series C24 Communication method Full duplex communication Synchronization method Asynchronous method 1200 2400 4800 9600 14400 19200 28800 38400 57600 115200 230400 selectable Transmission speed Unit bps Data format 1 On 0 Off 112 Error detection No procedure protocol MC protocol Available 1 When the first five digits of the serial No are 03042 or earlier the transmission speed cannot be set to 115200 bps for connection between the Q series C24 and the GX Developer via a modem Data communication 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q 3 3 2 Specification of connectable modems terminal adapters The specification of modems TA s that can be connected to the Q series C24 side when using the modem function is shown below 1 Specification and precautions for the connectable modems a Modem specification Specification It
422. rd mismatch occurred accumulated count value in the Q series C24 after starting up can be checked in the area where the accumulated count of unlock process abnormal completion is stored address 8956 22FCH Storage area for accumulated count of unlock process normal completion address 8955 22 The accumulated number of times the remote password unlock process has been completed normally is stored Storage area for accumulated count of unlock process abnormal completion address 8956 22FCu The accumulated number of times the remote password unlock process has been completed abnormally is stored Storage area for accumulated count of lock process based on circuit line disconnection address 8959 22FFH The accumulated number of times the Q series C24 has automatically performed the lock process due to a modem line disconnection is stored Each of the accumulated count values stored in c to e above are further explained below 1 The user can clear the values using either of the following Set the accumulated count to 0 using the GX Configurator SC modem function monitor test screen Write O to the applicable area of the buffer memory 2 The accumulated count will be stored as 1H gt 2H gt FFFFH gt 1H 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q 4 Details of buffer memory for the callback function The area s shown below are valid if the Q Series C24 uses the c
423. re and is then transmitted During data transmission using user frames even if a transparent code or additional code has been specified in the send transparent code designation area it is possible to transmit data without adding the additional code data to the user frame portion or arbitrary data When sending data without adding the additional code data specified by the send transparent code designation specify the user frame No using the following method Specify the number obtained by adding 4000 to the registered user frame No b15b14b13 to bO Frame No 0 Conversion enable 1 Conversion disable 0 Frame registered in flash ROM 1 Frame registered in the buffer memory 12 TRANSPARENT CODES AND ADDITIONAL CODES MELSEC Q When sending the data for the section designated by 4001H to 44AFH and 000 to data will be sent without conversion even if Enable has been specified in the ASCII BIN conversion designation area See Section 13 3 Designation No when sending data without No of the use frame to be sent adding the additional code specified by the send transparent code designation 1H to 7 ito 999 40014 to 43 7 16385 17383 8 to4AFH 1000to 1199 43 8 to 44AFu 17384 to 17583 80004 to 801 32768 to 32737 000 to CO1FH 16384 to 16353 12 4 12 TRANSPARENT CODES AND ADDITIONAL CODES MELSEC Q 3 The following describes the processing
424. rea for registration number 8001 v x to 6952 1 28 to 8143 1 for initialization or data for connection 8182 Area for registration number 801 Auto modem initialization designation area Address 8199 2007H 1 This designates whether the Q Series C24 side modem is initialized automatically or not 2 Registration of this area is done through the GX Configurator SC The modem is initialized automatically when the Q Series C24 starts up after the QCPU restarts DR DSR signal valid invalid designation area during modem initialization address 8200 2008 Set this setting to DR signal valid This setting is used to designate how the DR signal is treated when only modem initialization is performed Following the completion of modem initialization data is sent according to the status of the DR signal Modem function completed signal handling designation area address 8201 2009 Set this setting to turn ON OFF X13 to X16 default value Wait time of notification designation area address 8202 200An 1 Designates the waiting time from the moment the present notification is executed until the next notification is executed Unit s when performing more than one notification continuously 2 Designates wait time of notification after checking the time required during debugging 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION z MELSEC Q Circuit disconnect wait
425. receive format designation is valid only in case of Format 1 Exclusive format received data count 1st Exclusive format l received data count 2nd Exclusive format received data count 3rd Exclusive format l received data count 4th GX Configurator SC setting items Description of setting values Non procedure system setting screen Format 0 Format 1 Remarks Designates the data count that persons Exclusive format 1 received data data to be received or the data count becomes valid count of the received data size See Chapter 6 of Reception of combination with the first frame User s Manual The specified value is invalid Basic Receive complete code designation Reception of combination without the first frame Designates the code for the last data in the reception message for performing a read request to the PLC CPU User frame use enable disable designation Designates Enable First frame No designation 1st to 4th Designates the user frame No Designates the user frame No 0 or 1 or higher 1 or higher Last frame No designation 1st to 4th Designates the user frame No s See 2 of this section f Designates for everything 0 or 1 or higher for the contents of User frame receive format designation each setting 4st to 4th TS Designates Format 0 Designates Format 1 J st to Exclusive format 1 received data count ot ad Designates the data count for
426. reen For details on the registration method see the User s Manual Basic Section 8 4 5 1 When changing the no reception monitoring time timer O Find the result using the following expression and set the number of bytes or greater for the no reception monitoring time timer Td x Vbps 12000 Round up fractions below decimal point No reception monitoring time timer 0 1 Td Maximum delay time for external device output processing ms Vbps Transmission rate bps Example Calculation of no reception monitoring time timer Transmission rate Vbps 9600bps Maximum delay time for external device output processing Td 50ms 50 x 9600 No reception monitoring time timer 0 1 41 bytes 12000 In this case actual monitoring time is as follows 41 bytes x 12 1 9600 x 1000 51 25ms x1 Number of transmit bits per byte Fixed 6 CHANGING THE DATA COMMUNICATIONS MONITORING TIMES MELSEC Q 2 When exchanging data with the external device through the Q series C24 RS 422 485 interface and changing the no reception monitoring time timer O Td T1 x Vbps 12000 Round up fractions below decimal point No reception monitoring time timer 0 1 Td Maximum delay time for external device output processing ms T1 External device side H W gate OFF time ms Vbps Transmission rate bps 6 CHANGING THE DATA COMMUNICATIONS MONITORING TIMES MELSEC Q 6 2 Response Moni
427. registering a user frame a When registering a user frame set 1 to the device for S1 0 Data in the device designated by 52 and after will be registered according to the control data b The registered data should be stored in the device designated by S2 and after as described below Thus at least registered data number 2 devices will be necessary to store the registered data and they should be assigned beginning with the device designated by S2 For example when registering 6 bytes of data 3 devices beginning with the device designated by S2 will be used QCPU Q series C24 b15 to b8b7 to User frame 52 0 Register A 1 D 2 F Registered byte length nim O O w 3 When deleting a user frame a When deleting a user frame set 3 to the device for S1 0 The user frames of the frame numbers designated by S1 2 will be deleted b The registered byte number designated by S1 3 and registered data storage device designated by S2 are not used by the PUTE instruction but they are necessary for formatting it Designate 1 to 80 for S1 3 and a dummy device for S2 4 While a PUTE instruction is being executed another PUTE instruction or a GETE instruction cannot be executed While a PUTE instruction is already being executed if another PUTE instruction or a GETE instruction is executed the second instruction must wait until the execution of
428. ries C24 performs error processing If the Q series C24 station No is registered the Q series C24 checks if the received station No is the same as the station No set in the Q series C24 If the station Nos are not the same the Q series C24 processes the data as if normal data was received instead of an user frame Example Register the data codes 03H FFH FOH OD OAH as user frame No 3E9H When user frame No 3E9 is set as a data receive frame the Q series C24 calculates receives and checks the sum check code as the receive data of that user frame part c The Q series C24 removes the user frame data from the received message The PLC CPU cannot read this data With a multidrop link if the receive user frame inherent to each Q series C24 is connected to the link in advance the Q series C24 of a given station will store only the arbitrary data area of the message transmitted by the external device to the receive data storage area External device Data used by the external device to indicate the transmission destination 5 A Arbitrary L nidata area Received by the station No 5 Q series C24 Data when a receive IRIF 1 5 Station No frame is received at each Q series C24 L Oo S First frame 0 X x30 gt PR x90 gt Last frame C24 Q series C24 QC24 N 9 CONTENTS AND REGISTRATION OF THE USER FRAMES FOR DAT
429. rm the operation while there is no data communication in progress with the external device An user frame having only a sum check code as changeable data cannot be registered To register a sum check code add arbitrary data Register a receive user frame in the Q series C24 flash ROM The changeable data 05H to F9H can be specified at only one place in the last frame 9 CONTENTS AND REGISTRATION OF THE USER FRAMES FOR DATA COMMUNICATION MELSEC Q 2 Precautions when using user frames a To send receive data using the user frames it is necessary to set the user frame number to be used in the buffer memory prior to data transmission reception receive user frames must be set at the startup of the Q series C24 The user frame number to be used can be set from the PLC CPU However please try to register frames using the utility package GX Configurator SC of the Q series C24 Set the receive user frame number by the PLC CPU to show the procedure to receive data Receive user frame data by performing the following operations sequentially chapter 11 explains steps 2 and 3 1 If an user frame used in data reception was registered from PLC CPU restart PLC CPU 2 When starting the Q series C24 set the receive user frame No to the buffer memory and write 1 to buffer memory user frame use enable disable designation area addresses ADH 14Dh 3 After the value of the buffer memory user frame use enable disabl
430. rrors in the PLC CPU Chapter 2 describes the PLC CPU monitoring function which monitors the PLC CPU status and devices and automatically sends status information to the opposite communicating device upon the occurrence of an error Touse the PLC CPU monitoring function from the external device using the MC protocol refer to the reference manual for details on how to start and cancel PLC CPU monitoring To use the data communication function for the exchange of data with an external device at a remote location Chapter 3 describes the specifications procedures and other items regarding communication using a modem function in order to exchange of data with an external device at a remote location To use the function for reading received data from the external device using an interrupt program in order to reduce the scan time Chapter 4 describes the programming for execution of a receiving program only when data from the external device is received To use the function for monitoring the data communication time with the external device Chapter 6 describes the function that monitors the data communication time with the external device along with the reception interval time and the response reception time for transmission To use the transmission control function to control data transmission reception with the external device Chapter 7 describes the DTR DSR control and the DC code function to control the data communicatio
431. rt of the receive data When transparent code additional code data set for transmission is detected during transmission of a message in response to data reception the additional code designation data is added immediately before and is then transmitted b When transparent code additional code data set for transmission is detected during data transmission the additional code designation data is added immediately before and is then transmitted When an additional code set for reception is detected while a message is being received in response to data transmission the additional code data is removed and the immediately succeeding one byte data is processed for reception as part of the receive data c Data having an additional code that is added or deleted cannot be included in the data length nor will it be used for the sum check code Example When not using the ASCII BIN conversion Additional code Message Buffer memory i i gm Sun iti H L Additional code 101 Transparent code 02 00H 02H E Data length Transmission data count Receive data count Transmission data receive data 12 13 12 13 12 TRANSPARENT CODES AND ADDITIONAL CODES MELSEC Q 3 The following shows the processing steps taken by the Q series C24 when performing communication with the transparent code designation and ASCII BIN conversion enabled Explaine
432. rtner station turned ON To the data registration processing for initialization subroutine Convert the initialization command into pulse Various complete flags after the modem initialization processing is reset To the modem initialization processing subroutine Convert the data communication transmission command into pulse To the data transmission processing subroutine Convert the reception data read request into pulse To the reception data read processing subroutine Convert the connection in progress signal OFF into pulse Line disconnection from partner side Convert the reset command of various request signal into pulse To the various request signal and the complete signal reset subroutine Output the various complete flag status LED display 3 100 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION 1 Mov K30 MOV MOV ATE1QOV1 amp C18 amp D28 amp H MOV 1 amp I0 amp R2 amp SOSO 1 TO HO H1B00 DO SET M31 P3 SET SET Y10 X10 x13 NO E rROMP H221 D100 Y10 x10 RST X13 RST M52 M92 P51 MOV N02 TO N01 HOAOD K6 SET M92 MO uo D150 051 M150 M151 SET RST M151 SET RST RST RST SET 3 101 DO D1 D2 010 K17 Mt RET Y10 M100 M3 Y10 M32 RET D51 D56 D150 D151 D152
433. s for byte units For word units the optional data section is sent in the sequence ABCD Station No 02 00H 41 42H 43H 44 03 4 OAH X a X 2 3E8H 8000H 400H Corresponding frame No 11 34 11 34 11 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING USER FRAMES MELSEC Q b Transmission user frame designation The following explains application of the buffer memory to be used when sending data using user frames along with the designated and stored values 1 User frame being transmitted storage area addresses B6u 156u What number of the output frame number designation area is being sent is stored in the data transmission via user frames b15 to bO Buffer memory address to 644 CH1 side 156 to 64H 2 0 Not sent Into 64H 1to 100 User frame being transmitted designation No nth number 2 output designation area addresses B7u 157u When sending a user frame or arbitrary data that does not contain a designate whether a CR LF will be sent each time a user frame or arbitrary data is sent b15 to bO Buffer memory address CH1 side 1571 0 to 1 CH2 side 0 Do not send 1 Send 3 Output head pointer designation area addresses B8H 158 Write the head position nth number in the output frame No designation area for writing the registration number of the user frame to be sent b15 to bO Buffer memory
434. s section shows examples of the bidirectional protocol data communication when the following settings and registrations are made 1 Settings via GX Developer Perform the following settings on the Switch setting screen See Section 4 5 of the User s Manual Basic Setting item Setting value CH1 Transmission setting Set according to the Switch 1 CH1 Communication rate setting external device CH1 Communication protocol DOPO Switch 2 0007 Bidirectional protocol setting CH2 Transmission setting Switch 3 0000H CH2 Communication rate setting Not used CH2 Communication protocol Switch 4 3 0000H setting Q series C24 station 0000H number 2 Settings via Configurator SC Register the following settings on the Transmission control and others system setting screen See Section 8 4 5 of User s Manual Basic For items other than those listed below the default values are used Send transparent code aan code 02H STX designation 1st combination Additional code 10H DLE Transparent code 03 ETX designation 2nd combination Additional code 10H DLE Receive transparent code Transparent code 02H STX MA 1002 72 designation 1st combination Additional code 10H DLE Switch 5 Station No setting Transmission control and other System settings 12 16 12 16 12 TRANSPARENT CODES AND ADDITIONAL CODES MELSEC Q 12 6 1 Ex
435. screen see Section 8 4 6 of User s Manual Basic mM Setting Registration screen Setting item vale Remarks Transmission control and others system setting screen Word byte units designation 00004 Word unit On demand buffer memory head address 04004 designation On demand data length designation 00004 2 X First frame No designation 1st 0002 MC protocol system setting screen On demand First frame No designation 2nd O3EBH user frame j Last frame No designation 1st 04011 designation Last frame No designation 2nd 00004 Message wait time designation 10 8 10 8 10 ON DEMAND DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING USER FRAMES MELSEC Q 3 Program example The following program example shows the transmission of on demand data using the on demand function Designate two words of transmission data with the ONDEMAND instruction The data for the user frame section of on demand data to be sent is the registered data for the user frame No that was registered with GX Configurator X53 M50 On demand transmission instruction N50 Sets the transmission channel to the Mov K1 DO CH1 side MOV 01 MOV K2 2 Sets the transmission data count to two words MOV H1234 010 Sets the transmitting data D10 to 011 MOV H5678 011 RST M100 Resets the normal completion flag RST 101 Resets the abnormal completion flag SET M51 Sets the transmission preparation completion fl
436. ser frame Sets data set complete flag 1 Sets the number of registered word blocks to 1 Sets the number of registered bit blocks to 1 ER Registers the devices for D100 to D109 as the first block 2 Registers the devices for to M15 as the second block 2 Sets data setting complete flag 2 Executes PLC CPU monitoring registration Normal completion Abnormal completion b Example of a program for executing PLC CPU monitoring cancellation This example shows a program that cancels PLC CPU monitoring for the CH1 side interface ES M3 5 1 9 wv wov L 2 5 U0 00 0200 M1 j Mt ser M1 ser N37 DO D2 35 M36 1 1 J 1 Sets pulse command Executes PLC CPU monitoring registration reset Normal completion Abnormal completion 2 USING THE PLC CPU MONITORING FUNCTION MELSEC Q 2 4 Precautionary Notes for Using the PLC CPU Monitoring Function 1 5 8 The cycle time will be affected by the following factors Keep these in mind when setting the cycle time 1 When the PLC CPU is accessed by a module other than the Q series C24 2 When a data communication function other than the PLC CPU monitoring function is used 3 When transmission stops by DTR DSR control Both the constant cycle transmission and the condition agreement transmission cannot be designated together for
437. sic Setin the item Remote password mismatch notification count Setin the item Remote password mismatch notification accumulated count 3 In addition to initialization commands used in normal modem initialization specify No automatic receive and additionally register the modem initialization command for this step to the Q series C24 No automatic receive This is the setting to prohibit line connection from the opposite device Use the Modem function initialization data screen to set See Section 8 4 2 of User s Manual Basic 4 Constantly monitor the rise OFF ON of the ERR occurrence signal XE or XF when connecting the line to the opposite device using the modem function after the system begins operating 5 Monitor the following buffer memory when the ERR occurrence signal turns ON Storage area for MC protocol transmission error codes address 602 25 6 Perform the line disconnect processing with respect to the opposite device when the error code stored in the above buffer memory is 7FE8u Use the modem disconnection request signal Y12 7 After the above line disconnect processing is completed specify the modem initialization command for which No automatic receive has been specified and perform modem initialization only See Section 3 4 7 8 Describe the above occurrence to the system manager and take necessary measures 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q Example
438. signati 8 i 2 25Bu Receive user frame 2 to DO 1 ith k 3 Receive data count 600 xto 03 00H 2 User frame receive 2020H format designation 1st Format 0 2021H 2nd Format 0 2022H 1H 3rd Format 1 2023 1 4th Format 1 Exclusive format 1 20244 0 received data count 1st 2025H ond 2026 3rd 2027H 2 Ath Buffer memory Reception data read request X83 FROMP H8 H258 Do Ki Reads combinations of user frames received MOVP KI Di Sets CH1 to the reception channel MOVP K6 Sets the allowable number of reception data to 6 G INPUT U8 DI D10 MO Executes reception M1 h SET M100 Sets the normal completion flag Mi 4 E seT M101 Sets the abnormal completion flag 11 25 11 25 11 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING USER FRAMES MELSEC Q d When receiving with first frame only reception using Format 1 Head data Since it is designated to system 1 received data count 0 the receive data count is 0 or External device 6H LJ First frame Correspond to register No 6 PLC CPU Reception data read request X83 F PLC CPU w S N 5 Completion device MO ON Ans J pcs completion Status display device yj Y pe a at completion Normal completion 1 scan Reception data read request X8
439. sing the non procedure protocol of the Q series C24 as designated by Un according to the control data stored in the device designated by S and succeeding devices as well as the transmission user frame designation area of the Q series C24 2 The following instructions cannot be executed on a channel on which a PRR instruction is being executed OUTPUT instruction ONDEMAND instruction Other PRR instruction BIDOUT instruction While a PRR instruction is already being executed if one of the instructions above is executed the second instruction must wait until the execution of the current PRR instruction is completed 3 Whether the PRR instruction was completed normally or abnormally can be checked with the completion device D or status display device at completion D 1 a Completion device Turns on at the END processing of the scan where the PRR instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing b Status display device at completion Turns on and off depending on the completion status of the PRR instruction Normal completion Stays off and does not change Abnormal completion Turns on at the END processing of the scan where the PRR instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing Operation when the PRR instruction is being executed END END END END Sequence processing processing processing processing t program PRR instruction Completion of tr
440. sion and Buffer Memory Used This section describes user frame on demand data transmission processing and the on demand data list by user frame setting to Q series C24 buffer memory 1 Transmission of on demand data using user frames The following describes the transmission of on demand data using user frame 1 PLC CPU processing Before issuing a transmission request to the Q series C24 set the No of the user frame registered in the Q series C24 to the buffer memory shown below Except for the above the PLC CPU execution procedure and control procedure are the same as when transmitting on demand data without user frames described in Section 3 11 of Reference Manual 2 External device processing When the external device receives the user frame transmitted by the Q series C24 as the first frame receive it as on demand data 2 Buffer memory used and on demand data list 1 Buffer memory used During on demand data transmission by user frame the user frame to be transmitted is designated by the buffer memories shown below Description Designates the No of the user frame that is transmitted as 9 169 1494 329 the first frame Do not transmit First frame No ett Others Transmit 1 designation Other than 0 is always designated for the 1st frame 170 14A4 330 When designating the 1st frame the 2nd frame can On demand user also be designated frame designation z Designates the
441. sion area Buffer memory User data corresponding to transmit message arbitrary data area When a transmission data count error or data transmission error is generated the Q series C24 stores the error code to the data transmission result storage area and turns on the transmission abnormal end signal Xn1 11 32 11 32 11 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING USER FRAMES MELSEC Q 11 4 3 Settings for transmission user frames 11 33 These settings are required for sending data to an external device via user frames and the non procedure protocol These settings are made from the GX Configurator SC or the PLC CPU 1 Settings via the GX Configurator SC Perform settings on the following screen to send data using user frames Non procedure system settings screen Transmission user frame No designation system settings screen For setting contents on each screen see 2 2 Settings via the PLC CPU a How to designate and write transmission data when transmitting via user frames For arbitrary data section when sending a combination of user frames and arbitrary data section the transmission data count and transmission data are written in the transmission area the same as when sending them in an arbitrary format User frames are registered using the GX Configurator SC Or the user frame registration number to be sent is written from the PLC CPU to the transmission user frame designation area of the buffer memory as shown in the diagr
442. sion retry processing when an abnormality is detected See the modem TA manual regarding the connection from a modem to public line office telephone system or from a TA terminal adapter to a digital line 7 Communication system Communication via the modem function is performed using full duplex communication Connections cannot be made devices designed for half duplex communication Data communication and notification to external devices 1 Data communication with external devices and notification to a pager receiver are performed using the public line or electric wave transmitted from the electric wave transmission base There might occur a condition in which correct data communication or notification cannot be carried out due to an error from the system s setup environment electric wave transmission status error in the partner device etc Perform a connection test beforehand and confirm that connection is possible In notification processing via electric wave transmission errors from the pager receiver cannot be detected Setup a separate call circuit with a lamp display or buzzer to ensure the safety of the PLC system 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q 3 3 Specifications This section explains the transmission specification on the Q series C24 side connectable modems TA s terminal adapter I O signals related to the modem function and buffer memory for the usage of the modem function 3 3 1 T
443. sponding to register codes 11 and FFH 17H The two s complement sum check code that calculates the subject range for transmission reception data message is expressed as two character data in ASCII code then transmitted and received from the upper digit The difference between FFH 11H and 17 is the difference between the calculation ranges An example of the contents arrangement of the transmission and reception of the two s complement sum check code is shown below Example Arrangement of data transmitted and received with the register code 17 one first frame and one last frame User frame Arbitrary data User frame first frame last frame User frame register code 02 0143 0341 17 00 0 1 Lau S Station T No 1 gt Xi pog wo s complemen sum check code E 1 gt 026 004 3B4 314 3241334 344 034 46 00 Transmission reception data code Calculation range How to calculate the two s complement sum check code The lower 1 byte of the value obtained by adding the subject data as binary data is converted to a two s complement then converted to a hexadecimal ASCII code In the case of the example 02 00 3 31 32 33 34 03 10 Data in the subject rangeare added as binary data hexadecimal v 00001010 The lower 1 byte of the above numeric value is expressed as a bin
444. ssary QCPU Ethernet Access station module 1 The remote password unlock and lock processing can be performed only for the Q series C24 of the local station directly connected to the external device The remote password unlock and lock processing cannot be performed for the Ethernet module of the other stations relay station and access station 2 The remote password unlock processing from the external device is performed using dedicated commands for MC protocol communication 3 See Section 3 3 7 8 for what to do when the remote password unlock processing is completed abnormally 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q 2 Remote password check processing performed by the Q series C24 a Communication in which a remote password check is performed 1 When the following parameters are set for the Q series C24 installed in the QCPU station the Q series C24 performs a remote password check for communication requests listed below When a remote password is set in the QCPU When the Q series C24 that is communicating data with the external device has been set as a module subject to the remote password check 2 The Q series C24 performs a remote password check with respect to a communication request to the local station other station received from the external device 3 The Q series C24 does not perform a remote password check for the following communication requests Transmission request
445. steps taken by the Q series C24 when performing communication with the transparent code designation and the ASCII BIN conversion enabled a Communication using arbitrary format 1 Receiving If a receive transparent code is designated the additional code designation data is deleted removed The arbitrary data section is stored in the reception area of the buffer memory If the ASCII BIN conversion is designated the data section is stored in the buffer memory after it has been converted to binary code data During reception of an arbitrary data section if the reception complete code data or the entire count of receive data has been stored a reception data read is requested of the PLC CPU 2 Sending The transmission data designated from the PLC CPU arbitrary data section of the transmission message is sent If the ASCII BIN conversion is designated the transmission data section is sent after it has been converted to binary code data If a send transparent code is designated additional code data is added preceding the transparent code additional code data and is then transmitted External device Q series C24 Transparent code designation ASCII BIN conversion designation iE ie Buffer memory ASCII BIN 1 conversion of lt Yes Transmission transmission data area data Data transmission Adding additional code ASCII BIN Check receive conversion of com
446. str 1 RU 107005 Moscow Phone 7 095 790 72 10 Fax 7 095 790 72 12 e mail infoGprivod ru RUSSIA RUSSIA RUSSIA RUSSIA RUSSIA AFRICAN REPRESENTATIVE CBI Ltd Private Bag 2016 ZA 1600 Isando Phone 27 0 11 928 2000 Fax 27 0 11 392 2354 e mail cbi cbi co za SOUTH AFRICA MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC NDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION Gothaer Strasse 8 D 40880 Ratingen Phone 4 49 2102 486 0 Hotline 49 1805 000 765 Fax 49 2102 486 7170 www mitsubishi automation de megfa mail meg mee com www mitsubishi automation com
447. t is sent When the word device unit designation is word unit the device data will be sent in a L sequence The number of registered points is the number of points in word units When ASCII BIN conversion is not performed The total number of bytes for the device data section is the number of device points X 2 When the word byte unit designation is byte When the word byte unit designation is word r1 mao 2 62 5 5 go s sS 8 Ba 5 8 5 E 5 8 8 5 EN 8 Es 8 8 8 Ex 8 8 38 3 232 8 H 38 12122 amp 2 8 5 8 amp 2 j8 8 4 2 9 9 E SH b H L b B L E L HOE M M 104 00 00 904 00 30H LL 120 34n 10 00 004 904 0 OOH 11 0 12 3 0 1 1 1 1 3 0 pe ll E 1 1 1 1 55515511556 MMMMMMMMMMMMMMMM MMMMMMMMMMMMMM 2 2 22 T 1 11 332222 2 2 2 bbc Deoa 3210987610987654 1098765432109876 When ASCII BIN conversion is performed The total number of bytes for the device data section is the number of device points X 4 When the word byte unit designation is byte I 28 Cr s s ge 3 3 8 23 58 2 2 8 E 8 i 28 3 3 E 2 5 z 2 g L H L H L L H E c 1 M 0 0 0
448. t JE Instruction code Executing Instruction format condition CSET art ZP CSET Un S1 S2 D1 02 Setting data Setting data Start I O signal of the module 00 to FE The 2 upper digits of an input output signal expressed in 3 digit Channel No for sending the monitoring result User T 16 51 1 Channel 1 CH1 side 2 Channel 2 CH2 side User Head number of the devices that store control data FN Device name System Dummy Device name Head bit device number of the local station that turns ON for one scan upon instruction completion D2 1 also turns ON if the instruction execution completes abnormally The file registers of each of the local device and the program cannot be used as the setting data Control data Setting data Setting range Set by S290 type Designate 0 o Ue Stores the result of execution upon completion of an instruction Completion status 0 Normal System Other than 0 Abnormal error code Designate the request content Request type 1 Setting of word byte units and buffer memory assignment change Designate the units of transmission reception data count 0 Current setting value 1 Word units 2 Bit units Word byte units designation 17 11 17 11 17 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q Setting data On demand function buffer S2 4 memory head address Designate the head address of t
449. t does not specify the first frame Word b its designati Word b 96 ord byte units designation ord byte H Specify as follows Section 8 4 5 of Yes 120 Additional code 10 DLE User s Manual 2 Transparent code 024 STX Basic Select Do not rt in th ASCII BIN conversion designation Do not convert 121 example Received data count 6to 511 A4H Set according to the example Receive complete code None 5 User frame use control designation Use ADH First frame No designation 1j None to 1 See ee diagram in the application Section 8 4 7 of example Last frame No designation 1 Yes 2 to 5 User s Manual 3 Basic User tame receive format Format 0 2020 to 20234 See the diagram in the application designation example Exclusive format 1 received data 2024 to 2027 Specify Format 0 for a combination 1 This program example gives the registered contents of the user frame No specified as the first frame No and the last frame No User frame No Registered code Registered data contents none First frame No none none 4194 none Last frame No 11 28 11 28 11 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING USER FRAMES When STX is handled as transparent code Head data External device
450. t frame If the last frame is set when the Q series C24 receives data with the same contents as the designated last frame it sends a reception data read request to the PLC CPU b The following describes the Q series C24 receive processing using register data 1 Register data code 01H to 1 byte data register part The Q series C24 receives and checks if the received data is data of the same code 01H to FEH as the registered code Example Register the data codes 03H OAH as user frame No 3E8H When user frame No 3E8H is set as data receive the Q series C24 receives and checks data codes 03H 0DH OAH ETX CR LF as the receive data of that user frame part Artbitrary data area PLC CPU Q series C24 2 3 4 12344 89 Receive data When the Q series C24 receives Storage area the data it performs a Reception data read request to the PLC CPU Reception data read request 9 CONTENTS AND REGISTRATION OF THE USER FRAMES FOR DATA COMMUNICATION MELSEC Q 2 Register data code FFH 00H to FFH 2 byte data register part The Q series C24 receives and checks if the received data is variable data corresponding to the combination of the register codes FFH and OOH to FFH For example if a sum check code is registered the Q series C24 calculates the sum check code from the receive data and checks if it is the same as the received sum check code If the two codes are not the same the Q se
451. t monitors the wait time up to the end of transmission of the response message The following explains the transmission monitoring time timer 2 operation External device Message Response 4 0 ME 9 Monitoring Monitoring time 1 time Elapsed time reset If on demand data is transmitted before a response message during data communications using an MC protocol each time is monitored External device E m PLC CPU On demand data Response Monitoring time Monitoring time Elapsed time reset 1 Q series C24 operation by transmission monitoring time timer 2 a When transmission monitoring time timer 2 is set to The time until transmission of the message or response message is not monitored If the Q series C24 cannot transmit it waits infinitely b When transmission monitoring time timer 2 is set to 100 ms or longer Monitors the time from completion of message or response message transmission preparations to the end of transmission and returns the elapsed time to 0 at the end of transmission At time out the Q series C24 performs the following processing 1 Data communications using MC protocol While waiting for the end of transmission of the response message the Q series C24 stores the error code to the data transmission result storage area buffer memory addresses 257 267 for the target interface The Q series C24 enters the state in which it waits to receive th
452. ta to the external device Simultaneous transmission generated 5 After transmission from the Q series C24 is complete transmit all the data terminated at step 4 from the external device to the Q series C24 1 The time from RS signal ON to the start of transmission depends on the data transmission rate The higher the transmission rate the shorter the time up to the start of transmission 2 Do the following between the communicating devices as a countermeasure against ignoring of the receive data by the Q series C24 Transmit and receive a response message in reply to data transmission Time out check of the response message and data transmission due to time out error external device side 8 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING HALF DUPLEX COMMUNICATIONS b When Q series C24 designated non priority MELSEC Q ae ms data transmission External device Data C T Data A Data B Data B m Since the Q series C24 2 SD Send Data RS Send Request CS Send Possible CD Receive Carrier Detect RD Receive Data Within 1 ms request y 3 does have priority turned ON itterminates transmission H e when the CD signalis gt 14 Transmission wait time 81 Il Data B CD check aN CD check Jm osse Woo 4 CD check 5
453. tching from the PLC program b The communication protocol can be changed from the PLC program as shown below Format switching MC protocol Formats 1 to 5 Non procedure protocol Bidirectional protocol GX Developer connection c The transmission specifications set by the GX Developer switch setting can be changed When using the mode switching function set the setting change of the communication setting to enable in the GX Developer switch setting See the User s Manual Basic Section 4 5 2 15 1 15 1 15 SWITCHING THE MODE AFTER STARTING MELSEC Q 15 1 Mode Switching Operation and Contents that can be Changed This section describes the set contents that can be changed with mode switching and the operation of Q series C24 after mode switching 15 1 1 Settings that can be changed with mode switching The following describes the settings that can be changed with mode switching 1 Switching the communication protocol a The communication protocol setting of each interface can be switched b The communication protocol after the mode switching is specified by the switching mode No designation area of the buffer memory address 90u 130 2 Changing the transmission specifications a The transmission setting of each interface can be switched b The transmission setting after the mode switching is specified by the transmission specification after switching designa
454. ted for the first time from the status information read from the PLC CPU This corresponds to the edge triggered transmission noted below Two transmission methods of the monitoring results are available for the condition agreement transmission for device monitoring These include edge triggered transmission and level triggered transmission 1 Edge triggered transmission The monitoring conditions registered by the user conditions for sending monitoring results the monitoring condition values and the monitoring information read from the PLC CPU are compared The monitoring results are sent or notified only once when an agreement of the monitoring conditions is detected for the first time After that when the monitoring information read from the PLC CPU does not match the monitoring conditions and then it matches the monitoring conditions once again the monitoring results are sent or notified 2 Level triggered transmission The monitoring conditions registered by the user conditions for sending monitoring results the monitoring condition values and the monitoring information read from the PLC CPU are compared While the monitoring conditions agree the monitoring results are sent or notified at each cycle time Timing to transmit data Monitoring information One block One block a portion portion Wo cU SE Se ea vr External device Matched END Not matched END END 2 US
455. tem start up time Protocol FB support function Abbreviation for GX Developer SWnD5C GPPW E n in the model should be 4 or greater Abbreviation for Interface Intelligent function modules Generic terms for the Q series PLC modules that are operated by commands from the PLC CPU equivalent to the A series PLC special function modules Examples CC Link interface module A D and D A conversion modules Ethernet interface module Serial communication module Intelligent function module devices Generic terms for buffer memory of the intelligent function modules used for storing data sent to or received from the PLC CPU setting values monitor values etc MELSECNET 10 Abbreviation for MELSECNET 10 network system MELSECNET H Abbreviation for MELSECNET H network system MX Component Abbreviation for MX Component SWnD5C ACT E or later Operating Manual Protocol FB support function GX Configurator SC Version 2 Operating Manual Protocol FB support function Opposite devices External devices Generic term for Computers indicators measuring instruments ID modules bar code readers regulators other serial communication modules C24 etc that are connected to the Q series C24 for data communication Reference manual Q corresponding MELSEC communication protocol reference manual RS 232 Interface Abbreviation for Interface conforming to RS 232 RS 422 485 Interfa
456. the 1 request signal Set the transmission data 1 1 Set the transmission channel on CH1 1 1 Setthe transmission data count Execute the transmission request 1 1 Transmission normally completed Transmission abnormally completed Set the data reception channel on CH1 Execute reading of receive data Reading of receive data normally completed 1 Reading of receive data abnormally completed 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION Line disconnection processing P7 72 PLS WA SET x10 x12 X14 Hl FROMP HO H221 D105 SET N73 X14 RST X14 H RST L OOOO 74 Y12 M73 12 M73 M72 MELSEC Q Modem disconnection request signal is set When the modem disconnection completion signal is ON the error code is read When the normal completion signal is ON the line disconnection completion flag is set Modem disconnection request signal is reset 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q 3 Sample program for a connection receiving station side QJ71C24 R2 2 After the connection in progress signal x12 ON data communications are carried out by the non procedure protocol through a command from the user Perform the following settings before running this program a GX Developer switch settings See Section 3 4 2 Switch No Setting value Switch 1 07E2 Switch 2 0006 Switch 5 0000 b Settings by the GX
457. the Q series C24 has been set as a module subject to the remote password check with the QCPU parameter a remote password unlock processing must be performed from the external device after line connection before starting data communication 2 The unlock processing for the QCPU remote password is performed as follows When communicating using MC protocol Perform the unlock processing from the external device using dedicated commands When accessing the PLC from the GX Developer Perform the unlock processing on the GX Developer screen when access begins b When the remote password unlock processing is completed abnormally 1 Repeat the unlock processing after checking the remote password set in the QCPU 2 Start with the line connect processing again if the Q series C24 line connect signal X12 turns OFF due to the unlock processing abnormal completion 3 The user should clear the accumulated count stored in the following buffer memory before repeating the line connect processing if the Q series C24 CHn side ERR occurrence signal XE XF turns ON and the ERR LED lights up due to the unlock processing abnormal completion Applicable buffer memory Storage area for accumulated count of unlock process abnormal completion accumulated Address 8756 22FCH How to clear Cleared by the user using one of the following Set the accumulated count to 0 on the GX Configurator SC modem function monitor test screen Write 0 to the
458. the following data communication functions is performed with an interrupt program External device s transmission Q series C24 Interrupt issued Main program I I Interrupt program PLC CPU Receiving data with an interrupt program expedites data reception by the PLC CPU 4 RECEIVING DATA WITH AN INTERRUPT PROGRAM MELSEC Q 4 1 Settings for Receiving Data Using an Interrupt Program The following explains the settings for performing data reception with an interrupt program during communication using the non procedure protocol or bidirectional protocol 1 Setting by GX Developer 1 The following settings are performed with the interrupt pointer No of module Screen The interrupt pointer number and quantity quantity is fixed at 2 for the PLC CPU used for the Q series C24 Assigning correspondence between the PLC CPU interrupt pointer number and the series C24 control number fixed at 0 2 Setthe interrupt pointer No of modules according to the explanation in Section 4 5 3 of the User s Manual Basic 2 Setting by Configurator SC 1 Perform the following settings in the transmission control and other system setting screens Specify Interrupt issued in Receive interrupt issued designation 2 Display the screen in accordance with Section 8 4 5 of the User s Manual Basic and perform the system settings To
459. the following setting and registration 1 The Q series C24 initial settings as shown in Section 3 4 2 2 The data for initialization registration shown in Section 3 4 3 when initializing the modem TA with the data for initialization set by the user It is possible to initialize and connect at the same time by performing the connection process by designating the data for initialization and data for connection See Section 3 4 6 2 Registering initialization data using GX Configurator SC Settings on the modem function system setting screen The number of the initialization data used to initialize the modem connected to the Q series C24 is registered on the GX Configurator SC s Modem function system setting screen The following explains the number designated by the Initialization data number item on the GX Configurator SC s modem function system setting screen and the related buffer memory when the initialization data number 0 is designated Used buffer ww Address tare PH ONE ES Decimal 7DO to 801Fk number for initialization Data for initialization registration number The number of data for initialization used and buffer memory designated value User frame being transmitted 1156 180898 82 338 During initialization the data registration number number currently being sent is stored CRILF output designation 7 157 183 339 0 default value Out
460. the oldest data When action for buffer full is ON When the monitor data area is full monitor buffer size monitoring is automatically stopped and 10024 is written in the communication data monitoring specification area set by Q series C24 2 Stop by timer O error bit 2 When the stop by timer 0 error is OFF Monitoring continues even if the timer error error code 7 40 occurs When the stop by timer 0 error is ON When the timer 0 error error code 7F40u occurs monitoring is automatically stopped and 1002 is written in the communication data monitoring specification area set by Q series C24 Monitor buffer head address specification area Address 201 211 Specify the head address of the storage area monitor data area for the monitor data within the range of the user s free area of the buffer memory Setting range 0400H to 1AFDu 2600 to 3FFDH Default 2600H 3300n 16 5 16 USING COMMUNICATION DATA MONITORING FUNCTION d e imi Buffer memory batch monitor 2 Module start address 00 Hex Buffer memory address 2600 DEC Monitor format Bit amp word Display C Bit C Word MELSEC Q Monitor buffer size specification area Address 201 211 Set the size of the monitor data area Setting range 0003H to 1A00H Default ODOOH Monitor data pointer storage area Address according to monitor buffer head address setting Default 2600 3300 1 The
461. the program is shown in Section 3 4 5 h Data number for connection designation area address 53 35 1 Designates the registration number of the data for connection used by the Q series C24 for the connection processing to the partner device in order to perform data communication notification The registration number for the Q series C24 is used 2 For details on the designation using GX Configurator SC see Section 8 4 4 of the User s Manual Basic An example of designations using the program is shown in Section 3 4 6 i GX Developer connection designation area address 54 36H 1 Whether to access the PLC from GX Developer by connecting the Q series C24 and GX Developer using the Q series C24 modem function is designated 2 When connecting the Q series C24 and GX Developer using the Q series C24 modem function select personal computer side interface via telephone line connection Q A6TEL C24 When connecting direct shown in Section 3 2 3 When this GX Developer designation is performed designate 1 in this area on the Q series C24 side No communication interval time designation area address 55 37 1 Designates the wait time until the line is closed when the data communication has ceased with the destination device after the line connection 2 The Q series C24 automatically performs the line disconnection processing when no data communication is performed with the destination device
462. time designation area PLC CPU watch use address 8206 200 1 When sending data using the PLC CPU monitoring function designates the time it takes to complete data transmission from the local station side modem to the external device after data transmission from the series C24 wait time until the circuit is disconnected 2 Specify the circuit disconnect wait time to match the specifications of the modem that is being used Details of buffer memory for the remote password function Each of the areas described below is valid when the Q series C24 performs the remote password check d Remote password mismatch notification count designation area address 8204 200 1 Use 0 to FFFFu to designate the count that will be the notification timing to the QCPU when a remote password mismatch occurs during the user external device unlock processing after the modem line has been connected 2 It cannot confirm the accumulated number of times a remote password mismatch occurred up to the present after the line connection Remote password mismatch notification accumulated count designation address 8205 2000 1 Use 0 to FFFFu to designate the accumulated count that will be the notification timing to the QCPU when a remote password mismatch occurs during the user external device unlock processing after the Q series C24 has been started up 2 The accumulated number of times up to the present a remote passwo
463. tion Instruction execution Completion device Completion device 1 PLC CPU 1 Stores the data for PLC CPU monitoring registration in the device that designates the control data for the CSET instruction 2 Executes the CSET instruction At the end of the scan in which the CSET instruction was completed the completion device designated by D2 turns ON and then turns OFF at the next END processing 3 When there is an error D2 1 turns ON and the error code in stored in the completion status S2 1 2 USING THE PLC CPU MONITORING FUNCTION MELSEC Q a Example of a program for performing PLC CPU monitoring registration This example shows a program that registers PLC CPU monitoring for the CH1 side interface This registration is for transmitting the contents of MO to M15 and D100 to D109 to the external device using constant cycle transmission cycle time is 3 min Mov SET RST N32 HR ir cs KI 00 D200 Mt SET RST M30 D11 013 D14 015 016 023 D24 025 W36 N32 Converts registration command to pulses Sets execution type Sets request type PLC CPU monitoring registration Sets cycle time unit to minutes Sets cycle time to 3 min Sets the monitoring function to constant cycle transmission Sets the means of transmission to data transmission Sets the output head pointer Sets the transmission count of the u
464. tion area of the buffer 15 memory address 91H 1314 Mode switching allows the user to change the settings corresponding to communication protocol and transmission switch settings of the GX developer 15 1 2 Operation for mode switching The following describes the Q series C24 operation for mode switching 1 Processing currently executing a If there is a mode switching request mode switching immediately starts b If one of the following processings was being performed when a mode switching request was issued that processing is terminated 1 Data communications using an MC protocol Command message receive processing and response message or on demand data transmission processing are all terminated The transmission complete end signal for an on demand data transmission request is not turned on 15 2 15 2 15 SWITCHING THE MODE AFTER STARTING MELSEC Q 2 Data communications using non procedure protocol and bidirectional protocol Data and response message transmit and receive processing are all terminated All the input signals from the PLC CPU related to transmit and receive processing are turned off f the receive data from the external device was being stored to the series C24 the receive data up to that point is ignored and the data is processed with the current receive data count as 0 2 Modification of buffer memory stored value a Special applications area addresses 252H to
465. tion is being executed no other GETE or PUTE instructions can be executed While a GETE instruction is already being executed if another GETE instruction or a PUTE instruction is executed the second instruction must wait until the execution of the current GETE instruction is completed 3 Whether the GETE instruction was completed normally abnormally can be checked by the completion device D or status display device at completion D 1 a Completion device Turns on at the END processing of the scan where the GETE instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing b Status display device at completion Turns on and off depending on the completion status of the GETE instruction Normal completion Stays off and does not change Abnormal completion Turns on at the END processing of the scan where the GETE instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing Operation when the GETE instruction is being executed END END END END Sequence processing processing processing processing program GETE instruction Completion of reading user a execution frames by the GETE instruction GETE instruction i OFF T Abnormal completion Da cra g Status display OFF i Mc device at completion Normal completion i i One scan 17 16 17 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Errors Program example X51 MELSEC Q 1 When the dedicated
466. tions and buffer memory related to data length units The following shows the data communications functions and buffer memory related to the data length units The buffer memory addresses in the table are the default value oo Name of buffer memory related to Data communications function Reference section data length units Address CH1 CH2 On demand data length designation area MC protocol On demand function Reference manual Section 3 11 1 141 Data transmit Send data count storage area function 400 800 Received data count designation area User s manual Basic Chapter 6 Data receive 4 144 function Receive data count storage area 600n AQOH Data transmit Send data count storage area Bidirectional function 400 800H _ User s manual Basic Chapter 7 protocol Data receive Receive data count storage area function 600u 00 2 How to change the units of the data length count The units of the data length count can be changed using one of the following procedures 1 Changing via GX Configurator SC The units can be changed on the GX Configurator SC s system setting Screen Change the units of the data length count according to the explanation in Section 8 4 5 of the User s Manual Basic 2 Changing via the PLC CPU The units can be changed with the CSET instruction Change the units of the data length count according to the explanation in Section 17 4 of this manual
467. to the pager receiver are described 1 S Line connection and disconnection When performing data communication with an external device it must be predetermined which station is to perform the line connection dialing and disconnection processing with the partner device as well as the timings Reception data before connection completion Before the connection processing to the modem is completed the reception data other than modem commands is ignored read and disposed at the interface that uses the modem function Example The Q series C24 will ignore the data even when an MC protocol command message is received Transmission control Delays may occur in transmission controls to notify the data reception capability at the local station to the partner device In order not to have a state in which the partner device cannot receive the transmission data the amount of transmission reception data and intervals should be determined beforehand When transmission reception data in the non procedure protocol the procedure must also be predetermined Priority of data communication and notification After line connection is established the data transmission reception processing with the partner device is performed in the order of the processing request occurrence At the same time when the line disconnect processing or data transmission reception including data transmission processing reception processing and Flash ROM access pro
468. toring Time timer 1 Setting The response monitoring time timer 1 clears the receive wait state of the device that receives the response message when trouble in the device that received the message does not return a response message result to the external device When the Q series C24 receives a message from the external device it monitors the PLC CPU processing time up to the start of transmission of the response message to the external device When a message was received it monitors the external device processing time up to the start of reception of the response message from the external device The following describes the response monitoring time timer 1 operation 1 byte External device Data 1 Data 2 ry ae Data n 1 Data n PLC CPU ES r Data receive interval M depends the transmission rate etc Monitoring time time reset f on demand data is transmitted before a response message during data communications using a MC protocol the time up to the start of transmission of the on demand data is monitored External d Command device message PLC CPU On demand data Response 1 i message 1 1 Monitoring time I Elapsed time reset 1 Q series C24 operation by response monitoring time timer 1 a When response monitoring time timer 1 set to After receiving a message the Q series C24 does not monit
469. uction Reception data read request signal Reception abnormal detection signal Buffer memory reception area IRET erga tei coperto xa Seem Reception using bidirectional protocol Data reception Response transmission X4 When data is received from the external device the receive data is stored in the buffer memory and the reception data read request signal turns ON The main program stops executing and the interrupt program starts The data reception dedicated instruction BUFRCVS for the interrupt program is executed and data is received 7 1 When execution of the BUFRCVS instruction is complete the reception data read request signal turns OFF When execution of the interrupt program is finished execution of the main program restarts When the reading of receive data using the BUFRCVS instruction is finished the following processes are performed At normal completion PLC CPU error flag SMO turns OFF At abnormal completion CPU error flag SMO turns ON The error code is stored in the PLC CPU error code 500 For more details on the PLC CPU error flag SMO and error codes SDO see the PLC CPU Manual 4 RECEIVING DATA WITH AN INTERRUPT PROGRAM 4 4 Programming MELSEC Q This section explains the programming when data reception is performed with an interrupt program during communication using the non procedure protocol or
470. uipment please read this manual carefully to develop full familiarity with the functions and performance of the Q series PLC you have purchased so as to ensure correct use Please forward a copy of this manual to the end user CONTENTS This manual SAFETY PRECAUTIONS mA Adaria AAEN nnne A 1 A 5 CGONTENTS 4er ea eae Aa ween a aa ee Mal ne ae ala A 6 About the Manuals ccs bm URDU URN RO md e 13 The Mantais Use and Structure 3 dee edet beqe te bete eq te A 14 About The Generic Terms and Abbreviations sssssssseseeeeeneneeennnenneenneennee nennen nnne A 16 Definitions and Descriptions of Terminology A 18 1 OVERVIEW 1 1to1 6 TA 1 1 1 2 Functions Added Changed by Function Version 1 6 Neu ss 2 1 2 2 About the PLC CPU Monitoring Function nennen 2 3 2 2 1 Data registration for using the PLC CPU monitoring function eeene 2 3 2 2 2 PLC CPU monitoring information ssi iniinis adedi iia nennen 2 3 2 2 3 Timing for PLC CPU monitoring gt 2 5 2 2 4 Timings of transmission and notification of monitoring results to the external 1 2 6 2 2 5 Transmiss
471. umber of scans required to process the command used X connected station scan time 2 When accessing another station over a network system set the default value to infinity or the following time or longer Response monitoring time Maximum number of scans required to process the command used X communications time When setting the default value to infinity check the external device response wait time and initialize the Q series C24 transmission sequence when time out is generated See Reference Manual Data designation item description for each frame See Appendix 3 of Reference Manual for the number of scans required by processing See Chapter 2 of Reference Manual for the communications time 6 CHANGING THE DATA COMMUNICATIONS MONITORING TIMES MELSEC Q 2 Data communications using bidirectional protocol Set the default value to the following time or longer Sequence scan time X 2 100 ms 6 CHANGING THE DATA COMMUNICATIONS MONITORING TIMES MELSEC Q 6 3 Transmission Monitoring Time timer 2 Setting The transmission monitoring time timer 2 clears the wait state when the Q series C24 that is to transmit a message or response message result has entered the transmission end wait state due to trouble in the external device When the Q series C24 transmits a message it monitors the wait time up to the end of transmission of the message When the Q series C24 received a message from the external device i
472. ure The following explains the procedure for switching the Q series C24 mode from an external device Mode switching command message 1 4 See Section 3 13 of reference manual for message format External device Mode switching response message PLC CPU Normal end MR Approx 400 ms Mode switching in progress X6 XD communication error XE XF Switch setting error mode switching error strage area address 203u Only when normal 3 Buffer memory special applications area Data communications initialization setitng area described in Section 3 9 of User s Manual Basic Addresses 93 to 121 133 to 1C 1u Data communications possible Q series C24 ready X1E default value modification Performed only when necessary 4 Data communications possible Data communications impossible x1 Inform in advance all the connected devices that data communications by mode switching cannot be performed 2 When XE was turned on check the error contents described in Sections 10 1 2 and 10 1 5 of User s Manual Basic and take the corresponding action Checking of mode switching designation contents for buffer memory mode switching area and writing of mode switching designation contents within the range that can be designated Re execution of mode switching 3 When the mode was switched from an external device after mode switching is
473. urned ON 0 X12 RR its Exchangeable flag with the partner station is turned ON M51 Data transmission enabled flag to the partner station turned ON M70 Line disconnection enabled flag with the partner station is turned ON Pi To the data registration processing for initialization subroutine P2 To the data registration processing for connection subroutine M31 Convert the initialization command into pulse K1M3 Various complete flags after the modem initialization processing is reset M7 M32 To the modem initialization processing subroutine M41 Convert the line connection command into pulse K1M4 Various complete flags after the line connection processing is reset M42 P4 To the line connection processing subroutine M52 Convert the data communication transmission command into pulse M53 P51 To the data transmission processing subroutine M55 Convert the reception data read request into pulse M56 p52 To the reception data read processing subroutine Convert the line disconnection Mn command into pulse Line disconnection from local station M7 Line disconnection complete flag is reset M72 P7 To the line disconnection processing subroutine M80 Convert the connection in progress signal OFF into pulse Line disconnection from partner side 3 P1 P2 P3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION X27 PLS M80 SET M81 M82 MOV K30 MOV MOV ATE1
474. utput frame No Output frame No Output frame No Output frame No Output frame No Output frame No Output frame No Output frame No Output frame No Output frame No MELSEC Q 4 The following is an example of setting items and data transmission when sending designa designa designa designa designa designa designa designa designa designa designa designa the monitoring results of the PLC CPU monitoring function execution to the external device using the non procedure protocol Example This example shows a case in which the DO to D3 device information and user frame data are sent by the edge trigger method using a condition of DO 0 Perform the settings on the PLC CPU monitoring system setting screen and the Transmission user frame No designation monitor screen described in Sections 8 4 9 and 8 4 10 of the User s Manual Basic 1 PLC CPU monitoring system setting Setting item Set data Remarks Cycle time units Settings other o Condition agreement transmission Monitoring condition Edge Monitoring condition value 0 2 Setting the transmission user frames ion 46th User frame number ion 47th User frame number ion 48th User frame number ion 49th User frame number 02 Set the user frame data STX ion 50th User frame number 001 Set the first block from DO to D3 ion 51st User frame number 03x t Set the user frame data
475. ve Conversion Q series C24 Buffer memory transmission area reception area H L 00024 0 0212 Trancmission data count Receive data count Transmission data receive data BCH At normal completion At abnormal completion 1234 Transmission result reception result 0000 l 13 11 13 COMMUNICATING WITH ASCII CODE ASCII BIN CONVERSION MELSEC Q 13 6 Example of Data Communication Using the Bidirectional Protocol This section shows examples of data communication using the bidirectional protocol when the following settings and registrations are made 1 Settings via GX Developer Perform the following settings on the Intelligent function module switch setting Screen See Section 4 5 of the User s Manual Basic Setting item Setting value Switch 1 CH1 Transmission setting Set according to the Witc CH1 Communication rate setting external device Switch 2 CH1 Communication protocol setting 0007 Bidirectional protocol CH 2 Transmission setting Switch 3 an 0000 CH2 Communication rate setting Not used Switch 4 CH2 Communication protocol setting 0000 Station number of Q Switch 5 Station No setting 00004 END UR i 2 Settings via GX Configurator SC Register the following items on the Transmission control and others system setting screen See Sections 8 4 5 of the User s Manual Basic For items other than th
476. w103 3 0 1 33 52 E ELLE 8 32 55 8 ofo lololo 1001 8 p Eg 8 MMMMMMMMMMMMMMMM 5 2 0000000011111100 E i 7854321054321098 5 gt 2 30H 31H 30H 30H 30H 30 30H 30H 30H 30H 31H 30 30H 30 30H When the word byte unit designation is word T T T T T T1 TT T T T1 oo 62 c o o 58 8 8 5 E 3 28 5g 8 53 28 5 28 28 m g Bu 8 2 RU Ey 8 g 59 38g 2 S 58 Ei 28 769 z8 Z5 amp amp 8 2 5 E pP Hot Hem mom E H LiH LIH L T gt E e 130H 30H 0 32H 30 30 30 33 4 2 30H 30H 57 2 0 0 30H 31H 30 30H 30H 30H J 30H 34H 0 30 30H 30H 130H 30H 30 31 device Number of registered points Device code Device data Monitoring head 2 16 2 16 2 USING THE PLC CPU MONITORING FUNCTION MELSEC Q 5 When user frame No B082u is designated Information on the monitoring results for the condition agreement blocks are sent for each block Results are sent in the following order The PLC CPU status information the device information registered in the word block and then the device information registered in the bit block Example Number of registered word blocks 2 DO to D3 4 points W100 to
477. when transmitting data When transmitting Calculation includes everything from the data following the first frame first one frame only when multiple user frames have been specified to immediately before the register code Except the transparent code designation additional code data shown in Chapter 12 When receiving Calculation includes everything from the data following the first frame to immediately before the register code Except the transparent code designation additional code data shown in Chapter 12 When transmitting and receiving Calculation includes everything from the head of the message to immediately before the register code Except the transparent code designation additional code data shown in Chapter 12 9 3 9 3 9 CONTENTS AND REGISTRATION OF THE USER FRAMES FOR DATA COMMUNICATION MELSEC Q 1 series C24 processing corresponding to register codes FFH and 00H The following uses an example to describe the processing performed by the Q series C24 when it receives a user frame part corresponding to register codes FFH and OOH Assume that a user frame containing the data codes 02H FFH 00H and 3BH was set as receive user frame No When the Q series C24 receives the 3 bytes of data STX arbitrary data 1 byte it processes them as if user frame No was received The Q series C24 does not check the 2 bytes described above Receive data Receive data 2 3
478. y address 8194 20024 the following processing is executed each time the Q Series C24 issues another refusal An error code 7 9 is stored in the buffer memory s modem function error code storage area address 545 221 The CHn side error occurrence signal XE XF turns ON and the ERR LED lights up When the number of callback processing refusals exceeds callback denial notification accumulated count after performing the following checks and clearing processing make the line connection again from the GX Developer Check the setting contents of the callback function set in the Q Series C24 Check the setting contents of the callback function set in the GX Developer The user should clear the accumulated counts stored in the following buffer memory areas Affected buffer memory Callback denial accumulted count Address 8945 22F 1H Clearing method The user should clear this area by either of the following methods Set the accumulated count value in the GX Configurator SC s modem function monitoring test screen to O Write O to the affected storage area in the buffer memory See Section 10 1 2 of the User s Manual Basic for the method for turning off the Q Series C24 s ERR LED when it lights up 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q 11 Preventing a line disconnect when the GX Developer is connected Perform the following settings and operations to prevent a line to the modem from
479. y the Q Series C24 side 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION MELSEC Q 3 1 3 Comparisons with related devices The following shows a comparison with the related products which supports data communication with the PLC using the modem and public line etc similarly to the communication performed via the modem function Q series C24 ae QC24N Q6TEL A6TEL Communication function name modem function aram modem function for QNACPU ACPU for ACPU Line connection dialing Performed on the extemal device side Communication protocol IE between same Non procedure protocol products such as C24 C24 Bidirectional protocol Communication between Q series C24 and other products Remote communication from GX Developer eee Callback function Remote communication from peripheral device for GPPQ Remote communication from peripheral device for GPPA o 0 4 erm a OUO EC VUA Data for modem initialization Data for connection ESTE T RTT ERN Numberofconectablemodems TAs Analog 2inemethod o Connectable lines Andog4inemehod x x O Digtaine aso o Jf x e enable X disable x1 Modem initialization is executed automatically when the Q Series C24 starts up 2 The internal modem is automatically initialized
480. ype PLC CPU monitoring registration Sets cycle time unit to minutes Sets cycle time to 3 minutes Sets the monitoring function to constant cycle transmission Sets the means of transmission to data transmission Sets the output head pointer Sets the transmission count of the user frame Sets data set complete flag 1 Sets the number of registered word blocks to 1 Sets the number of registered bit blocks to 1 Registers the devices for D100 to D109 as the first block 2 Registers the devices for to M15 as the second block 2 Sets data setting complete flag 2 Executes PLC CPU monitoring registration Normal completion Abnormal completion 2 A program that cancels the PLC CPU monitoring This following example shows how to cancel the PLC CPU monitoring for the interface on CH1 side When the input output signals of the Q series C24 are X YOO to X Y1F 5 PLs N37 N35 H T l wv mo K3 ZP CSET uo 00 0200 H 5 17 10 M37 DO D2 Instruction pulse set Execute canceling the PLC CPU monitoring Normal completion Abnormal completion 17 10 17 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q 17 4 CSET Instruction Initial Settings Applicable device MELSECNET H Special Index module register Constant Others uO cO Zn Setting data Internal device MELSECNET 10 File register Direc
481. yte binary code data and stores it in the reception data count storage area 3 Conversion of data section At transmission The Q series C24 converts transmission data for one address to 4 digit ASCII code data hexadecimal then sends it beginning with the lowest byte L At reception The Q series C24 converts each two characters of a received data section 2 digit ASCII code data hexadecimal to 1 byte binary code data and stores it in the reception data storage area 4 Conversion of error code At transmission The Q series C24 converts an error code for a detected error to 4 digit ASCII code data hexadecimal then sends it beginning with the lowest byte L For 34124 it is converted to 3412 and sent beginning with 12 At reception The Q series C24 converts the first 2 digits of a received error code 4 digit ASCII code data hexadecimal to 2 byte binary code data as the lower byte and stores it in the transmission result storage area For 1234 is received it is converted to 3412 and stored 13 10 13 10 13 COMMUNICATING WITH ASCII CODE ASCII BIN CONVERSION 5 Treatment of sum check code MELSEC Q The data length and the data section after ASCII BIN conversion are added together and the lowest two bytes of the resulting binary code data are treated as a sum check code At transmission The Q series C24 calculates a sum check code using the data length and data section after ASCII BIN co

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

  Implementation of NFC on an ARM Cortex-M3 based  MS4(6)-EE(DE)  XYR 6000 ISA100.11a Compliant Pressure Transmitter  Olympus CS-13FBC  Instructions d`installation  DRS4000 Receiver - MAFware Solutions  PayPal Payflow Pro - 2010 Developer's Guide  FLTR Fat Mini-Ape Handlebar Instruction Sheet - Harley  

Copyright © All rights reserved.

• https://telegra.ph/Wire-Size-Calculator-From-Voltage-Drop-89f74388-11-16
• https://telegra.ph/Calculat-Wire-Area-From-Voltage-Drop-07166d23-11-16
• https://telegra.ph/Footer-Concrete-Volume-Calculator-46d8ad20-11-17
• https://telegra.ph/Footer-Concrete-Volume-Calculator-188748b6-11-17
• https://telegra.ph/Footer-Concrete-Volume-Calculator-e4bde216-11-13
• https://telegra.ph/Round-Slab-Concrete-Volume-Calculator-9c56c358-11-13
• https://telegra.ph/un-equal-angle-steel-weight-calculator-66bbc175-11-07
• https://telegra.ph/equal-angle-steel-weight-calculator-880b7a25-11-07
• https://telegra.ph/Wire-Size-Calculator-From-Voltage-Drop-fcae9099-11-18
• https://telegra.ph/Calculate-Length-from-Voltage-Drop-0c012c33-11-18